FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual PDF

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
User Manual
Customer References:
Customer: PT Citra Tubindo
Rig / Hull: N/A
Tag Number: N/A
National Oilwell Varco References:

SO Number / Project Number: 188074
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001
Revision: 01
Volume: 1 of 1
www.nov.com
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001
Revision: 01
Page: ii
REVISION HISTORY
01 8/11/2014 For Information T. Schutt J. Olson B. Schumer

Rev Date (dd/mm/yyyy) Reason for Issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION
Revision Change Description

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

Section
1 1 General Information Section Not Applicable
1 2 Installation, Operation & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
1 2.2 Spare Parts List
1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
1 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams Section Not Applicable
1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument Section Not Applicable
1 3.4 Performance Data
1 4 Vendor Documentation
www.nov.com
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Section
1 1 General Information
Chapter Not Applicable
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
1 2 Installation, Operation & Maintenance
1 2.1 Procedures
www.nov.com
Document Number: D2G1008930-FDD-001 TOC 2.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 2.1 Procedures
Technical Specification Pre-Shipment And Storage PS-4030 02

Preservation For New-Build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
Commissioning Procedure, FB / FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump EDN-1688 02
Operation Manual Triplex Mud Pump For Models: FD- EPL-1911 01

500, FD-800, FD-1000 & FD-1600
Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pump MP.WARNING 02

Supplement for all Pump Manuals
Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pumps Power 01-05-01-MP 06

End Lubrication Oil Additive and wear-in Period
Procedure The Use of and Application of Safety Wire for ASP00019 A

Secondary Retention
Design Specification Design Torque Standard DS00008 F
General Lubrication Bulletin General Lubrication Bulletin CE-538E 06
for CE Drilling Equipment
www.nov.com
Technical Specification
Pre-Shipment And Storage Preservation

For New-Build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

Triplex Mud Pump
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS
This document contains proprietary and confidential information National Oilwell Varco
which belongs to National-Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
REMARKS subsidiaries (all collectively referred to hereinafter as "NOV"). It is
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV.
11000 Corporate Centre Drive
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or Suite 200
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the Houston, Texas 77041
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to
NOV upon request and in any event upon completion of the use for
U.S.A.
CLIENT PO NUMBER which it was loaned. This document and the information contained
and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV. Phone: +1-281-854-0400
National Oilwell Varco
Fax: +1-281-854-0607
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
Client Document Number

PS-4030 02
www.nov.com
Document number PS-4030
Revision 02
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
02 12.09.2012 For Information RLP BTS GDH

1 15.08.2006 For Information GDH GDH GDH
0 07.05.1990 For Information GDH GDH GDH
Rev Date (dd.mm.yyyy) Reason for issue Prepared Checked Approved
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

0 Initial Release
1 Updated Entire Document
02 Added NOV Standard Front Cover & Updated Page Formats
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 4
2 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT .................................. 4
3 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT ........................................ 5
4 STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION .......................... 6
5 STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS. ........................................... 6
6 PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF
INITIAL PRESERVATION. .......................................................................................................... 6
7 START-UP AFTER STORAGE ........................................................................................ 7
8 CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS ......... 7
9 EXHIBIT 1 ......................................................................................................................... 8
10 EXHIBIT 2 ......................................................................................................................... 9
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 4
1 SCOPE
This specification covers the preservation and storage procedure for shipment of new-build
NOV Triplex Mud Pumps shipped from the manufacturing plant.
This specification is intended to provide preservation of new-build NOV Triplex Mud Pumps
for six (6) months from the shipment of the mud pump from the manufacturing facility. If a
pump is to be stored for a period of time exceeding six (6) months, additional precautions
should be taken as outlined in this specification.
National Oilwell Varco recommends that all pumps are inspected for any signs of corrosion
and for proper preservation at a minimum every three (3) months for pumps stored outside
and every six (6) months for pumps stored indoors.
Sub-tier: National Oilwell PS-3081
2 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT
Drain all water and clean out liner wash tank. Remove drain plug in bottom of liner wash
pump and drain water then reinstall plug. Remove discharge flange from liner wash pump
and pour one (1) pint of inhibiting oil-based concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion
Inhibiting oil-based concentrate or equivalent) into liner wash pump. Rotate two (2)
revolutions by hand to distribute the product. Re-install discharge flange.
Drain all oil from pump power end sump and remove crosshead covers and inspection
covers. Clean out oil sump as per National Oilwell PS-3081 (Mud Pump Cleanliness).
Spray all internal machined parts of power end and crosshead area with inhibiting oil-based
concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion Inhibiting oil-based concentrate or
equivalent). Rotate pump turn and re-spray. Pour quantity of inhibiting oil-based
concentrate specified in the table below into power end sump.
Mud Pump Models Quantity of Inhibitor

14P, FC 2200 5 Gallons
12P, 10P, HD or A1700/1400PT, FB/FC/FD 1600, FB 1300 3 Gallons
9P, 8P, B or A850-1100PT, F/FD 1000, F 800 2 Gallons
7P, A600PT, FD 500 1 Gallon
For pumps equipped with chain drives, spray internal machined parts inside chain cases
with inhibiting oil-based concentrate (Cortec VpCI 329 Vapor Corrosion Inhibiting oil based
concentrate or equivalent).
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 5
Replace all guards and seals as necessary using specified gasket material and sealing
compounds.
Remove fluid end valve covers, seals, valves springs and seats and treat internal cavities
of fluid ends, discharge manifold, discharge strainer block and suction manifold with rust
preventative (CRC SP400 or equivalent). Coat threads with anti-seize (KOPR KOTE
10002 or equivalent) and coat bottom side of valve cover with rust preventative. Reinstall
seals and fluid end valves covers hand tight. Customer liners, pistons, piston rods, valves,
seats, springs and liner retention parts are not used for plant testing. These expendables
are checked for preservation when packed and then shipped with the loose parts.
3 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT
Remove breather and pack with loose parts for later shipment with pump. Seal breather
hole with a greased solid plug. Affix a warning label near the breather opening (see Exhibit
1).
Spray all external unpainted machined parts of pump with rust preventative (CRC SP400 or
equivalent).
Cover large diameter pipe and other openings with hardboard and protective plastic wrap.
Liner bushing openings shall also be covered and sealed.
Seal all other pipe work (air, water, and electrical) with plastic caps of the correct size and
style. Electrical J-boxes are to be encased in protective plastic wrap. Place two (2) one-
pound bags of desiccant inside each J-box before sealing with tape. Wrap pressure
gauges with bubble paper and plastic.
Tape or band down loose hinged guards and inspection covers.
Spray all machined unpainted loose parts and expendables to be shipped with pump with
rust preventative (CRC SP400 or equivalent). All parts will be wrapped or boxed to prevent
damage.
Affix one (1) warning label (see Exhibit 2) to the power end pump cover and one (1)
warning label on the fluid end assembly of the pump. Affix warning labels on each loose
part container. In cases where the equipment will be boxed at an offsite export packer, a
sufficient number of warning labels will be supplied with the shipment.
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 6
4 STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION
Indoor storage is preferred whenever possible; but if outside storage is required, ensure
pump is stored away from salt water spray, sand blast or other adverse conditions. It is
highly recommended that ship loose parts be stored indoors to eliminate conditions that
promote condensation and direct sources of moisture.
It is also recommended to store pump on blocks and cover entire pump with plastic
sheeting.
5 STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS.
For storage preparations for main drive motors, National Oilwell Varco recommends that
the original manufacturers instructions be followed. If space heaters are supplied, the J-
box plastic wrap must be removed and the heaters should be connected throughout the
complete storage period.
6 PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF

INITIAL PRESERVATION.
Note: It is recommended that inspections be carried out on six (6) month cycles when
pumps are in indoors and three (3) month cycles when stored outside.
Remove plastic sheeting.
Remove side crosshead covers and top inspection covers and inspect for any internal
corrosion. Correct any adverse conditions.
Replenish rust inhibitor to quantities previously listed.
Rotate pinion shaft five (5) revolutions using supplied tool.
Inspect for condition of external protection (rust preventative and paint). Correct any
adverse conditions.
Replace plastic sheeting.
Inspect all ship-loose parts for indications of corrosion or damage and recoat with inhibitor.
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 7
7 START-UP AFTER STORAGE
Any pump that has been in storage will need a thorough inspection prior to start-up to
insure it has not been damaged in any way and that all parts are properly in place. Failure
to observe the following points can result in serious damage. Before servicing the pump,
the power end sump and chain drives housings will need to be drained of any inhibiting
additive. The Cortec brand products used for preservation are compatible with all
lubricating oils and need not be totally removed when putting equipment into service.
To service the Power End after storage and prior to start-up, remove all covers and
thoroughly clean and inspect all of the parts and finished surfaces. Check all of the
bearings to make certain they are clean and in good condition. Fill the power end with
clean EP oil of the proper viscosity to the proper level. Make sure oil is poured into the oil
distribution trough and is worked into all of the bearings. Replace all covers and install
breather.
To service the Fluid End after storage and prior to start-up, remove covers and thoroughly
clean and inspect inside of the fluid end cylinders. Properly install valves, pistons, liners
and all other fluid end parts. Carefully tighten all bolts, nuts, studs and working
connections to specified torque requirements.
8 CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS
Product Name Company Contact Number

Cortec VpCI 329 Gulf Corrosion Control (713)681-7500
CRC Industries Inc. SP400 Fastenal (713)983-7715
KOPR-KOTE Drago Supply Co. (800)553-2363
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 8
9 EXHIBIT 1
WARNING
REINSTALL BREATHER BEFORE PUTTING
PUMP INTO SERVICE
NOV PN xxxxxxx
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 9
10 EXHIBIT 2
WARNING
THIS EQUIPMENT IS PROTECTED FOR
SIX MONTHS FROM EX-WORKS DATE OF:
MONTH DAY YEAR
ADDITIONAL SERVICING INFORMATION IS

AVAILABLE IN NOV MUD PUMP OPERATIONAL
MANUAL
NOV PN XXXXXX
www.nov.com
DOCUMENT OR DRAWING NO. PAGE
1 of
ENGINEERING EDN-1688
12
SUBJECT COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE, FB/FD-1600 APPROVED REVISED DATE REV.
TRIPLEX MUD PUMP GDH 02

PREPARED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE
B. Schumer 12 Apr 2012 Bryce Brock 13 Apr 2012
SELLER INFORMATION
COMPANY NAME: National Oilwell Varco
ADDRESS: 11000 Corporate Centre Drive

Houston, TX 77041
TELEPHONE: (281) 854-0400
TELEFAX: (281) 854-0505
DOCUMENT NUMBER: EDN-1688
DOCUMENT TITLE: Commissioning Procedure, FB/FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

2 of
12

COMMISSIONING INDEX
SUBJECT PAGE NO.
Part I. Pre-Commissioning Procedures
Pre-Start Up Requirements.....................................................................................
1. Power End.................................................................................................. 3
2. Main Electric Drive Motors 3
3. Auxiliary A/C Motors. 4
4. Instrumentation........................................................................................... 4
5. Liner Wash System..................................................................................... 4
6. Fluid End.................................................................................................... 4
7. Suction Dampener/Desurger....................................................................... 4
8. Pulsation Dampener.................................................................................... 4
9. Pressure Gauge............................................................................................ 5
10. Reset Relief Valve....................................................................................... 5
11. Discharge Strainer 5
12. Mud Pump Drive Assembly. 5
a. Belt Drive Units 5
b. Chain Drive Units. 5
Part II. Commissioning Procedures
1. Pre-Commission Checks.. 6
2. Commissioning Operational Test. 8
3. Inspections/Check-Offs during Test Program.. 9
3 of
12

INITIAL STARTUP PROCEDURES

GENERAL:
The initial startup procedures are written to assist the operator in preparing the pump packages for normal
operation. The startup procedures are separated into two categories: Part I: Pre-Commissioning, and Part
II: Commissioning Procedures. It is suggested that a copy of these pages be made for each pump to be
used as a check-off sheet.
PART I. PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:

PRE-STARTUP REQUIREMENTS:
1. Power End of Pump:
a. Drain and flush any moisture or contamination that has accumulated in the power end reservoir.
Fill to the FULL mark on the dipstick with the recommended oil.
Ambient Temperature:
0F to 85F (-18C to 33C) = AGMA No. 4 EP
30F to 155F (-1C to 68C) = AGMA No. 6 EP
Reservoir Capacity: 100 US Gallons (379 Liters)
Note: The rust preventative on the internal surfaces of the pump is oil-soluble and is
compatible with the lubricants recommended above. It is not necessary to flush and drain
unless the preservative has become contaminated (water, sand etc.).
b. Oil Filters:
Assure that the oil filters in the power end reservoir and external oil pump system are clean.
2. Main Electric Drive Motors:
Megger test the motors.

Check each motor separately for the correct rotation.
Reconnect if necessary.
Megger test the blower motors.
Check blower motors for correct rotation and quantity of air flow.
4 of
12

3. Auxiliary A/C Electric Motors:
Megger test the motors.

Check motors for correct rotation.
4. Instrumentation (if equipped):
Check to assure that all instrumentation has been properly hooked up. Check the calibration
test sheets for validity and recalibrate if necessary.
5. Liner Wash System:
Clean liner wash tank, if needed, and fill with fresh clean water.
Ensure that supply hoses and spray nipples are installed correctly.
Start pump and adjust regulating valve to maximum flow without splash onto the extension
rods.
6. Fluid End:
Check to assure that all liners, valves, and pistons are installed properly in accordance with
the installation instructions.
Ensure that the liner end covers are installed on the rear end of the liners.
Ensure that the baffle discs are installed on the end of the crosshead extension rods.
Clean grease and paint from the exposed parts of the extension rods, checking for burrs.
Coat rods with a light oil.
7. Suction Dampener/Desurger
If a desurger is used, charge desurger to 10 PSI (0.7 bar) air pressure.
NOTE: When charging the bladder, make sure that the mud pump suction line valve has been
closed and that all pressure has been bled off of the suction manifold surrounding the suction
desurger
If a dampener is used, charge dampener with a hand-operated air pump to 10 PSI (0.7 bar).
Once pump operations have been started, check the operation of the suction dampener by
inspecting the sight glass. Add or release air pressure through the Shraeder valve to keep the
diaphragm between the midpoint and the bottom of the sight glass.
8. Pulsation Dampener:
Refer to manufacturers instructions for charging the dampener.

USE ONLY NITROGEN OR AIR! DO NOT USE OXYGEN.
5 of
12

9. Pressure Gauge:
Check to assure that the gauge is installed and there is no shut-off valve between it and the
discharge system.
10. Reset Relief Valve:
Check the installation and the setting.

NO SHUT-OFF VALVE is to be between the pump discharge and the relief valve.
Ensure that piping from the discharge port goes directly to the mud tank/pit and is securely
tied down, with a minimum downward slope of 1/4 per foot.
Ensure that piping has pressure rating equal to the relief valve highest setting.
11. Discharge Housing with Strainer:
Remove the strainer screen from the housing and assure that it is clean and free from
obstructions.
Check the stud nuts for proper make-up torque.
12. Mud Pump Drive Assembly:
Belt Drive Units:
Check the belt guards to ensure that belts will not drag on the guard.
Check the belt tension as instructed in the maintenance section of the operations manual.
Check the alignment of the drive motors.
Chain Drive Units:
Check the chain guards to ensure that the chains will not drag on the guard.
Check the oil pump to ensure that the relief valve is installed on the suction side.
Start the pump and ensure that the spray nozzles are spraying oil over the full width of the chain.
Adjust the relief valve to 15-25 PSI output with the warm oil.
6 of
12

PART II. COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:
GENERAL:
The power end and the fluid end have gone through rigorous tests prior to being shipped from the
manufacturing site; therefore, the following recommendations for the commissioning test are made
for the purpose of checking the overall unitization functions, including instrumentation, and to
assure that there are no problems which may have occurred during transportation and storage.
Operation of the pump in parallel to check the SCR-Motor assignments and controls, volumetric
displacement and mudline systems are at the option of the purchaser.
A. PRE-COMMISSIONING CHECKS:
Prior to starting the unitized pump package, review the previously outlined Pre-Commissioning
Requirements in Part I.
Check the discharge mudline to assure that all necessary valves are open. Ensure that the mud tanks
are full of test fluid (mud/water) prior to startup.
Make the desired assignment of the SCR-Motor Control System to the pump motors, and open the
throttle slightly. Check to ensure that charge pump and liner wash motors have started.
If no immediate problems are encountered, slowly throttle the pump to approximately 60 SPM and
continue operating the mud pump while making the following inspections to assure that all systems
are working properly:
1) Power End Lubrication:
Check oil pressure: Max. = 60 PSI (4.14 bar) cold oil.

Min. = 5 PSI (0.344 bar) at any speed.
Normal = 7-40 PSI (0.483-2.76 bar)
2) Liner Wash System:
Adjust the regulator valve for proper volume of cooling fluid. 10 US Gallons (38 Liter)
per minute per liner.
Check the coolant temperature. 150F (66C) maximum.
3) Check for oil leaks around the power end covers and seals.
4) Check for interference or dragging in the belt/chain drive assemblies.

7 of
12

5) Visually inspect the mud pump drive assembly for any unusual conditions, i.e. loose bolts,
vibration, noise, etc.
6) Check the performance of the supercharging system:
Pump A/C motor operating properly.

Valves open for the proper volume of drilling fluid.
Gauges/controls functioning properly.
7) Check the relief valve:
Check the valve for proper relief setting. The valve should be set 10% above the
pressure rating for the liner size being used.
Refer to the nameplates on each side of the pump or the pump datasheet to obtain the
operating pressure for that particular size liner.
8 of
12

B. COMMISSIONING OPERATIONAL TEST:
DURATION: EIGHT (8) HOURS TOTAL RUNNING TIME.
The following are basic guidelines for conducting of an eight (8) hour operational test. The pump was
test run under pressure in the manufacturing plant but with different motors and drives.
The discharge pressure can be regulated by temporarily installing an adjustable choke at some point in
the discharge line.
NOTE: There can be short intervals of shut-down time to fix leaks, make adjustments, etc., without
having to restart the test program.
1. LOWER PRESSURE TEST DURATION: TWO (2) HOURS:

TIME
START STOP
0-500 PSI (0.34-34.5 bar)40 min. @ 40 SPM _______ _______
500-700 PSI (34.5-48.2 bar)40 min. @ 50 SPM _______ _______
1000 PSI (68.9 bar)..40 min. @ 60 SPM _______ _______
2. MEDIUM/HIGH PRESSURE TEST DURATION: SIX (6) HOURS:
1500 PSI (103.4 bar)60 min. @ 80 SPM _______ _______
2000 PSI (138 bar)...60 min. @ 100 SPM _______ _______
2500 PSI (172.4 bar)60 min. @ 100 SPM _______ _______
RATED LINER PRESSURE*...180 min. @ 100 SPM _______ _______

* Not to exceed pressure rating of fluid end.
9 of
12

C. INSPECTIONS/CHECK-OFFS DURING TEST PROGRAM:
The overall performance of the unitized pump package should be continuously monitored during the
eight hour test program. The following checks should be made and recorded each two hours of
operation.
START 2 HR 4 HR 6 HR 8 HR
1. POWER END LUBRICATION:
PRESSURE.. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
TEMPERATURE. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
2. LINER WASH SYSTEM:
MOTOR AMPS ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
REGULATING VALVE ADJUST ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
INLET TEMPERATURE. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
OUTLET TEMPERATURE. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
3. MAIN DRIVE MOTOR NO. 1:
COOLING AIR TEMP ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
BEARING TEMP ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
BLOWER AIRFLOW. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
MOTOR AMPS ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
o VOLTS. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
LOAD SHARE (YES/NO).. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____

10 of
12

4. MAIN DRIVE MOTOR NO. 2:
COOLING AIR TEMP ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
BEARING TEMP ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
BLOWER AIRFLOW. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
MOTOR AMPS ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
o VOLTS. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
LOAD SHARE (YES/NO).. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
5. LINER/PISTONS (Yes/No):
INDICATIONS OF SCORING.. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
ABNORMAL BREATHING.. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
LINER TEMPERATURE... ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
6. SUPERCHARGING SYSTEM:
MOTOR AMPS ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
SUCTION MANIFOLD PRESS. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____

11 of
12

7. OVERALL VISUAL EXAMINATION (Yes/No):
OIL LEAKS. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
GUARDS DRAGGING.. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
LOOSE BOLTS... ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
LOOSE/LEAK OIL LINE.. ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
COOLANT LEAKS.... ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
8. OTHER:
___________________________ ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________ ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________ ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________ ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
___________________________ ______ _____ _____ _____ _____
Comments:
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
12 of
12

COMMISSIONING ACCEPTANCE:
Date Complete: ________________________________
Client _______________________ ______________________ _____________________

Name Signature Title
Class _______________________ ______________________ _____________________

Owner _______________________ ______________________ _____________________

National______________________ ______________________ _____________________

Oilwell Name Signature Title
Varco
Operation Manual
Triplex Mud Pump

For Models:
FD-500, FD-800, FD-1000 & FD-1600

Triplex Mud Pump
REMARKS
which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited 1530 W Sam Houston Pkwy. N
purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell Varco.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or Houston, TX 77043
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the Phone 713-935-8000
express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Fax 713-935-8382
to be returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in any
CLIENT PO NUMBER event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned.
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
Client Document Number EPL-1911 01
www.nov.com
Document number EPL- 1911
Revision 01
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 15.08.2006 New Manual TMH TMH KS

CHANGE DESCRIPTION
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 3
PREFACE
This manual is provided for guidance of those who wish to install, repair, maintain, or adjust the
National Oilwell Varco equipment covered herein. This information has been prepared with a
basic viewpoint to give accurate and concise data needed to perform minor adjustments as well
as major overhauls.
This information is not elementary, as it is intended for operators and servicemen who are familiar
with drilling equipment in general. It is not intended, nor would it be possible in such limited
space, to cover every possible condition which may be encountered. Always use good, sound
mechanical practices and safety precautions.
All specifications are in accordance with Engineering designs and should be adhered to in all
repairs. Operation and maintenance information on equipment other than National Oilwell Varcos
is taken in part from the various manufacturers manuals. If the equipment manufacturers issue
later instructions, or in the event of conflict, the manufacturers information will take precedence
over that shown in this manual, unless specifically stated otherwise.
Refer to the General Lubrication Bulletin for approved lubricants. If any discrepancy exists
between the recommendations in this manual and the General Lubrication Bulletin, those in the
Lubrication Bulletin will take precedence.
The manual sections follow logical divisions in major components, and cover all standard
production unless otherwise specified. Specifications and components covered are for standard
equipment current at the time this manual was approved for printing.
National Oilwell Varco reserves the right to discontinue models at any time, or change
specifications or design of any model without notice and without incurring any obligation.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 4
IN ORDER TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY during performance of any maintenance

or inspection procedures, this equipment must be shut down and not operating. Each
motor and generator is equipped with a motor cutout switch. This switch should be IN,
and the safety bar in place, when any maintenance or inspection procedures are
performed. Employ good mechanical practices when making maintenance repairs,
adjustments, inspections, etc.
When operating all mechanical and electrical equipment, all safety devices must be
engaged, properly adjusted, and in good operating condition, including overtravel devices
for traveling blocks, warning or shutdown devices for engines, etc.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PREFACE.................................................................................................................................... 3
1 INSTALLATION OF NEW PUMP ................................................................................... 11
2 SETTING THE PUMP ..................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Land Installations.................................................................................................. 11
3 SUCTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS........................................................................... 16
3.1 Caution ................................................................................................................. 16
4 PREPARATION OF POWER END ................................................................................. 17
4.1 Power End Lubrication.......................................................................................... 17
4.2 Installation of Crosshead Extension Rods and Diaphragm Stuffing Box Seals..... 18
5 PISTON AND LINER COOLING SYSTEM ..................................................................... 19
5.1 Stationary spray (View A, Fig. 6) .......................................................................... 20
5.2 Moving Nozzle ...................................................................................................... 20
6 ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS ............................................................................. 23
6.1 Valves and Seats.................................................................................................. 23
7 FD-500, FD-800 & FD-1000............................................................................................ 24
7.1 Liners.................................................................................................................... 25
7.2 Piston Rod ............................................................................................................ 25
7.3 Piston Rod Clamps ............................................................................................... 25
7.4 Liner Cage and Lower Valve Guide ...................................................................... 26
7.5 Cylinder head ....................................................................................................... 26
7.6 Discharge Valve Pot Covers ................................................................................. 26
8 FD-1600 .......................................................................................................................... 27
8.1 Liner...................................................................................................................... 28
8.2 Piston Rod ............................................................................................................ 28
8.3 Piston Rod Clamps ............................................................................................... 29
8.4 Lower Valve Guide and Cylinder Head................................................................. 29
8.5 Discharge Valve Pot Covers ................................................................................. 29
8.6 Discharge Manifold all models .............................................................................. 30
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 6
8.7 Suction Flange...................................................................................................... 30

8.8 Accessory Manifold............................................................................................... 30
9 LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................... 31
9.1 Minimum Operating Speeds ................................................................................. 32
9.2 Controlled Flow Splash System ............................................................................ 33
9.3 Total Pressure lubrication System ........................................................................ 34
10 MAINTENANCE OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM ...................................................... 36
11 MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 38
11.1 Power End ............................................................................................................ 38
11.2 Roller Bearings ..................................................................................................... 39
11.3 Pinion Shaft Assembly.......................................................................................... 41
11.4 Crankshaft Assembly (Fig. 16) ............................................................................ 42
11.5 Installing Crankshaft Assembly in Frame.............................................................. 46
11.6 Installation of Crosshead Guides .......................................................................... 48
11.7 Installation of Crossheads .................................................................................... 49
11.8 Checking crosshead alignment............................................................................. 51
12 FLUID END MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................... 51
12.1 Fluid Cylinder Blocks ............................................................................................ 52
12.2 Suction Manifold ................................................................................................... 53
12.3 Discharge Manifold ............................................................................................... 53
12.4 Cylinder Head Thread Ring .................................................................................. 54
12.5 Welding and Repairs ............................................................................................ 54
12.6 Welding Procedures ............................................................................................ 58
12.7 Repairs to Valve Pot Cover Bore .......................................................................... 59
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 7
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 8
Allow sufficient clearance for removal of these parts.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 9
General Dimensions
FD-500 (mm) FD-800 ( mm ) FD-1000 ( mm ) FD-1600 ( mm )

A 3-11-3/8 (1203) 4-8-7/8 (1445) 4-10-5/8 (1489) 5-0-5/8 (1540)
B --- --- --- -- ---- -- 5-7-13/16 (1722)
C 3-2-15/16 (989) 3-4-1/2 (1029) 3-8-3/8 (1127) 4-0-1/8 (1222)
D 3-11-3/16 (1198) --- -- ---- -- 4-8-1/16 (1424)
E 12-1/16 (305) 12-7/16 ( 316 ) 13-3/4 ( 349 ) 13-3/16 ( 335 )
F 3-1 (939) --- -- ---- -- 4-3-3/4 (1315)
G 3-8-1/2 (1197) 3-11-1/8 (1197) 4-5-1/2 (1359) 4-11-3/4 (1518)
H 4-9 (1448) 5-1-3/4 (1568) 8-0 92438) 7-10 (2388)
J 6-9-7/8 (2079) 7-11-3/8 (2423) 8-4-1/4 (2546) 8-11-7/8 (2740)
** K --- --- 4-6-1/4 (1378) 4-6-7/8 (1394) 4-10-1/4 (1480)
L (Dia.) 5.5 (139) 7.00 (177.8) 7.750 (196.85) 8.500 (215.90)
(Keyway) 1-1/4 x 5/8 (31.7 x 15.8) 1-3/4 x 7/8 (44.45 x 22.225) 2 x 1 (50.8 x 25.4) 2 x 1 (50.8 x 25.4)
M 3-11 (1193) 4-3-3/8 (1305) 4-9-3/8 (1457) 5-5-3/4 (1670)
N 5-0-3/4 (1543) 5-5-1/4 (1657) 5-11-1/8 (1807) 6-10 (2083)
P 4-3-3/8 (1305) 4-6 (1372) 5-1 (1549) 6-1-3/8 (1864)
Q 12-0 (3658) 13-0 (3962) 13-6 (4115) 16 (4877)
R 1-3-5/16 (389) 1-3-5/8 ( 397 ) 1-6-7/8 ( 479 ) 1-9-3/4 ( 553 )
S 10 (254) 10 ( 254 ) 12 ( 305 ) 12-1/4 ( 311 )
T --- --- 1-1 ( 330 ) 1-1 ( 330 ) 1-4-1/2 ( 419 )
U --- --- 2-0-1/2 ( 622 ) 1-2-3/8 ( 365 ) 1-1-3/4 ( 349 )
V 3-0-3/4 (933) 3-1-1/2 ( 953 ) 2-2-3/8 ( 670 ) 2-6-1/4 ( 768 )
W 9-3/4 (250) 10-3/4 ( 273 ) 10-3/4 ( 273 ) 12-9/16 ( 319 )
X 1-4-7/8 (422) --- -- ---- -- 1-7-1/4 ( 489 )
**Required to remove Suction Desurger.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 10
Specifications
FD-500 FD-800 FD-1000 FD-1600

Max. Liner Size 6-3/4 (171.45 mm) 6-3/4 (171.45 mm) 6-3/4 (171.45 mm) 7-1/2 (190.5 mm)
and stroke 7-1/2 (191 mm) 9 (228.6 mm) 10 (254 mm) 12 (304.8 mm)
Nominal HP 500 HP 800 HP 1000 HP 1600 HP
Rating @ 165 SPM @ 150 SPM @ 140 SPM @ 120 SPM
Type Gear Herringbone Herringbone Herringbone Double Helical
4.31:1 4.31:1 4.31:1 4.31:1
Lubrication Pressure and Splash to all Moving Parts
Valve Pots API No. 6 API No. 6 API No. 6 API No. 7
Approx. Wt. 18,657 (8,463 kg) 26,603 (12,067 kg) 33,770 (15,318 kg) 46,820 (21,238 kg)
(Lbs.)
*FD Max. liner size 7 (177.8 mm)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 11
1 INSTALLATION OF NEW PUMP
Your National Oilwell Varco pump has been completely assembled and test operated under
pressure before being shipped to the field. Unless otherwise instructed, the lubrication is
drained from the power end and the expendable parts are removed from the fluid end.
Before putting the pump into service, the following precautions and operations must be
performed or checked.
In order to prevent personal injury during the performance of any maintenance or
inspection procedures, this equipment MUST BE SHUT DOWN AND NOT OPERATING,
and all safety devices on prime movers, drives, etc., MUST BE IN THE SAFE POSITION.
2 SETTING THE PUMP

The skids under the National Oilwell Varco pumps are suitable for most any type of
installation. It should be noted, however, that the box type construction of the power frame
has high resistance to bending but relatively less resistance against twist. Therefore, the
support under the pump must be level and adequate to support the weight and operating
forces exerted by the pump.
2.1 Land Installations

In land installations, a mat of 3 X 12 (76.20 mm x 304.8 mm) boards laid side crosswise to
the pump skids for the entire length, or at a minimum, at the points indicated in Fig. 2, is
usually sufficient. The boards should be a few feet wider than the width of the pump skid
runners. Wet or marshy locations may require a more stable foundation.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 12
Fig. 2
Suitable means, such as National Oilwell Varco pump spacers as shown in Fig. 3, should
be used to keep the pump anchored and the drive in alignment. National Oilwell Varco
mud pump spacers provide 8-1/2 (215.9mm) adjustment. Any desired length may be
obtained by lengthening the standard pipe spacer, which is made of 3 (76.20mm) extra
strong pipe.
Three types of attaching heads are available with this spacer:
1. The chain type to fit pipe.
2. The hinged flange type for

attachment to flat surfaces.
3. Any combination of the two.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 13
2.1.1 Permanent Installations

On permanent installations such as barge, platform, structural base, or concrete slab,
where pump skids are bolted down, it is essential that the skids be properly shimmed to
prevent possibility of twisting or distorting the power frame. The pump skids must sit solid
on all shim points with bolts loose.
On barge installations, the pump

skids are generally bolted down to
T-beams running parallel and in line
with the pump skids. Install shims at
points shown in Figs. 2 and 4 and
observe caution of proper shimming
to prevent twist or distortion.
The shims on all installations should

extend the full width of the skid
beam flanges and have a minimum
length of 12 (305mm).
On installations where the power unit or electric motor is mounted integrally with the pump
skids, the preferred installation would be to set the pump package on the T-beam skids and
provide retention blocks rather than bolts to hold it in place. This will allow the pump to
float and minimize the transfer of barge deck or platform distortion into the frame.
2.1.2 Installation of the Drive

The drive between the mud pumps and the power source, whether V-belts or multi-width
chains, should be installed with the greatest care to assure maximum operating life with
minimum of unexpected or undesirable shutdowns due to drive failures.
When installing the drive sheave or sprocket, make sure all grease or rust preventative is
removed from the shaft and the bore of the drive. Remove all burrs or rough spots from the
shaft, key, and keyway. Fit key to the keyways in both the shaft and drive and install key
into shaft keyway.
Coat pinion shaft with a light coating of anti-seize compound or light oil and install the drive
sheave or sprocket hub. Tighten hub bolts as indicated below:
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 14
When a wrench or length of pipe is used to increase leverage in tightening draw-up bolts, it
is imperative to adhere to the wrench torque values given in the chart below. This
adherence is important, because in mounting the hub, the tightening force on the bolts is
multiplied many times by the wedging action of the tapered surface. This action
compresses the hub for a snug fit on the shaft. If the bolt tightening forces are extreme,
bursting pressure is created in the hub of the mounted pulley; this pressure may cause the
pulley to crack. The hub bolts should always be tightened alternately and progressively.
QD Wrench Torque Wrench Length Wrench Pull

Hub Ft. Lb. Inches Lbs.
FD-500 P 540 (62 meter kg) 30 (.76 meters) 180 (82 kg)
FD-800 W 600 (83 meter kg) 36 (.90 meters) 200 (92.2 kg)
2.1.2.1 V-Belt Drives

a. Check sheave groove condition.
Before installing the V-belts, check sheave grooves for wear. Worn or rounded
grooves will destroy V-belts rapidly. The side walls must be straight. Sheave
grooves must be free of dirt, rust or other extrusions which could damage the V-
belts.
b. Check sheave alignment.
The final alignment of the V-belt sheaves should be checked after the V-belts have
been installed and adjusted to their operating tension. If the sides of the sheaves
are of equal distance from the centerline of the groove, check alignment by
stretching TWO strings (fish line or piano wire preferred) along one side of the two
sheaves, one above and one below the centerline, and moving one of the sheaves
until the strings touch four points on the side of the sheave rims. This will determine
that the centerline of the drives are parallel and the faces of the sheaves are square.
c. Adjust V-belts for proper tension.
Adjust the belt tension by moving the sheaves apart until all of the sag has just been
eliminated from the tight side of the belt and some of the belts on the slack side.
Then increase the centers approximately (13mm) for each 100 (2540 mm)
center distance. Example: On 150 (3810 mm) center, move pump an additional
(19.5 mm).
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 15
DO NOT OBTAIN BELT TENSION BY PICKING UP END OF PUMP AND

ALLOWING BELTS TO TIGHTEN UNDER WEIGHT OF PUMP AS END IS
BEING LOWERED TO THE GROUND.
2.1.2.2 Chain Drives

a. Installation
Proper installation and maintenance of the sprocket and chain drives are essential if
good service life is to be obtained. Since many factors, such as chain width, center
distances, speeds, and loads must be considered when determining the allowable
tolerance for sprocket alignment, no good rule of thumb can be applied. The chain
alignment must simply be held as nearly perfect as possible. A more precise
alignment can be made by stretching two steel wires (piano wire) along one face of
the two sprockets, one above and one below the centerline, and moving one of the
sprockets until the wires touch at four points. This will determine that the centerlines
of the drives are parallel and the faces of the sprockets are square.
b. Drive chain lubrication
The pump drive chain lubrication system on the majority of National Oilwell Varco
pumps is an independent system having its own oil pump, reservoir, and drive. Fill
chain case to the indicated level with a non-detergent oil as follows:
Ambient temperature above 32F (0C) SAE-30

Ambient temperature below 32F (0C) SAE-20
For temperatures below 0F, consult a reputable lubrication dealer for

recommendations.
REFER TO GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN for approved lubricants and

additional specifications. If any discrepancy exists between the recommendations in
this manual and the General Lubrication Bullletin, those in the Lubrication Bulletin
will take precedence.
Since this is an independent system, it will require the same maintenance or service
attention employed on any other piece of machinery, including:
- Daily check of oil level.

- Daily check on condition of oil.
- Frequent check on oil pressure. (5-15 psi) (.352 - 1.06 kg/cm)
- Volume of oil being applied to chain.
- Condition of nozzles in spray tube.
- Condition of oil pump drive (V-belts or chain)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 16
NOTE: Oil pressure may be adjusted with the pressure relief adjusting screw
on the rear of the pump housing. Pressure drops may also indicate
suction and discharge filter screens need cleaning.
3 SUCTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

Individual installation conditions will dictate the design of the suction system. The suction
of the FD-series pumps must have a positive head (pressure) for satisfactory performance.
The optimum suction manifold pressure is 20-30 psi (1.75-2 kg/cm) for maximum
volumetric efficiency and expendable parts life. This head pressure is best supplied by a 5
x 6 centrifugal pump with 40 h.p. 1150 rpm electric motor. This type of drive requires a
device to automatically start and stop the centrifugal pump motor simultaneously with the
triplex pump. On DC electric powered rigs a signal can usually be supplied from the DC
control panel to energize a magnetic starter when the mud pump clutch air line will provide
a set of contacts for energizing the magnetic starter when clutch is engaged.
The charging pump can also be belt driven from the triplex pinion shaft charging type of
drive is not as efficient at slow speeds with viscous fluids.
Under some conditions the FD-Series pumps may be operated without a charging pump,
provided the fluid level in mud pits is higher than the top of the liners, fluid being pumped is
low viscosity and suction line must be short, straight and of at least the same diameter as
suction manifold inlet.
The suction lines should be piped with valve arrangements so the charging pump can be
by-passed so operation can be continued in event of charging pump failure or for
maintenance. Operation without a charging pump can be improved by replacing the
suction valve springs with a weaker spring.
Suction desurgers are a very effective aid for complete filling of the liners and dampening
pulsations in the suction line which results in a smoother flow in the discharge line. If your
pump is equipped with a suction desurger it must be pre-charged with compressed air
before operations are begun. See suction desurger manual for charging instructions.
3.1 Caution
Do not pipe the return line from the shear relief valve back into the suction system as a
relief valve operation will cause a sudden pressure rise in the system vastly greater than
the system pressure ratings, resulting in damage to manifold, suction desurger and
centrifugal pump.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 17
4 PREPARATION OF POWER END

Your National Oilwell Varco pump has been completely assembled and test operated
before being shipped to the field. Unless otherwise instructed, the lubrication is drained
from the power end, and the expendables are removed from the fluid end for storage
protection. Before operating the pump, the following must be performed or checked:
4.1 Power End Lubrication
Before installing lubricant, open inspection door in cover and check oil reservoir for
possible accumulation of condensation, etc., and drain and flush by removing the pipe
plugs on each side of the pump.
Add the proper type and quantity of lubrication in the power end. Refer to the Lubrication
Section of this manual, or lubrication plate on pump frame for type and quantity required.
Recheck oil level after pump has operated for a period of 15 minutes. Shut pump down
and allow approximately five minutes for the oil level to equalize. Check at oil level gauge,
Item 1, Fig. 1. It is usually necessary for a few more gallons of oil to be added due to a
certain amount being retained in the crosshead area and frame cavities.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 18
4.2 Installation of Crosshead Extension Rods and Diaphragm Stuffing Box Seals.
With reference to Figure 5, remove the diaphragm stuffing box and plate (1) and rotate
pump so that crosshead is at the front of the stroke. Thoroughly clean the front of the
crosshead and the face of the crosshead extension rod. Insert alignment boss on
crosshead extension rod into the crosshead bore and tighten the retainer bolts (2) to the
following torque. Safety wire bolt heads.
FD-500 50-60 ft. lbs. (7-8 meter kgs) FD-800 80-100 ft. lbs. (11-14mkgs.)
FD-1000 350-370 ft. lbs. (48-51 meter kgs) FD-1600 350-370 ft. lbs. (48-51mkgs.)
Thoroughly clean face of power frame and diaphragm stuffing box plate at Position A.
Install gasket (3) and capscrews (10). Tighten capscrews as follows:
FD-500 12-14 ft. lbs. FD-800 12-18 ft. lbs. FD-1600 90-120 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 1.9 meter kgs) (1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs) (12 - 17 meter kgs)
FD-1000 12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 19
Clean bore and face of diaphragm stuffing box plate. Clean OD and flange of
diaphragm stuffing box. Coat OD of diaphragm stuffing box with light oil and install O-
ring seal (4). Insert diaphragm stuffing box in plate bore and tighten capscrews to the
following torque:
FD-500 12-14 ft. lbs. FD-800 12-18 ft. lbs. FD-1600 90-120 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 1.9 meter kgs) (1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs) (12 - 17 meter kgs)
FD-1000 12-18 ft. lbs.
(1.7 - 2.5 meter kgs).
The diaphragm stuffing box packing assembly consists of a single lip oil seal (6), a
double lip wiper seal (11), a separator spring (7), an O-ring (8), and a lock spring (9).
Install the assembly as follows:
a. Remove pressure spring (5) from single lip oil seal (6) and place seal in the inner
(power end) position on the crosshead extension rod, with lip toward power end.
Replace the pressure spring in the seal lip and slide the seal into position in the
stuffing box. SEE NOTE BELOW.
b. Insert the separator spring (7) over rod and slide it into stuffing box bore.
c. Install the O-ring (8) in groove in stuffing box bore.
d. Remove pressure spring (5) from double lip oil seal (11) and place seal in the
outer position on the crosshead extension rod with main lip toward power end.
Replace the pressure spring in the seal lip and slide the seal into position in the
stuffing box. SEE NOTE BELOW.
CAUTION: The double lip seal can be used in the inner, or power end, position to
replace the single lip seal, but DO NOT use the single lip seal in the
outer position.
e. Install the lock spring (9).
NOTE: CAUTION must be taken to assure the pressure spring (5) does not slip out
of the groove in the oil seal lip, as severe scoring of the crosshead
extension rod can occur. Coat extension rod with a light oil to facilitate
installation of the packing assembly.
5 PISTON AND LINER COOLING SYSTEM

Proper attention must be paid at all times to assure adequate cooling fluid is being applied
to the piston and liner assembly. Stoppage of the cooling fluid will result in almost instant
failure of the piston rubbers and possibly extensive damage to the liner bore.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 20
Two types of piston and liner cooling systems have been used on National Oilwell Varco
FD-Series Pumps -- the stationary spray type and a moving nozzle type. Ref. Fig. 6. The
manifold (1) for supplying cooling fluid to the piston and liner assemblies is identical on both
systems. Cooling fluid from either a remote source such as a water line, or from a pump
and reservoir system unitized on the pump skids (Ref. Fig. 7) must be piped into the
manifold at the connection located in the pump frame under the crosshead extension rod
section.
CAUTION: The supply line from a remote system should be equipped with a
strainer to prevent stoppage of the spray nozzles. Water should be
cool and free of abrasive solids. Clean strainer screen or trap once
each day, or as required.
The two types of cooling systems are outlined below:
5.1 Stationary spray (View A, Fig. 6)
The stationary spray cooling system consists of a spray nozzle (2) mounted on a liner
end cover plate (3), which applies cooling fluid in the form of a spray to the piston and
liner area. Adjust cooling water supply to the manifold so that a spray approximately
*12 long is being discharged from each spray nozzle. Inspect spray nozzle operation
VERY OFTEN, making sure the nozzle is pointed directly at the piston.
*(304.8mm)
5.2 Moving Nozzle
The moving nozzle system consists of a spray tube (4) mounted on the extension rod
clamp (5), which applies cooling fluid directly to the back face of the piston. The end of
the spray tube is positioned approximately 1 from the back face of the piston, which
causes the cooling fluid to be deflected so that it constantly floods the piston liner area
throughout the full stroke length.
Inspect spray tube very often to assure that ample cooling fluid is being supplied. At
routine intervals, check condition of the hose (6) which connects the spray tube to the
manifold. This hose travels back and forth with the piston rod assembly, therefore must
be installed so that its movement is not restricted.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 21
See sections 5.1 and 5.2 for call out numbers descriptions shown in figure 6.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 22
A typical rod cooling assembly consisting of fluid pump driven from pinion shaft and fluid
reservoir mounted in the skids is shown in Figure 7.
With reference to Fig. 7, maintain electric motor (1) and centrifugal pump (2) according
to manufacturers specifications. Rotation of the pump should be clockwise when
viewed from the impeller end.
Adjust regulating valve (3) to apply as much water as possible to the liners without
splashing back on the crosshead extension rods and diaphragm stuffing box plate. 10-
gallons per minute per liner is the preferred flow rate. If water is allowed to splash on
the crosshead extension rods, some of the water may work back into the power end to
contaminate the lubrication oil.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 23
The cooling fluid is returned from the crosshead extension rod compartment to the settling
chamber, and as the fluid overflows through the filter screen between the two sections of
the tank, the solids are allowed to settle out. The filter screen will catch much of the foreign
material floating in the fluid.
Check condition of the cooling fluid at frequent intervals and CLEAN and FLUSH reservoir
as required. Contaminated fluid will cause premature liner and piston wear from abrasion
or stoppage of the spray nozzle or spray tube.
6 ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS
6.1 Valves and Seats

Remove all three discharge valve pot covers (1), and three cylinder heads and plugs (2),
and thoroughly clean all machined surfaces in the fluid end with a good cleaning solvent.
Make sure all valve seat bores are VERY CLEAN AND DRY (free of dirt, grease, anti-rust
compound, etc.) and remove all burrs or nicks with a fine emery cloth, using circular motion
around seat surfaces.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 24
THOROUGHLY CLEAN AND DRY the valve seats and install suction and discharge valve
seats into the valve pot bores. Drive seats firmly into place with a bar and hammer.
Install valves and springs, etc., by following any special instructions that may have been
outlined by the specific valve and seat manufacturer.
Install fluid baffle (11), fig. 9 and 9B on end of crosshead extension rod.
7 FD-500, FD-800 & FD-1000

ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS
A cross-section through the fluid end is shown in Fig. 9. With reference to Fig.9, clean and
assemble the fluid end parts in the following manner:
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 25
7.1 Liners
Inspect liner bore again to make sure it is clean and free of foreign particles to assure metal
to metal contact between the liner and fluid end. Foreign particles can cause the liner to
make up in a cocked position resulting in premature wear on liners and pistons.
7.2 Piston Rod

Clean piston and piston rod, making sure they are free of nicks and burrs. Install O ring
seal (20) in groove in piston head. Slide piston head on rod while observing that O ring
does not fall out of groove. Tighten piston rod nut (21) to 1200-1600 ft. lbs. (166-121
m/kgs.).
Coat liner I.D. and piston O.D. with grease. Check ends of piston rod and extension rod to
be sure they are clean and free of burrs. Insert piston rod through liner holding piston rod
centered at the rear of the liner. Drive the piston into the liner with a driving tool or a piece
of hardwood and sledge hammer. Use caution as the piston rod approaches the crosshead
extension rod that the dowel on the end of the piston rod is not damaged. The piston rod
must be supported and the dowel guided into the pilot bore.
7.3 Piston Rod Clamps

The piston rod clamps are machined as one piece and then cut in half. The two pieces are
stenciled with matching numbers on each half and have a chain link connecting them
together. The two pieces with the same matching numbers should always be kept together
as a set. Install the clamp around the rod end flanges with the water connection holes at
top dead center. Tighten cap screws to the following torque values.
FD-500-368 ft. lbs. (51 Meter/kgs.)

FD- 800-100 ft. lbs. (14 Meter/kgs.)
FD-1000-160 ft. lbs. (22 Meter/kgs.)
When rods and rod clamps are new a gap in excess of (13 MM) could be present
between the two halves of the clamp. This is satisfactory provided the faces of the rods are
seating metal to metal. As wear occurs, the halves will pull closer together. Clamping
action will be lost when a gap no longer exist. At this time clamps must be replaced.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 26
7.4 Liner Cage and Lower Valve Guide

Install rear liner seal (5) and push into position against liner shoulder. Slide liner cage (6)
into fluid end, align one hole in the cage with lower valve pot bore. Set lower valve guide
(8) over valve stem through lower hole in cage with the wings on the guide turned
crosswise to the pump. Press down on the guide, compressing the valve spring (7) until
the guide can be rotated turn and seat into place underneath the cage. Insert the lower
valve guide locking clip (9) through the pad eyes on the lower valve guide and rotate clip to
the right to lock the valve guide tight against the OD of the liner cage. It may sometimes be
necessary to put more or less bend in the center of the clip to make it retain the guide
tightly while the clip handle snaps into position on the right hand side.
7.5 Cylinder head

Insert the outer seal (5) in the fluid end bore against the liner cage. Slide the cylinder head
plug (10) into fluid end. Apply a liberal coat of grease to both mating thread surfaces of the
cylinder head (2). Screw cylinder head in and tighten with wrench furnished with pump and
sledge hammer.
Fluid leakage through the weep hole will indicate a defective seal or loose cylinder head.
DO NOT plug weep holes as this can result in severe damage to cylinder head threads,
thread rings, etc., in event of a liner seal failure.
7.6 Discharge Valve Pot Covers

Install discharge valve pot gasket (3) into bore, and after liberal application of grease or tool
joint compound to the gasket and thread area, tighten the discharge valve pot covers into
place, using a sledge hammer and bar.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 27
8 FD-1600
ASSEMBLY OF FLUID END PARTS
Figure 9B
A cross section through the fluid end is shown in fig. 9B. With reference to fig. 9B
thoroughly clean and assemble the fluid end parts in the following manner:
Note: All of the parts in this fluid end assembly are designed with metal to metal seating
to alleviate friction wear from breathing action encountered in modern high
pressure pump operation. For this reason it is essential that all parts be clean
and free of rust, nicks and burrs before being assembled.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 28
8.1 Liner
Install wear plate seal (1) in counterbore of fluid end. Slide wear plate (2) over studs until it
seats against fluid end. Slide liner thread ring (3) over studs with the starting thread at the
5 oclock position and tighten nuts to 470-510 ft. lbs. (65-70 m/kgs.) torque.
Note: Placing the starting thread at 5 oclock position makes engaging the liner lock
threads much easier.
Place liner seal (4) in counterbore of wear plate. Apply thin coat of grease to ID of liner
lock (5) and slide over rear of liner (6). Install two-piece liner lock ring (7) in liner groove
and O ring to hold them in position.
Slide liner handling tool over liner up against liner lock ring and tighten set screw to secure
it in place. Hoist liner assembly into position with jib hoist.
Note: FD pumps are factory equipped with jib booms and liner handling tools. If older
pumps are converted to FD fluid ends a jib boom should be added to the pump
frame as considerable weight is involved in handling the liner assembly.
Apply liberal coat of grease to liner lock threads. Align the starting thread of the liner lock
(5) to the 7 oclock position and insert the liner into the liner thread ring (3) screw liner lock
in until liner seats in position . Tighten with sledge hammer on hammer lugs.
8.2 Piston Rod

Clean piston (9) and piston rod (8), making sure they are free of nicks and burrs. Install O
ring seal (10) in groove in piston head. Slide piston head on rod while observing that O
ring does not fall out of groove. Tighten piston rod nut (11) to 1200-1600 ft. lbs. (166-121
m/kgs.).
Coat liner I.D. and piston O.D. with grease. Check ends of piston rod and extension rod to
be sure they are clean and free of burrs. Insert piston rod into liner through cylinder head
opening holding piston rod centered at the rear of the liner. Drive the piston into the liner
with a driving tool or a piece of hardwood and sledge hammer. Use caution as the piston
rod approaches the crosshead extension rod that the dowel on the end of the piston rod is
not damaged. The piston rod must be supported and the dowel guided into the pilot bore.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 29
8.3 Piston Rod Clamps

The piston rod clamps are machined as one piece and then sawed in half. The two pieces
are stenciled with matching numbers on each half. The two pieces with the same matching
numbers should always be kept together as a set. Install the clamp around the rod end
flanges with the water connection holes at top dead center. Tighten cap screws to the
following torque values:
FD-1600 245 ft. lbs. (34 m/kgs.)
When rods and rod clamps are new a gap in excess of (13 mm) could be present
between the two halves of the clamp. This is satisfactory provided the faces of the rods are
seating metal to metal. As wear occurs, the halves will pull closer together. Clamping
action will be lost when a gap no longer exists. At this time clamps must be replaced.
Install splash plate on rear of liner.
8.4 Lower Valve Guide and Cylinder Head

Slide the alignment ring (12) into the cylinder head opening engaging the alignment dowel
at the 3 oclock position. Do not drive on this piece as dowel or dowel hole will be
damaged. It will slide easily into place when it is properly aligned.
Insert the lower valve guide (13) through the alignment ring and position the guide over the
valve stem. Start the lock bolt (14) and draw it down, compressing the valve spring and
seating the valve guide in the tapered slot. Tighten lock bolt to 300 to 340 ft. lbs. 41 to 47
m/kg.
Install head seal (15) on cylinder head plug (16). Coat seal and O.D. of plug with light oil.
Screw a 3 ft. (1 M) length of pipe into the threaded opening on the plug. Using the pipe to
balance the plug, slide it straight into the fluid end opening. Apply a liberal coat of grease
to the cylinder head (17) with wrench provided and sledge hammer.
Fluid leakage through the weep hole will indicate a defective seal or loose cylinder head.
DO NOT plug weep hole as this can result in severe damage to cylinder head threads,
thread rings, etc., in event of a liner seal failure.
8.5 Discharge Valve Pot Covers

Install discharge valve pot gasket (18) into bore, and after liberal application of grease or
tool joint compound to the gasket and thread area, tighten the discharge valve pot covers
(19) into place, using a sledge hammer and bar.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 30
8.6 Discharge Manifold all models

A 5-1500*RTJ flange connection is provided on the discharge manifold. REMOVE flange
and protect gasket area before welding (customers option) to the discharge piping.
(*127mm)
Tighten discharge flange connection bolts to *1200-1600 ft. lbs. torque. To insure uniform
make-up of the ring joint connection, tighten flange bolt nuts in a crisscross order. (*166-
121 meter kgs.)
If a blind flange is installed on the opposite end of the discharge manifold, check flange
bolts and tighten to same specification as noted above.
8.7 Suction Flange

The suction flange has a 12 (305mm) standard pipe thread connection and is custom
made to match the companion flange on the pump suction manifold. The flange connection
is sealed off by an O-ring seal (14 OD x 13-1/2 ID x ), (356mm OD x 343mm I.D. x
6.35mm Dia.)
NOTE: Thoroughly clean O-ring groove and face of flanges before making up connection.
Flanges must make up metal to metal to insure proper seal. Tighten flange bolts to 360-
490 ft. lbs. (50-68 meter kgs.) torque.
CAUTION: If suction pipe is welded to suction flange, remove O-ring prior to welding.
8.8 Accessory Manifold

Fig. 10 is not the standard
discharge arrangement on the
model FD-1600 pump, which uses
the strainer cross configuration.
An accessory manifold, Fig.10, is
available for installation on the
discharge manifold opposite the
discharge end. The manifold will
accommodate a discharge
pulsation dampener (1) and
provides two 3-6000 PSI*side
outlet connections for such items as
a pressure gauge (2) and a shear
relief valve (3).
When manifold is used, install and

maintain as follows:
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 31
The flange on the accessory manifold is a 5-1500 *RTJ. Thoroughly clean ring joint
groove, install ring (4) and tighten the flange bolts (5) to 1200 ft. lbs. torque. To assure
uniform make-up of the ring joint connection, tighten the nuts in a criss-cross order.
The shear relief valve (3) is installed on the discharge manifold for the purpose of
protecting the pump from excessively high pressure overloads.
The relief valve must be installed so that it will be directly exposed to the mud. DO NOT
PUT ANY TYPE OF SHUT OFF VALVE between the relief valve and the manifold. Pipe
the discharge side of the relief valve directly into the mud pit with as few turns in the line as
possible. IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED for the discharge side of the valve to be piped into
the suction line of the pump.
* 5 - = 127mm
3 - 6000 PSI = two 76.2mm - 422 kg/cm
The relief valve setting should be just above the maximum pressure rating of the particular
liner size being used. CHANGE SETTINGS with each liner size change. DO NOT USE
ALLEN WRENCHES, WELDING RODS, or material other than that called for by the
manufacturer of the relief valve, as this will affect the rating of the relief valve.
The mounting for the dischage pulsation dampener (1) is a RTJ flange with R-39 ring
gasket. Before installing dampener, thoroughly clean ring groove and ring, and after setting
dampener into place, tighten the 1-1/4*nut (6) to 750 ft.lbs*. torque. To insure uniform
make-up, tighten nuts in a criss-cross order.
Precharge dampener before starting up pump. Precharge pressure should not be more
than 2/3 of the pump discharge pressure, or a maximum of 650 PSI. (46 kg/cm)
CAUTION: USE ONLY COMPRESSED NITROGEN OR AIR. DO NOT CHARGE WITH

OXYGEN.
* 1-1/4 = 32mm
750 ft. lbs. = 104 meter kgs
9 LUBRICATION
Proper lubrication of the moving parts in any piece of machinery is the most important
single factor affecting its ultimate life. To obtain maximum trouble-free service life from the
power end of the National Oilwell Varco pump, it is necessary to perform routine
maintenance care and inspections to insure the proper amount of CLEAN lubricant is being
provided.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 32
The FD-Series pumps utilize the controlled flow oil bath splash and pressure system to
lubricate the entire power end. The type of pressure system provided in each individual
pump will govern the minimum SPM at which the pump can be operated, i.e. pumps which
have pressure lubrication only to the main and pinion bearings, have a minimum rated
speed of 40 SPM. Pumps in which pressure lubrication is provided to the main, pinion, and
crosshead bearings and crosshead compartments may be operated at a minimum speed of
25 SPM, provided there is a minimum of 5 PSI oil pressure. (352 grams/cm)
9.1 Minimum Operating Speeds

The minimum speed for all pumps is 40 SPM.
CAUTION: The pressure lubricating system can be provided with an externally mounted oil
pump driven through V-belts or electric AC motor; or an internally mounted oil pump driven
from the main gear. When an internally mounted oil pump is used, the direction of rotation
of the pinion shaft must be as shown in Fig. 11.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 33
9.2 Controlled Flow Splash System

The controlled flow splash lubrication system is the same for all FD-Series pumps,
regardless of the type of oil pump drive provided for the pressure system. In the controlled
flow splash system, the main gear picks oil up from the reservoir, and when the teeth mesh
with the pinion, the oil is displaced into various troughs and compartments in the frame.
With reference to Figure 13, the oil thrown into trough (7) is directed through the oil tube (8)
to the two pinion bearings.
Oil passage from the top of the crosshead guide compartment to the crosshead bearing is
shown in Figure 12. Oil accumulates in the compartment over the crossheads. The oil
runs through the nipple (6) into the crosshead retainer to the oil passages (5) and on to the
crosshead pin bearing. As noted, the duplicate set of passageways (5) in the crosshead
pin permits the crosshead pins to be rotated without having to give attention to hole
alignment. This permits the installation of crosshead pins from either direction.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 34
9.3 Total Pressure lubrication System

The total pressure lubrication system, incorporating the internally mounted oil pump for the
FD-series pumps, is shown in Figure 13.
In this system, filtered oil is supplied to the pump through the suction filter (1) and is
discharged from the pump into the manifold block (2). Oil is distributed from the manifold
block to the pinion shaft bearing oil line (3) and spray nozzle (3A); and to the main bearing
oil line (4) and the crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) located above the
crosshead compartment. The crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) distributes oil to
the crosshead, crosshead bearings, and extension rods. Pumps which do not have the
crosshead compartment manifold block (4A) do not have the total pressure lubrication
system, and therefore have a minimum rated speed of 40 SPM.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 35
A pressure gauge (5) is mounted on the back wall of the frame to show oil pressure being
maintained in the manifold block. The oil pressure will, of course, vary with the speed of
the main pump, however if a sudden pressure drop or increase occurs, refer to the section
on maintenance of lubrication system for possible cause.
A pressure relief valve (6) is mounted to the manifold block to keep excess pressure form
damaging oil pump and drive. The relief valve is preset at 40 PSI and must not be
tampered with.
NOTE: If specified, the oil pump for the pressure lubrication system can be independently
powered by an electric motor or some other type of prime mover. When the
independently driven oil pump is used, some type of alarm device or power
interlock must be installed to assure the oil pump is operating when the main pump
is put into service.
When installing the internally mounted oil pump (9, Fig. 13), position pump so that the back
face of the drive gear is flush and parallel with the edge of the main gear, and gear teeth
have*.010-.015 backlash. Remove inspection plate on power end cover for access to the
internally mounted oil pump and filter screen. (* .25 - .38mm)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 36
A typical layout for the pinion shaft driven oil pump is shown in Fig. 14. The oil pump (1) is
piped into the oil system through the suction and pressure connections on the bottom
inside wall of the power frame. Ref. Item 10, Fig. 13. The V-belt drive (2) is adjusted by
moving pump up or down on the mounting bracket.
Adjust the V-belt drive (2) to a point where the two halves of the belt can almost be
pinched together between the thumb and fingers at the center of the drive.
Overtightening can cause premature failure of the pump.
When link type belting is used, caution should be exercised in predetermining belt
elongation. Link type belting in A, B and C widths will elongate approximately 1 per foot
(25mm per 305mm). When installing a drive, subtract 1 per foot from actual required
length (132 required - install 121) and stretch to fit. (Subtract 25mm/305mm)
To prevent possible injury, always install guard (3, Fig. 14) over V-belts before putting
pump into service.
10 MAINTENANCE OF THE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Adequate lubrication of the moving parts is, as stated, the most important single factor
affecting the ultimate service life of the pump. CARE AND MAINTENANCE of the system
is the sole responsibility of the operator or crew to which it has been assigned, and the
extent to which this is applied will determine the amount of trouble-free service life that will
be obtained.
The lubricant recommendations shown below, on the name plate on the side of the pump,
or in the General Lubrication Bulletin included with this manual, are the result of extensive
field tests. Substitutions should be made only in extreme emergencies.
REFER TO GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN for approved lubricants and additional

specifications. If any discrepancy exists between the recommendations in this manual and
the General Lubrication Bulletin, those in the Lubrication Bulletin will take precedence.
Lubrication Specifications:
Use extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant as follows:
Temperatures +30F to 155F (-1C to 68C) AGMA No. 6 EP

Temperatures 0F to 85F (-18C to 33C) AGMA No. 4 EP
(Consult lubrication manual)
Oil reservoir capacity:
FD-500 65 U.S. Gal. (246 liters) FD-800 65 U.S. Gal. (246 liters)
FD-1000 75 U.S. Gal. (284 liters) FD-1600 100 U.S. Gal. (379 liters)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 37
ONCE EACH TOUR, check and maintain oil level at the FULL mark on the bayonet gauge.
PUMP MUST BE SHUT DOWN and allowed to stand idle for approximately five minutes to
allow oil level to equalize.
ONCE EACH SIX MONTHS, or more often if oil becomes contaminated with abrasive
particles or corrosive compounds, drain and flush the oil reservoir and refill with new
lubricant. Oil drains are located on either side of the pump frame.
During the flushing procedure, thoroughly clean the oil troughs and the compartment in top
of the crosshead guide. Also clean or replace the filter element in the air breather cap and
clean suction screen. Remove covers from settling chamber and purge out contaminants
before adding new oil.
Routine inspection on condition of oil should be made as condensation of moisture in the

air, intrusion of mud, water or dirt, can necessitate a more frequent oil change.
A settling chamber is located in the forward area of the power end floor. Contamination in
the oil splashed into this area is allowed to settle out and should be drained out of the pump
through the clean out covers located on the frame wall underneath the crosshead
inspection doors.
Once each month, remove clean out covers on both sides of pump to drain contaminated
oil from settling chamber. Approximately 15-gallons of oil will be lost; replenish the main
reservoir to compensate for the amount drained out.
Once each week, remove one of the lower capscrews that secure the clean out cover to
the frame to drain off water condensate.
ONCE EACH TOUR, check oil level in main reservoir. Maintain at full mark on dipstick to
the manifold block. If loss of pressure occurs, check for:
- Clogged suction screen

- Low oil level
- Slipping V-belt drive
- Broken or loose connections
- Damaged or worn oil pump
- Defective Relief Valve
For an abnormal increase in oil pressure, check for:
- Plugged oil lines

- Contamination causing oil to be viscous
- Relief valve inoperative
- Defective gauge
- Other conditions
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 38
11 MAINTENANCE
11.1 Power End

Routine inspection of the power end is the most important form of preventive maintenance
and will result in considerable savings by detecting any major trouble that might be
developing and allowing the necessary repairs to be made on a planned or normal rig-down
time.
1. Check tightness of the main bearing bolts. Bolts must be tightened to the following
torque:
FD-500 3000 ft. lbs. (415 meter kgs.) FD-800 6360 ft. lbs. (880mkg.)
FD-1000 8800 ft. lbs. (1217 meter kgs.) FD-1600 9750 ft. lbs. (1349mkg.)
2. Safety wires -
Check safety wires on all bolts including the main bearing hold-down bolts, eccentric
bearing retainer bolts, and gear retainer bolts. Replace any broken wires after
retightening the bolts. Refer to crankshaft assembly section for bolt torque
requirements.
3. Oil lines -
Check all oil lines to insure they are intact and free of obstructions. Check oil pump
suction hose for damage or flat areas.
4. Suction filter -
Check condition of suction filter. Clean and replace as required.
5. Main bearing cover -
Remove the main bearing cover and check tightness of main bearing retainer bolts,
condition of the bearing rollers, etc. Clean and remove any sludge or foreign substance
that might have accumulated at the bottom of the bearing area.
6. Main gear and pinion teeth -
Inspect the condition of the main gear teeth and pinion gear teeth for any indications of
abnormal wear. During the initial break-in period there will be some pitting on the face
of the gear teeth. This is referred to as initial pitting and is not harmful to the life of the
gear. However, if routine inspection indicates the degree of pitting continues to
increase, immediately contact the local representative of the pump manufacturer for a
more thorough inspection of the gear.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 39
7. Crosshead pin bolts and crosshead guides -
Remove cover and check condition of the crosshead pin bolts and safety wires. (Center
crosshead pin bolts can be reached by removing back cover and placing eccentric on
outer top dead center.) Tighten crosshead bolts (Item 4, Fig.19) to the following torque:
FD-500 90-100 ft. lbs.

FD-800 140-150 ft. lbs. (11 - 12 meter kgs)

DO NOT EXCEED THESE VALUES. USE TORQUE WRENCH
If the crosshead or guide shows abnormal wear or scoring, replace immediately as the
metal particles can cause damage to the bearings, etc. Excess wear can also cause
rapid wear to the piston and liners.
8. Oil and oil reservoir -
Check condition of the oil and cleanliness of the oil reservoir. Service oil system as
described in the Lubrication Section of this manual.
11.2 Roller Bearings

Although the basic construction of the various sizes of National Oilwell Varco pumps varies
somewhat, they all have one very important detail in common -- roller bearings. A roller
bearing is a precisely built machine within itself; therefore, careful handling is required in
order to obtain the long service life and high load carrying characteristics associated with
anti-friction bearings.
The main bearings are self-aligning spherical roller bearings. The pinion shaft is mounted
on straight roller bearings. The eccentric bearings are straight roller with thrust plates on
each side to keep the eccentric straps in line, and the crosshead pin bearings are straight
needle roller bearings.
None of the bearings require special adjustments.
All inner and outer races are assembled by means of very accurate fits. This accuracy is
necessary; therefore, if the bearings are to be used again, the inner and outer races and
the roller assemblies of each bearing must be kept together, and reinstalled exactly as they
came off.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 40
It is always necessary to completely replace any roller bearing that fails, even though only
one part of the bearing shows damage. Since the running clearances of these bearings are
extremely small, excessive clearances, worn or grooved raceways, and any pitting or
flaking of the parts is indicative of failure and the entire bearing should be changed as soon
as possible.
All roller bearings are assembled to their shafts by means of shrink fits. (Ref. bearing fit
data under each shaft assembly.) Damaged or worn bearings and raceways can be
removed by driving them off the shaft with a bar and hammer. They can be cut off the shaft
with a burning torch, but care must be taken not to burn into the shaft. Bearings should
always be heated in an oil bath, the temperature of which should not exceed 300F
(149C). Be certain that both the oil and the container are very clean. If the oil container is
in direct contact with the fire, place a rack into the container so that the bearings will not
rest on the bottom. Do not leave the bearings in the oil bath longer than three minutes.
Do not heat the bearings with a torch unless it is the only possible means available. When
it is necessary to use a torch, it should be used only by an experienced welder or
mechanic. Hold the torch at least 6 inches (150mm) away from the bearing and keep the
torch moving at all times. Heat the bearing only until it is hot to the touch. Use a Tempil
stick. DO NOT OVERHEAT THE BEARING. Overheating draws the temper of the metal
and makes the bearing soft.
Once the heated bearing is in place on the shaft, hold it in place until it cools. NEVER USE
WATER OR ANY OTHER LIQUID TO COOL A HOT BEARING. Rapid cooling will cause
the surfaces of the races and rollers to check or crack and the bearing will fail
immediately.
Never strike a roller bearing with a steel hammer. If the bearing must be driven into
position, use wood or a soft hammer and strike lightly.
Always lubricate the shaft or housing before installing the bearing. Clean white lead, or an
anti-seize compound, is the best lubricant for this purpose.
Do not remove a new bearing from the box or wrapping until it is to be installed. Protect it
from dirt and other foreign matter at all times. If a bearing must be cleaned, use clean
kerosene or other solvent.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 41
11.3 Pinion Shaft Assembly
Chart I
Inches
DESCRIPTION POSITION FD-500 FD-800 FD-1000 FD-1600

Inner Race to Shaft A T.0012-T.0022 T.0014-T.0024 T.002 -T.0042 T.0016-T.0038
Outer Race to Bore B L.0015-T.0005 L.0004-L.0024 L.0042-L.0006 L.0004-L.0040
Carrier to Frame Bore C L.003 -L.008 L.003 -L.008 L.003 -L.008 L.003 -L.005
Millimeters
Inner Race to Shaft A T.03 -T.06 T.036 -T.061 T.051 -T.107 T.041 -T.097
Outer Race to Bore B L.04 -T.01 L.010 -L.061 L.107 -L.015 L.010 -L.102
Carrier to Frame Bore C L.08 -L.21 L.076 - L.203 L.076 - L.203 L.076 -L.127
The pinion is an integral part of the shaft, leaving only the installation of the bearings and oil
seal spacer to complete the assembly.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 42
The running clearances of the bearings are predetermined by their precision fit to the shaft
and the bearing carrier. When performing maintenance or overhaul, make sure the fits
shown in Chart I are obtained.
When installing the pinion shaft assembly in the pump, observe the following precautions:
a. Insure pinion bearing carrier gasket (1) and oil seal carrier gasket (2) are in place
and in good condition.
b. The pinion bearing carrier (3) and the oil seal carrier (4) have the word TOP cast in
the face of the flange. MAKE SURE THE CARRIERS ARE INSTALLED WITH THIS
MARK AT THE TOP to correctly position oil troughs and align drain holes.
c. Remove burrs, dents or gouges from the OD of the oil seal spacer (5) before sliding
oil seal carrier (4) into place. Exercise care when sliding lip of seal over end of shaft
to prevent it from being damaged by the sharp edge of the keyway. Also pay
particular attention to insure oil seal lip IS NOT TURNED UNDER by edge of spacer
when sliding seal onto the spacer.
d. Tighten pinion bearing carrier bolts (6) to the approximate torque shown below:
FD-500 100-125 ft. lbs. (14-17 m/kgs.) FD-800 60-100 ft. lbs. (8-14 m/kgs.)
FD-1000 80-160 ft. lbs. (11-22 m/kgs.) FD-1600 80-160 ft. lbs. (11-22 m/kgs.)
e. Check condition of the pinion bearing inner and outer race and rollers. If there is any
indication of galling, flaking or grooving, or if diametral clearance exceeds .008-
.010, it is recommended the entire bearing be replaced. (.20 - .25mm)
11.4 Crankshaft Assembly (Fig. 16)

The crankshaft assembly consists of the crankshaft, eccentric ring gear, eccentric strap
with bearings, and the main bearings.
The running clearances of the bearings are predetermined by their precision fit to the shaft
and their respective bores. When performing any maintenance or overhaul, make sure the
fits shown in Chart II are obtained.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 43
Chart II
Inches
DESCRIPTION POSI- FD-500 FD-800 FD-1000 FD-1600

TION
Inner Race to Shaft A T.002-T.003 T.0022-T.0032 T.0024-T.0048 T.0020-T.0044
Outer Race to Bore B L.015 - T.0003 L.002 - .000 L.0034-T.0004 L.0038- .000
Inner Race to Shaft C T.003 -T.007 T.005 -T.007 T.005 -T.009 T.0060-T.0100
Outer Race to Bore D .000 -T.004 T.002 -T.004 .000 -T.004 .000 -T.0040
Gear to Flange E L.001 -L.005 L.001 -L.005 L.001 -L.005 L.001 -L.005
Carrier to Frame Bore F L.001 -T.005 L.002 -T.002 L.002 -T.002 L.002 -T.002
Outer Race to Bore G T.001-T.0034 T.0022-T.003 .000 -T.003 T.0008-T.004
Inner Race to Pin H .000 -T.001 T.001 -T.002 T.001 -T.003 T.001 -T.0032
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 44
Millimeters
Inner Race to Shaft A T.043 -T.069 T.056 -T.081 T.061 -T.122 T.051 -T.112
Outer Race to Bore B L.049 - T.010 L.051 - .000 L.086 -T.010 L.096 - .000
Inner Race to Shaft C T.076 -T.173 T.127 -T.178 T.127 -T.229 T.152 -T.254
Outer Race to Bore D .000 T.102 T.127 -T.102 .000 -T.102 .000 -T.102
Gear to Flange E L.025 -L.127 L.025 -L.127 L.025 -L.127 L.025 -L.127
Carrier to Fr. Bore F L.025 -L.127 L.051 -T.051 L.051 -T.051 L.051 -T.051
Outer Race to Bore G T.025 -T.076 T.056 -T.086 .00 -T.076 T.02 -T.10
Inner Race to Pin H .000 -T.025 T.025 -T.051 T.025 -T.076 T.025 -T.081
Assemble the crankshaft in the following manner: (Refer to Fig. 16)
a. Mount gear on flange
Thoroughly clean mating faces of ring gear and flange and bolt flange into position.
Tighten flange bolts (2) to the following torque:
FD-500 160-240 ft. lbs. (22-33 meter kgs) FD-800 800-1200 ft. lbs. (110-166 meter kgs)
FD-1000 800-1200 ft. lbs. FD-1600 800-1200 ft. lbs.
Set crankshaft on a set of rollers (at main bearing position) and check runout on face of
gear with a dial indicator. If total indicator runout exceeds .006, remove gear and
determine cause of misalignment. (.15mm)
NOTE: If runout on face of gear is checked while crankshaft is mounted in the pump
frame, the running clearance in main bearings will require that a simultaneous set of dial
indicator readings be taken at the end of the shaft and the face of the gear; the actual
face runout at any point being the difference between these readings.
b. Install the outer races of the eccentric bearings (13) and the outer race retainer ring (3)
in the three eccentric straps. Outer race retainer ring must be positioned so that oil
scoop is at the bottom when pump is at mid-stroke. Tighten retainer bolts (4) to the
following torque; safety wire heads.
FD-500 60-90 ft. lbs. (8-12 meter kgs) FD-800 90-120 ft. lbs. (12-17 meter kgs.)
FD-1000 90-120 ft. lbs. FD-1600 90-120 ft. lbs.
NOTE: The inner and outer races of the eccentric bearings are matched and must not
be intermixed.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 45
c. Install the outer race of the crosshead bearings (19) in the three eccentric straps. It is
preferred that the outer race assembly be pressed into position or frozen in dry ice or
a deep freeze until it can be inserted into the bore. Under emergency circumstances,
the outer race assembly can be installed by using a large torch and heating the eye of
the eccentric strap. DO NOT EXCEED 300F (149C) (USE Tempil-Stik) and DO NOT
USE WATER to cool the strap.
NOTE: The inner and outer races of the crosshead bearings are matched and should
not be intermixed.
d. Install the inner race of the crosshead bearing on the crosshead pin and mark according
to their respective eccentric strap positions. Remove all nicks and burrs before
shrinking race into place. Refer to bearing fit Position H, Chart II.
e. Install inner race of the center eccentric bearing on the shaft. Slide center strap into
position and install inner race clamp (5). Tighten socket head screws (8A) in clamp to
the following torque:
FD-500 60-90 ft. lbs.(8-12 meter kgs.) FD-800 30-60 ft. lbs. (4-8 meter kgs.)
FD-1000 30-60 ft. lbs. FD-1600 30-60 ft. lbs.
f. Install snap ring (7) in the groove on RH eccentric and shrink inner race of eccentric
bearing on shaft. After sliding the RH eccentric strap into position, install inner bearing
retainer (14).
Tighten inner race retainer bolts (8) to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-1000 30-60 ft. lbs. FD-1600 30-60 ft. lbs.
g. Install the LH eccentric bearing (other than for snap ring) and eccentric strap under the
same procedure outlined in step (f) above.
h. Place main bearings (9) in the main bearing carriers (10 RH and 11 LH) and install
outer race retainer (12) and retainer bolts (15). Tighten bolts to the following torque and
safety wire:
FD-1000 30-60 ft. lbs. FD-1600 30-60 ft. lbs.
NOTE: Even though the main bearing carriers (10 RH and 11 LH) have different
configurations on the OD, they are interchangeable and will fit into the pump frame on
either side. The purpose of the shoulders on the OD of one of the carriers is to locate
and retain the crankshaft in its respective position in the frame.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 46
i. After installing the two main bearing spacers (16), shrink main bearings (9) on each end
of the shaft. Install inner race retainers (17) and retainer bolts (18). Tighten retainer
bolts to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-1000 30-60 ft. lbs. FD-1600 30-60 ft. lbs.
11.5 Installing Crankshaft Assembly in Frame

In order to obtain a more precise fit between the main bearing housing and the frame bore
on F-Series pumps, the installation procedures outlined below are to be followed: (Refer to
Fig. 17)
1. Place piece of wood between eye of eccentric strap and crosshead guide (as shown in
Fig. 18) to protect guide from scoring or gouging as the straps are sliding into position.
2. Rotate the main bearing carrier so that the two flat spots (180 apart) are parallel with
the main bearing bolt holes, and slowly lower the crankshaft into position. (The flat spot
provides clearance for the main bearing bolts.)
3. After placing crankshaft in the frame, and before installing the main bearing caps, check
the rollers in the main bearings to assure that each row of rollers in each bearing is
equally loaded. Equal loading is obtained by positioning the floating bearing carrier so
that the same number of inner and outer rollers supporting the weight of the crankshaft
in each bearing are tight. Because of tolerances, etc., the total number of tight rollers
could vary slightly between individual bearings.
4. Install and shim main bearing caps to obtain .003 (.076 mm) clamp or preload on the
main bearing carrier. This preload is obtained by placing the correct amount of shims
under the main bearing cap. The required amount of shims is determined as follows:
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 47
a. Install .020 (.51 mm) shims under both ends of the main bearing cap.
b. Place a piece of lead wire (approximately 1/32 diameter) (.79mm ) or Plastigage

between OD of bearing carrier and ID of bearing cap, as near center of bearing cap
as can be determined, and tighten main bearing cap bolts to torque values shown in
Chart III.
c. Remove main bearing cap and determine clearance between bore of cap and OD of
bearing carrier by either mikeing thickness of lead or measuring compressed
dimension of Plastigage.
d. Using this dimension, calculate the required thickness of shims as follows:
Subtract thickness of compressed lead or

Plastigage from the original .020 (.51mm) shim
thickness. Then subtract .003 (.076mm) for preload.
The result is the correct shim thickness required.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 48
Example:
.020 Original shims (0.51mm)
Less .004 Lead Thickness Less (0.102mm)
.016 (.408mm)
Less .003 Clamp Fit Less (.076mm)
.013 Correct Shim Thickness (.332mm)
NOTE: Machining tolerances make it necessary to determine individual shim
requirements for each (right hand and left hand) main bearing cap.
e. Install main bearing caps with the correct amount of shims as determined above,
and tighten main bearing bolts to torque values shown in Chart III.
f. Again check inner and outer row of rollers on each bearing as previously outlined to
assure equal loading is still present on each bearing.
Chart III
Ft. Lbs. Wrench Thread Torque Wrench Thread

Torque Size Size Meter Kg. Size Size
FD-500 3000 1-1/4 1-3/4 - 8 609 31.75 mm 44.4
FD-800 6360 3 2-1/4-8 880 76.2mm 57.2 - 8/25.4mm
FD-1000 8800 3-1/4 2-1/2-8 1217 82.5mm 57.2 - 8/25.4mm
FD-1600 9750 3-5/8 3-8 1348 92.0mm 76.2 - 8/25.4mm
11.6 Installation of Crosshead Guides

When installing crosshead guides observe the following procedures and precautions:
1. Thoroughly clean all dirt or contamination and remove all burrs or rough edges from
both sides of the guides and the frame bore where the guides fit.
2. If old guides are to be reused, inspect the wearing surfaces for wear and scoring
streaks. Pumps with serial numbers below those shown have identical upper and lower
crosshead guides which may be reversed to provide a smooth surface for the lower
guide. Worn guides may be used at the top as forces on the crosshead are always
downward.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 49
The upper and lower crosshead guides are NOT interchangeable. The guides are
machined so that the lower guide places the crosshead frame centerline, and upper
guides are machined to afford proper crosshead to guide clearance. The guides are
marked UPPER and LOWER.
3. Install upper and lower guides. Torque guide screws to 150 - 200 ft. lbs. (20.84 - 27.60
meter kgs.) Install lock pins by bending in the middle until the ends of lock pin fit into
counterbore. Align ends of lock pin with pin holes in guide and straighten pin guiding
the ends into the holes.
4. Check between frame and guide at points A, Fig. 19, with .002 (.051mm) feeler gauge
to make sure guides fit into frame bore. NO gap should be present.
11.7 Installation of Crossheads

The crossheads in the pumps can be installed through the front (fluid end) or back end of
the crosshead guide. Reference Fig. 19. When installing crossheads, observe the following
precautions:
1. Thoroughly clean all dirt or

contamination and remove all
burrs or rough edges from OD of
the crosshead, crosshead pin
bores, and inner bore of
crosshead guide. Dry crosshead
pin bore so that taper bore
connection will make up metal to
metal. *See Note
2. Position eye of eccentric strap at the opening in the side of the crosshead guide.
Block eccentric strap so that crosshead will clear the eye as it is sliding into position to
where the crosshead pin holes are in alignment.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 50
3. Install the left hand crosshead first. Rotate eccentric assembly to move eye into
center crosshead and right hand eccentric strap eye back, affording clearance to
install center pin through right hand crosshead inspection door. Remove diaphragm
stuffing box plate (1, Fig. 19) and install right hand crosshead through this bore. Slide
into place and install crosshead pin.
* NOTE: If old crossheads are to be reused, inspect the sliding surfaces for wear or
scoring. If necessary, the crossheads may be switched to opposite sides of the
pump and rotated 180 to provide a smooth surface for the bottom of the
crosshead. The center crosshead can be rotated 180 and the crosshead pin
installed from the opposite side of pump.
Slide crosshead pin into bore but do not seat on taper until the crosshead pin retainer
(2) has been installed.
4. Install crosshead pin retainer (2) and retainer bolts (3) and rotate pin until the four
crosshead retainer to crosshead bolt holes (4) are in alignment. Install the crosshead
retainer to crosshead bolts (4) and make up hand tight.
Referring back to fig.12, page B-2, crosshead pin (4) can be installed without regard to
oil holes (5). Two holes are provided so the pin can be rotated 180 in relation to pin to
retainer plate screws (3).
Seat crosshead pin in tapered bore by bumping large end with a light blow. Tighten
retainer bolts (3 and 4, Fig. 19) to the following torque and safety wire:
FD-500 90-100 ft. lbs. (12.4-13.8 mkg) FD-800 165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg)
FD-1000 165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg) FD-1600 165-175 ft. lbs. (23-24 mkg)
DO NOT EXCEED THESE VALUES. USE TORQUE WRENCH.
NOTE: To pull the crosshead pin, remove the four crosshead retainer to crosshead
bolts (4) and screw two of the bolts into the jack screw holes (5). Tighten the two jack
screw bolts until the pin breaks loose. Complete removal of the crosshead pin retainer
plate (2) and slide pin out of bore.
5. Check running clearance of crosshead by sliding long feeler gauges between top of
crosshead and crosshead guide bore.
The clearance should not be less than .020 (.508mm). Check with long feeler gauge
over entire surface of crosshead.
Check crosshead alignment as instructed in the next section of this manual.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 51
NOTE: Less running clearance at center of crosshead can be cause by swelling from
overtightening the crosshead pin retainer bolts (4). If present, loosen pin and retighten
into place by using the make-up torques shown in paragraph 4.
11.8 Checking crosshead alignment

To obtain optimum service life from the pistons and liners, the horizontal centerline of the
crosshead extension rod must be positioned as near as possible to the center of the liner.
To check and adjust the crosshead alignment, proceed as follows;
1. Remove diaphragm stuffing box from the diaphragm plate, (fig. 19). Do not remove the
plate.
2. Position crosshead at mid point of stroke. With inside calipers or telescoping gauges
and a micrometer, accurately measure the distance from the diaphragm plate bore to
the crosshead extension rod at the top and bottom. Compare the two measurements to
determine the position of the rod relative to the centerline of the bore.
3. If the top reading is more than .030 (.76mm) greater than the bottom measurement,
shims should be inserted under the lower crosshead guide to bring the extension rod
back to center, provided there is ample clearance between the top of crosshead and
upper guide. Cut shims from steel shim stock long enough to reach completely across
the guides. Cut tabs on the sides to bend down over frame supports to hold shims in
place. Refer to items 3 and 4 under Installation of Crosshead guides.
4. Some older pumps were manufactured with large crosshead clearance which will cause
a loud knocking noise under poor suction conditions. Specifications have been revised
to .020 - .030 (.51 - .76 mm) clearance. After proper alignment has been obtained, the
top guide should be shimmed down to provide the specified clearance.
12 FLUID END MAINTENANCE

For many years, the fluid end of a pump was considered a non-wearing part which did not
cause any concern other than possible infrequent repairs or replacements resulting from
fluid cuts or washouts. However, the higher pressures of the present-day drilling
requirements have resulted in higher stresses being imposed on the fluid end which , when
combined with the corrosive characteristics of the drilling fluid, have resulted in the demand
that more and better maintenance be given to the fluid end parts and pieces if a reasonable
operating life is to be obtained.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 52
A few of the obvious points are as follows:
a. Make sure all valves on the discharge side of pump are opened before pump is put
into operation. Kicking pump in against a closed valve can often be the start of a
fatigue crack. An open crack may not necessarily occur at the precise moment,
however a small crack could occur and start the process of corrosion fatigue
failure.
b. Do not engage pump clutch when prime mover is running at a high rate of speed.
To do so can cause undesirable shock loads against both power end and fluid end.
c. Properly maintain pressure relief valve to assure it is set for the pressure rating on
the liner size being used.
d. Do not operate the pump for an extended period of time if a severe fluid knock is
present. The additional stress cycle, although of a lesser magnitude than normal
operating loads, must be added to the total number of cycles when considering the
fatigue life of the equipment.
e. Properly prepare fluid end for storage. When pump is to be shut down or not
operated for a period of ten days or more, it is recommended that the fluid end parts
such as liners, pistons, rods, etc., be removed from the pump and the fluid end
flushed out completely with fresh water. After a thorough flushing, apply grease or a
rust preventative to all of the machined surfaces such as valve pot cover threads,
valve pot cover gasket surfaces, valve seats, liner bores, etc. The parts removed
from the pump including liners, piston rods, etc., should of course be protected from
the elements. This will not only extend the life of the fluid end through resistance to
corrosion, but will also protect the usable life still left in the expendable parts and
maintain them in good condition for installation in the pump at the next start-up
period.
Maintenance and repairs should be made on the fluid end assembly by observing the
following precautions. Refer to Figure 20.
The fluid end assembly for these triplex pumps consists of three forged cylinder blocks,
complete with valve pot covers and cylinder heads, a suction manifold, and a discharge
manifold.
12.1 Fluid Cylinder Blocks

The three separate fluid cylinder blocks (1) bolt metal-to-metal to the power end frame
through retainer studs (2). Alignment with the power end frame bores is obtained through
the pilot boss on fluid end.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 53
However, to obtain accurate alignment, all nicks or burrs must be removed from pilot boss
and frame bore and all dirt and foreign matter cleaned form the mating surfaces; otherwise
cylinder blocks could make up in a cocked or misaligned position.
The fit between pilot boss and frame bore (Position A) is as follows:
(L.05mm) (L.20mm)
Pilot Boss to Frame L.002 - L.008
Install the three cylinder block nuts to the torque values shown in Chart V.
12.2 Suction Manifold

The suction manifold (3) bolts to each cylinder block and is sealed through the O-ring (4) in
the connection flange. Thoroughly clean O-ring groove, the O-ring sealing surface on
bottom of the cylinder block, and replace O-ring seal before bolting manifold into position.
The flange connection MUST make up metal-to-metal to retain the O-ring seal, therefore
any nicks, grooves or washouts on the sealing surface must be repaired before installation.
Ref. Welding and Repair Section in this manual for repair procedures.
Start all suction manifold bolts (5) in the three cylinder blocks before tightening. Tighten to
torque values shown in Chart V.
12.3 Discharge Manifold

The discharge manifold (6) bolts to each cylinder block and is sealed through the O-ring in
the connection flange.
Thoroughly clean the O-ring groove, the O-ring sealing surface on face of the cylinder block
before bolting the manifold back into position. The flange connection MUST make up
metal-to-metal to retain the O-ring seal, therefore any nicks, grooves, or washouts on this
sealing surface must be repaired before installation. Ref. Welding and Repair Section in
this manual for repair procedures.
Start all discharge manifold bolts (8) in the three cylinder blocks before tightening. Tighten
to torque values shown in Chart V. Tighten cylinder block to power frame stud nuts to
torque values shown in Chart V.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 54
12.4 Cylinder Head Thread Ring

A replaceable cylinder head thread ring (9) is bolted on to the face of the cylinder blocks.
The thread ring must make up metal-to-metal with face of cylinder blocks in order for the
axis of the threads to be perfectly square with the cylinder block bore. Therefore, make
sure all burrs, extrusions, or foreign matter is removed from the mating faces before making
installation.
NOTE: Install thread ring so that the bleed hole is in the down position. Tighten the
cylinder head thread ring stud nuts (10) to the torque values shown in Chart V.
12.5 Welding and Repairs

On occasion where washouts or normal wear cause repairs to be made to the fluid end
bores, the following welding procedures and precautions should be closely followed.
Machine bore all dimensions to those shown in applicable chart, and in all cases maintain
the shoulders (where liner, covers, etc., seat) 90 to the axis of the bore.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 55
Chart V
POSITION ITEM FD-500 FD-800 & FD-1000 FD-500 FD-800 & FD-1000
TORQUE TORQUE FT. LBS. TORQUE TORQUE METER-KG
FT-LBS. METER-KG
Cyl. Block to Power End 2 1600 1600 221 221

Suction Manifold 5 150 240 21 33
Discharge Manifold 8 710 1000 98 138
Thread Ring 10 710 1360 98 188
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 56
Chart VI
POSI- Inches Millimeters

TION FD-500 FD-800 FD-500 FD-800
FD-1000 FD-1000
A 8.505-8.510 8.755-8.760 216.02-216.15 222.38-222.50
B 7.505-7.508 7.766-7.758 190.63-190.70 196.98-197.05
C 12-1/2 13-3/8 317.5 339.7
D 6.125-6.130 6.775-6.780 155.58-155.70 172.08-172.21
E 5.375-5.380 6.010-6.015 136.53-136.65 152.65-152.78
F 4.995-5.000 5.622-5.627 126.87-127.00 142.80-142.93
G 2 4 50.8 101.6
H 2-1/2 4-1/2 63.5 114.3
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 57
FD-1600
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 58
Chart VIII
Inches Millimeters
A 8.250-8.255 209.55-209.68
B 7.125-7.130 180.97-181.10
C 8.252-8.255 209.60-209.68
D 14.499-14.501 368.27-368.32
E x 45 6.35 x 45
F 2.995-3.000 76.07-76.20
G .625-.630 15.87-16.00
H 1.120-1.130 28.45-28.70
J 5.870-5.880 149.10-149.35
K 6.247-6.252 158.67-158.80
L 6.630-6.635 168.40-168.53
M 7.375-7.380 187.32-187.45
N .495-.505 12.57-12.83
P 2 Taper per ft. on dia. 50.80 Taper per ft. on dia.
12.6 Welding Procedures

Weld repairs can usually be separated into two categories:
(1) Washes, and (2) Cracks. Listed below is the basic information for the repairs:
Washout: - Weld as 30 Carbon Steel.

- Clean area by grinding or Arc-air.
- Before starting any welding procedure, make sure the electrodes are dry of
moisture, and if necessary, put in oven and bring up to temperature required
to drive out moisture.
- Spot heat area to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) out in all directions for a
minimum of 3. (75mm)
- Use AWS-ASTM E-60-7018 low hydrogen rods. Example - Adam-Arc 7018.
- Temperatures should be brought back to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) after
each pass and maintained throughout the welding. After welding is
completed and area cleaned, heat to 250 - 350F (120 - 180C) and allow
to cool.
Cracks: - Grind out all of crack. Any attempt to burn out a crack will only result in the
crack progressing faster than the material can be burned.
- Follow the same welding procedure as above.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 59
Preheating: - The purpose of preheating is to expand the area being repaired so that as
the cooling process takes place, the welded area and the preheated area will
cool more uniformly. Preheating also prevents hard spots from forming
between the base metal and the welding by eliminating a thermal shock as
the weld is being applied. This hard spot will, of course, be a good place for
fatigue cracks to occur.
12.7 Repairs to Valve Pot Cover Bore

When making repairs to washouts in the valve pot cover bore, it is extremely important that
the surface where the valve cover seats is either machined or ground perfectly flat and
90 to the axis of the threads. A shown in Fig. 21, the valve pot cover gasket (1) seats into
the counterbore at top of valve cover deck, and as the cover makes up metal to metal to
the valve deck, the gasket is confined within its counterbore. Obviously, any high spots on
the valve cover deck from weld repairs, or any low spot from over-grinding of the repairs
can result in a gap between top of the valve cover deck and bottom of the valve cover,
through which the valve cover gasket can be extruded under pressure.
The high or low spot can also cause valve covers to make up in a cocked position and
result in severe thread damage (cracks) due to the axis of the two mating threads being out
of square.
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 60
Approximate Weights of Pump Assemblies
FD-500 FD-800 FD-1000 FD-1600

lbs. kgs. lbs. kgs. lbs. kgs. lbs kgs.
Pinion Shaft 718 326 1,630 740 1,709 775 2,373 1,077
Crankshaft Assy. 5,185 2,352 7,458 3,383 10,479 4,744 15,179 6,885
Crosshead 119 54 258 117 363 165 431 196
Crosshead Pin & Retainer 33 15 123 56 177 80 201 91
Gear Case Cover 341 155 262 119 340 154 379 172
Suction Manifold 258 117 429 195 704 319 704 319
Discharge Manifold 390 177 696 316 717 325 740 336
One-third Fluid end 1,527 693 1,140 517 1,140 517 1,865 846
section-studded
www.nov.com
Product Information Bulletin
Triplex Mud Pump

Supplement for all Pump Manuals

Triplex Mud Pump
This document contains proprietary and confidential information which is the National Oilwell Varco, L.P.
REMARKS
property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or subsidiaries (all collectively 1530 W Sam Houston Pkwy. N
referred to hereinafter as NOV). It is loaned for limited purposes only and
remains the property of NOV. Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this Houston, TX 77043
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE
design or distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to NOV upon request or
Phone 713-935-8000
upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. This document and the Fax 713-935-8382
information contained and represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
CLIENT PO NUMBER
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

Client Document Number MP.WARNING 02
www.nov.com
Document number MP.WARNING
Revision 02
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
02 08.03.2005 Updated to new template PG

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

02 Updated to electronic format from pdf to ms word in new template
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 3
PRESSURE
RELIEF
VALVES
! Notice !
Our Technical Publications relative to reciprocating pumps, state that pressure relief valves
must be installed in the discharge systems from these units. This supplement is issued to
emphasize the importance of relieving the discharge system of all pressure which exceeds
the rated working pressure applied by the manufacturer to the specific pistons and liners (
or plungers and packing) in any particular unit.
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 WARNING......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 The Pressure Relief Valve ...................................................................................... 5
1.2 Rupture Disc or Burst Disc ..................................................................................... 5
1.3 Location of the Relief Valve .................................................................................... 6
1.4 The Relief Valve Discharge Line............................................................................. 6
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 5
1 WARNING
For the protection of persons and properly the discharge system form each Reciprocating
Pump must be equipped with a device which relives the system of all pressures which
exceed the pressure rating applied by the manufacturer to each particular piston or plunger
diameter. Allowances will be made for pressure surges which are inherent with the
reciprocating action of piston and plunger pumps. The percentage of pressure allowance
appears later in this publication and the Standards of the Hydraulic Institute (13th Edition)
The relieving device must provide for instantaneous pressure relief, it may be a valve
designed for automatic or manual resetting; however, if preferred, rupture discs or burst
may be installed.
Failure to comply with the procedures outlined in the Warning may result in damage to the
pump and related equipment and more importantly may cause serious bodily injury or
death!
1.1 The Pressure Relief Valve
1. The valve must be a full opening type.
2. It must have a working pressure rating, equal to or greater than, the maximum
working pressure of the pump.
3. The through capacity of the valve, when fully opened, must be sufficient to relieve
the full capacity of the pump without excessive overpressure.
1.2 Rupture Disc or Burst Disc

1. These discs must have a diameter which is not less than the pipe size of the
pressure relief flange.
2. These discs must have a rupture of burst pressure rating consistent with the
specifications tabulated later in this publication.
www.nov.com
Revision 02
Page 6
1.3 Location of the Relief Valve

1. The relief valve must be placed in the discharge line as close as possible to the
pump fluid end or it may be mounted on the pump discharge manifold.
2. The relief valve must be on the pump side of any discharge strainer.
3. The relief valve must be between the pump fluid end and any valve in the discharge
system.
4. There must be no restricting device(s) between the relief valve and the pump fluid
end.
1.4 The Relief Valve Discharge Line

1. The relief valve discharge line should not terminate in the pump suction line.
2. The line should terminate in the supply tank, if possible.
3. The line must be securely anchored.
4. The line must be the same pipe size as, or may be larger than, the discharge
connection on the relief valve.
5. If the line is of great length, this must be taken into consideration in sizing the relief
valve.
6. There must be no restrictions or valves in the relief valve discharge line.
Note: Follow the foregoing instructions if rupture discs or burst discs are installed.
SUGGESTED SET PRESSURES FOR PUMP RELIEF VALVES

Pump Type Operating Pump Pressure
Double Acting Duplex Piston Pressure Rating Plus 25%
Double Acting Triplex Piston Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Double Acting Quintuplex Piston Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Single Acting Triplex Piston Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Single Acting Simplex Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 25%
Single Acting Duplex Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Single Acting Triplex Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Single Acting Quintuplex Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Single Acting Septuplex Plunger Pressure Rating Plus 10%
Note: The above set pressures are to be observed when installing rupture discs or burst
discs.
www.nov.com
Page 1 of 3
Product Information Bulletin No. 01-05-01-MP

TRIPLEX MUD PUMPS
Date: July 12, 2013
Rev. 06
Subject: Power End Lubrication Oil Additive and wear-in Period
Product: All Triplex Mud Pumps
Affected
Assemblies: P-Series & F-Series Mud Pumps
Objective: Recommended power end lube oil additive to reduce corrective pitting
found on mud pump gears. Provide wear-in period information.
Issue: During the initial mud pump wear-in period, it is common to see initial
pitting on the tooth faces of Triplex Mud Pump gears.
Solution: It is National Oilwell Varcos recommendation to use a Molybdenum Disulfide

oil additive with the Mud Pump Gear Oil during initial running and when signs
of corrective (also known as initial) pitting are observed on Mud Pump gears.
The oil additive will help to polish the gear tooth surfaces and in some cases,
if used in the initial Mud Pump wear-in period, can reduce the amount of
initial pitting common on Mud Pump gears.
Moly oil additives such as Dow-Corning Molykote M Gear Guard (mixture

5% by volume) or TS-90 Moly Gear Concentrate have been used in this
application with good results. The oil additive would need to be compatible
with the mud pump seals and not adversely affect the oil filtration system.
Using gear oil with Moly already included in the gear oil, like the Schaeffer
209A Gear Lube, would assure the amount suspended in the oil is correct
and it is thoroughly mixed. It is also extremely important to follow the National
Oilwell Varco gear oil recommendations as seen in Table 1. The
recommended gear oils have the film strength necessary to withstand the
Page 2 of 3
impact loading encountered in oilfield drilling operations. The results of not
using the recommended gear oil may permit metal-to-metal contact of the
gear teeth, which will be noticeable in the form of excessive pitting and wear
on the load side of the gear teeth. Excessive pitting and wear can result in an
increased risk of mud pump damage. National Oilwell Varco recommends
that an ISO viscosity grade 460 oil be used during the wear-in period
for all P-Series Mud Pumps. The duration of the wear-in period is
considered the first 2000 hours of use but can vary depending on usage.
After the wear-in period has been accomplished, the lubricating oil
should be selected from the appropriate temperature range in Table 1
below:
PSERIESMUDPUMPS
TEMPERATURE AGMAINDUSTRIALEPGEAROIL
AGMA#7EPorASTM/ISOVGGrade460
50Fto155F(10Cto68C) Viscosity414506CST@100F(38C)

FSERIESMUDPUMPS
TEMPERATURE AGMAINDUSTRIALEPGEAROIL
Table 1. Mud Pump Lube Oils
The Mud Pump bull gears may develop corrective pitting during the early
stages of the product life. This corrective pitting process can be exaggerated
by operating a Mud Pump for extended periods at high load, especially if the
lube oil temperature exceeds 140F (60C). As a result of the corrective
pitting process, small metal particles will be present in the lubrication oil.
These metal particles normally accumulate on the power end magnets, in the
lube oil filter, in the settling chamber and in the main sump. National Oilwell
Varco recommends that the magnets, filter and sumps be checked regularly
and maintained/cleaned as needed.
It is further recommended that all commissioning and endurance tests be

designed such that the pump speed and discharge pressure is gradually
increased from the lower speeds and pressures to the higher ones. This is to
allow the gears to wear in gradually and reduce the occurrence of excessive
gear pitting.
Page 3 of 3
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE RECOMMENDATIONS COULD RESULT IN
CATASTROPHIC FAILURE OF THE PUMP WHICH MAY RESULT IN DEATH,
BODILY INJURY AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.
PROCEDURE
THE USE OF AND APPLICATION OF

SAFETY WIRE FOR SECONDARY
RETENTION

This document contains proprietary and confidential information
which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited Rig Solutions
RIG/PLANT
purposes only and remains the property of National Oilwell.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or 11000 Corporate Centre Dr.
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the
express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Houston TX 77041 USA
to be returned to National Oilwell Varco upon request and in any Phone +1 (281) 854-0647
REMARKS event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. Fax +1 (281) 854-0508
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
CLIENT PO NUMBER
ASP00019 A

Document number ASP00019
Revision A
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
A 15/04/2011 SEE ECN C. SILVA T. GORMSEN T. GORMSEN

- 10/03/1995 First Issue KTK K DAW JES
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

- First Issue
A SEE ECN
Revision A
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................. 3
2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................... 4
3 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................. 4
3.1 MATERIAL AND SIZE ............................................................................................ 4
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 5
3.3 LOCK-WIRING METHODS .................................................................................... 6
3.4 OTHER APPLICATIONS ........................................................................................ 7
3.5 ILLUSTRATION OF TYPICAL LOCK-WIRE APPLICATION .................................. 8
4 QA PROVISIONS.............................................................................................................. 9
5 NOTES .............................................................................................................................. 9
1 SCOPE
Revision A
Page 4
This procedure establishes the method for the selection and application of safety wire.
Lock wiring is the application of wire to prevent relative movement of structure or other
critical components subject to vibration, tension, torque, etc.
This procedure is intended to help eliminate the risk of dropped objects in

components or parts manufactured.
Bolts, Nuts and Screws are the common type of fasteners used on NOV
equipment. They need to be locked (secondary retention) against loss of torque / pre-
tension.
Use of safety wire to prevent rotation of fasteners is a safe and primarily

recommended secondary retention method for fasteners. It is the most preferred
method because it not only prevents fasteners from loosening but also keeps them from
falling in case of primary retention failure (bolt head Breaks off) and effectively prevents
dropped objects.
Note that the secondary retention will work only if the primary retention method is
properly in place, i.e. bolts and screws are tightened and torqued as per specifications,
and there is no play between the mating elements. Secondary retention methods aim in
preventing any compromise in primary retention, loss of pre-tension in assembled
fasteners, loosening and backing out.
Definitions:
Secondary Retention The means of effectively retaining a fastener/joining component

such that the operating loads do not compromise the integrity of the primary fastening
component.
2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
DS00008-DES DESIGN TORQUE STANDARDS

Machinerys Handbook 27th Edition
3 REQUIREMENTS
3.1 MATERIAL AND SIZE
3.1.1 Material
Lock wire must be aircraft quality stainless steel 302/304 condition A.
3.1.2 Lock-wire sizes

Revision A
Page 5
a. 0.5080 mm (0.020 inch) diameter

b. 0.8128 mm (0.032 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6000.8
c. 1.1938 mm (0.047 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6000.9
d. 1.2950 mm (0.051 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6001
e. 3.1750 mm (0.125 inch) diameter NOV P/N Z6002
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 Safety wire shall be new upon each application.
3.2.2 Parts shall be lockwired in such a manner that the lockwire shall be put in tension
when the part tends to loosen.
3.2.3 The lockwire should always be installed and twisted so that the loop around the
head stays down and does not tend to come up over bolt head and leave a slack loop.
3.2.4 Care shall be exercised when installing lockwire to ensure that it is tight but not
over stressed.
3.2.5 Properly twisted lockwire will have 7-12 twists per inch for .032 wire and 6-8 turns
for .052 wire. More twists will over stress the wire and cause fatigue and breakage.
3.2.6 A pigtail should be to 5/8 in length (4-8 twists) at the end of the wiring. This
pigtail shall be bent back or under to prevent it from becoming a snag.
3.2.7 As per the Machinerys Handbook 27th edition the following rules apply:
a) No more than three (3) bolts may be tied together.

b) Bolt heads may be tied as shown only when the female thread receiver is
captive.(see figure 1)
c) Lockwire must fill a minimum of 50% of the drilled hole provided for the
use of lockwire.
d) Diameter of lockwire is determined by the thread size of the fastener to be
lockwired.
1) Thread sizes of 6 mm (0.25 inch) and smaller use 0.508mm (0.020
inch) wire.
2) Thread sizes of 6 mm (0.25 inch) to 12 mm (0.5 inch) use 0.8128 mm
(0.032 inch) wire.
3) Thread sizes > 12 mm (0.5 inch) use 1.1938 mm (0.047 inch) OR
1.295mm (0.051) wire.
The larger wire may be used in smaller bolts in cases of convenience, but smaller
wire must not be used in larger fastener sizes.
Revision A
Page 6
Figure 1: Safety Wire / Lock Wire
3.3 LOCK-WIRING METHODS
3.3.1 The method involves threading a wire through holes in the fastener to lock it
against being rotated loose. The wire is twisted before being threaded and is locked to
next bolt. Safety wire should be placed in and around bolt head to maintain the pre-load.
The use of safety wire ties is illustrated in figure 1 above. The illustrations assume the
use of right-hand threaded fasteners.
3.3.2 The double-twist method:

The double-twist method of lock-wiring shall be used as the common method of
lock-wiring.
CAUTION: screws in closely spaced geometric which secure hydraulic or air seals, hold
hydraulic pressure, or used in critical areas of clutch mechanism should use double twist
method of lock-wiring. Make sure that the wire is so installed that it can easily be broken
when required in an emergency situation.
3.3.3 Lock-wiring widely spaced multiple groups by the double twist method.
a) When the multiple fasteners are from 4-6 inches apart, three (3) fasteners
shall be the maximum number in a series that can be safety wired
together.
b) When the multiple fasteners are spaced more than 6 inches apart, the
multiple fastener application specified in Figure 1 shall not be used unless
tie points are provided on adjacent parts to shorten the span of the wire to
less than 6 inches.
c) One end of the safety wire shall be inserted through one set of lockwire
holes in the head of the bolt. The other end of the safety wire shall be
looped around the bolt head in the tightening direction.
Revision A
Page 7
d) The strands, while taut, shall be twisted until the twisted part is just short of
the nearest hole in the next bolt. The twisted portion shall be within 1/8 of
the holes in each bolt as shown in figure 1 above.
e) After wiring the last bolt, the wire shall be twisted to form a pigtail of 2-4
twists. The excess wire shall be cut off. The pigtail shall be bent back or
under the part to prevent it from becoming a snag.
3.3.4 Single wire method:

The single wire method may be used in a closely spaced, closed geometrical
pattern (triangle, square, circle, etc.) on parts in an electrical system, and in places that
would make the single-method more advisable as shown in figure 2 below. Closely
spaced shall be considered a maximum of two inches between centers. Maximum length
of wire shall not exceed 24 in total length.
Figure 2: Safety Wire / Lock Wire Single
3.4 OTHER APPLICATIONS

Revision A
Page 8
3.4.1 Hollow head bolts are safety wired in the manner prescribed for regular bolts.
3.4.2 Drain plugs and cocks may be wired to a bolt, nut, or other part having a free lock
hole in accordance with the general instructions contained herein.
3.4.3 External snap rings may be locked if necessary in accordance with the general
locking principles contained herein.
3.4.4 Internal snap rings shall never be lockwired.
3.4.5 Bolts and hardware may be wired using SAFE-T-Cable. Follow procedure
D744000087-PRO-001.
Safe-T-Cable can be used similar to Safety/Lock wire to secure Fasteners. The safety
cable installation procedure is shown in Figure. The safety cable comes in pre-cut
lengths with stubs on one end. After sewing through the holes in the fasteners they are
tightened and crimped using a ferrule cartridge and crimping tool.
They are more convenient to use and take only a fraction of the time to secure fasteners
as compared to safety wire as no wire twisting is required. However additional tools like
ferrule cartridge and crimping tool are required. For additional information refer Safe-T-
Cable (website http://www.dmctools.com/Catalog/safe_t_cable.htm).
Figure 3: Safety Cable Installation Procedure
3.5 ILLUSTRATION OF TYPICAL LOCK-WIRE APPLICATION

Revision A
Page 9
4 QA PROVISIONS
5 NOTES
DS00008
Design Specification
Design Torque Standard
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS

TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE
PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR USE OF
THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT
THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE
RETURNED TO NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT UPON COMPLETION
OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED
AND REPRESENTED IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
TITLE
CURRENT INITIAL Design Torque Standard
DRAWN
D.TRUONG A. Vargas
CHECKED
B.RICE B. Levay
SIZE DWG NO REV
APPVD
B.RICE JB A DS00008 F
DATE
7/25/11 11.13.1992 SCALE NONE WT LBS SHEET 1 OF 16
DCF0045 (REV B)
NOTES
1. Unless noted, all values are based on light machine oil or anti seize lubricated bolts (not high
pressure lubes)
2. NOV does not recommend assembling bolts dry
3. Proof Strength is 92% of minimum yield strength
4. Torque values given represent 70% to 80% of proof strength
5. Clamp force is based on 75% of proof strength
6. These torque values are to be followed unless otherwise specified
7. If torqueing into aluminum, contact engineering for appropriate torque value.
8. After proper torque has been established in accordance with specification, fasteners shall be
immediately identified as being torqued by either:
a) Being safety wired in accordance with ASP00019 and/or
b) Marked with an X using either a red or yellow paint marker.
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
SCALE NONE WT LBS SHEET 2 OF 16
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR LIGHT MACHINE OIL LUBRICATED BOLTS
GRADE 2 GRADE 5
T.S. = 74,000 PSI to DIA T.S. = 120,000 PSI to 1 DIA
PROOF STRENGTH = 55,000 PSI PROOF STRENGTH = 85,00 PSI
T.S. = 60,000 PSI 7/8 to 1-1/2 DIA T.S. = 105,000 PSI 1-1/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
COARSE THREAD SERIES - UNC
Max. Clamp Min. Max. Clamp
Dia-Threads Min. Torque
Torque Force Torque Torque Force
Per Inch (ft-lbf)
(ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (ft-lbf) (lb)
1/4 20 5.7 6.3 1,320 7.6 8.4 2,020
5/16 18 10.5 11.6 2,160 16 18 3,340
3/8 16 19 21 3,200 29 32 4,940
7/16 14 29 32 4,380 48 53 6,800
1/2 13 48 53 5,840 71 79 9,050
9/16 12 67 74 7,500 105 116 11,600
5/8 11 95 105 9,300 143 158 14,400
3/4 10 166 184 13,800 247 273 21,300
7/8 9 157 173 11,400 409 452 29,400
18 238 263 15,000 608 672 38,600
1 1/8 7 333 368 18,900 760 840 42,300
1 1/4 7 475 525 24,000 1,064 1,176 53,800 7
1 3/8 6 627 639 28,600 1,387 1,533 64,100 7
1 1/2 6 827 914 34,800 1,843 2,037 78,000 7
FINE THREAD SERIES UNF

1/4 28 5.7 6.3 1,500 9.5 10.5 2,320
5/16 24 11.4 12.6 2,400 18 20 3,700
3/8 24 22 24 3,620 33 37 5,600
7/16 20 33 37 4,900 52 58 7,550
1/2 20 52 58 6,600 86 95 10,700
9/16 18 76 84 8,400 114 126 12,950
5/8 18 105 116 10,600 162 179 16,300
3/4 16 185 205 15,400 285 315 23,800
7/8 14 176 194 12,600 447 494 32,400
14 257 284 16,400 665 735 42,200
1 1/8 12 380 420 21,200 836 924 47,500 7
1 1/4 12 523 578 26,600 1,178 1,302 59,600 7
1 3/8 12 703 777 32,500 1,596 1,764 73,000 7
1 1/2 12 931 1,029 39,100 2,090 2,310 87,700 7
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
GRADE 8 HOLO-KROME
TENSILE STRENGTH = 150,000 PSI TENSILE STRENGTH = 170,000 PSI

Per Inch (ft-lbf)
1/4 20 11.4 12.6 2,860 12 14 3,240
5/16 18 24 26 3,720 26 28 5,340
3/8 16 43 47 7,000 47 51 7,920
7/16 14 67 74 9,550 75 83 10,850
1/2 13 105 116 12,750 114 126 14,450
9/16 12 143 158 16,100 163 181 18,500
5/8 11 209 231 20,350 226 250 23,000
3/4 10 361 399 30,100 404 446 34,000
7/8 9 570 630 41,600 651 719 47,000
18 855 945 54,500 7 969 1,071 61,700 7
1 1/8 7 1,216 1,344 68,700 7 1,349 1,491 77,800 7
1 1/4 7 1,729 1,911 87,200 7 1,967 2,174 98,700 7
1 3/8 6 2,261 2,499 104,000 7 2,565 2,835 117,800 7
1 1/2 6 3,002 3,318 126,500 7 3,411 3,770 143,200 7

1/4 28 13.3 17.7 3,280 14 16 3,750
5/16 24 24 26 5,220 29 32 5,920
3/8 24 48 53 7,900 52 58 8,050
7/16 20 75 84 10,700 84 92 12,150
1/2 20 114 126 14,400 124 137 16,250
9/16 18 162 179 18,250 183 203 20,700
5/8 18 228 252 23,000 258 286 26,200
3/4 16 399 441 33,600 451 499 38,000
7/8 14 627 693 45,800 7 718 794 51,900 7
14 950 1,050 59,700 7 1,064 1,176 67,600 7
1 1/8 12 1,368 1,512 77,000 7 1,511 1,670 87,000 7
1 1/4 12 1,900 2,100 96,600 7 2,180 2,410 109,400 7
1 3/8 12 2,584 2,856 118,400 7 2,926 3,234 134,000 7
1 1/2 12 3,382 3,738 142,200 7 4,769 5,271 201,000 7
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
STAINLESS ASTM F593G & F593H STAINLESS ASTM F593U
T.S. = 100,000 PSI to 5/8 DIA TENSILE STRENGTH = 135,000 PSI
T.S. = 85,000 PSI 3/4 to 1-1/2 DIA
PROOF STRENGTH = 41,000 PSI
Per Inch (ft-lbf)
1/4 20 5.7 6.3 1,407 8.6 9.5 2,266
5/16 18 11.4 12.6 2,319 18.1 20.0 3,734
3/8 16 20.0 22.1 3,429 33.3 36.8 5,522
7/16 14 32 36 4,704 52 58 7,574
1/2 13 49 55 6,279 80 88 10,110
9/16 12 72 80 8,054 116 128 12,968
5/8 11 99 109 10,001 160 176 16,103
3/4 10 122 134 10,271 282 312 23,798
7/8 9 197 217 14,207 456 504 32,918
18 295 327 18,635 684 756 43,179
1 1/8 7 418 462 23,462 968 1,070 54,364 7
1 1/4 7 590 652 29,797 1,366 1,510 69,041 7
1 3/8 6 773 855 35,516 1,792 1,980 82,294 7
1 1/2 6 1,026 1,134 43,204 2,378 2,628 100,106 7

1/4 28 6.7 7.4 1,611 10.5 11.6 2,594
5/16 24 12.4 13.7 2,567 20.9 23.1 4,133
3/8 24 22.8 25.2 3,885 37 41 6,256
7/16 20 36 40 5,252 59 65 8,457
1/2 20 56 62 7,076 90 100 11,393
9/16 18 80 88 8,983 129 143 14,464
5/8 18 112 124 11,328 181 200 18,240
3/4 16 136 150 11,470 315 349 26,576
7/8 14 217 239 15,652 503 555 36,266
14 323 357 20,387 748 826 47,239 7
1 1/8 12 469 519 26,322 1,087 1,201 60,900 7
1 1/4 12 653 721 32,995 1,513 1,973 76,451 7
1 3/8 12 881 973 10,436 2,040 2,254 93,694 7
1 1/2 12 1,154 1,276 49,616 7 2,675 2,957 122,646 7
F593 F593
G or H U
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS LUBRICATED WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
GRADE 2 GRADE 5
T.S. = 74,000 PSI to DIA T.S. = 120,000 PSI to 1 DIA
T.S. = 60,000 PSI 7/8 to 1-1/2 DIA T.S. = 105,000 PSI 1-1/8 to 1-1/2 DIA
Per Inch (ft-lbf)
1/4 20 4.3 4.7 1,320 5.7 6.3 2,020
5/16 18 7.8 8.7 2,160 12.1 13.4 3,340
3/8 16 14.3 15.8 3,200 21.4 23.6 4,940
7/16 14 21.4 23.6 4,380 36 39 6,800
1/2 13 36 39 5,840 53 59 9,050
9/16 12 50 55 7,500 78 87 11,600
5/8 11 71 79 9,300 107 118 14,400
3/4 10 125 138 13,800 185 205 21,300
7/8 9 118 130 11,400 306 339 29,400
18 178 197 15,000 456 504 38,600
1 1/8 7 249 276 18,900 570 630 42,300
1 1/4 7 356 394 24,000 798 882 53,800 7
1 3/8 6 470 520 28,600 1,040 1,150 64,100 7
1 1/2 6 620 685 34,800 1,382 1,528 78,000 7

1/4 28 4.3 4.7 1,500 7.1 7.9 2,320
5/16 24 8.6 9.5 2,400 13.5 15 3,700
3/8 24 16.4 18.1 3,620 25 28 5,600
7/16 20 25 28 4,900 39 43 7,550
1/2 20 39 43 6,600 64 71 10,700
9/16 18 57 63 8,400 86 95 12,950
5/8 18 78 87 10,600 121 134 16,300
3/4 16 139 154 15,400 214 236 23,800
7/8 14 132 146 12,600 335 370 32,400
14 192 213 16,400 499 551 42,200
1 1/8 12 285 315 21,200 627 693 47,500 7
1 1/4 12 392 433 26,600 884 977 59,600 7
1 3/8 12 527 583 32,500 1,197 1,323 73,000 7
1 1/2 12 698 772 39,100 1,568 1,733 87,700 7
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
GRADE 8 HOLO-KROME
TENSILE STRENGTH = 150,000 PSI TENSILE STRENGTH = 170,000 PSI

Per Inch (ft-lbf)
1/4 20 8.6 9.5 2,860 9.3 10.2 3,240
5/16 18 17.8 19.7 3,720 19 21 5,340
3/8 16 32 35 7,000 35 39 7,920
7/16 14 50 55 9,550 56 62 10,850
1/2 13 78 87 12,750 86 95 14,450
9/16 12 107 118 16,100 123 135 18,500
5/8 11 157 173 20,350 170 187 23,000
3/4 10 271 299 30,100 303 335 34,000
7/8 9 428 473 41,600 488 539 47,000 7
18 641 709 54,500 7 727 803 61,700 7
1 1/8 7 912 1,008 68,700 7 1,012 1,118 77,800 7
1 1/4 7 1,297 1,433 87,200 7 1,475 1,630 98,700 7
1 3/8 6 1,696 1,874 104,000 7 1,924 2,126 117,800 7
1 1/2 6 2,252 2,489 126,500 7 2,558 2,827 143,200 7

1/4 28 10 11 3,280 10.7 11.8 3,750
5/16 24 17.8 19.7 5,220 21 24 5,920
3/8 24 36 39 7,900 39 43 8,050
7/16 20 57 63 10,700 63 69 12,150
1/2 20 86 95 14,400 93 102 16,250
9/16 18 121 134 18,250 138 152 20,700
5/8 18 171 189 23,000 194 214 26,200
3/4 16 299 331 33,600 338 374 38,000
7/8 14 470 520 45,800 7 539 595 51,900 7
14 713 788 59,700 7 798 882 67,600 7
1 1/8 12 1,026 1,134 77,000 7 1,133 1,252 87,000 7
1 1/4 12 1,425 1,575 96,600 7 1,635 1,807 109,400 7
1 3/8 12 1,938 2,142 11,840 7 2,195 2,426 134,000 7
1 1/2 12 2,537 2,804 142,200 7 3,577 3,953 201,000 7
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
STAINLESS ASTM F593G & F593H STAINLESS ASTM F593U
T.S. = 100,000 PSI to 5/8 DIA TENSILE STRENGTH = 135,000 PSI
T.S. = 85,000 PSI 3/4 to 1-1/2 DIA
PROOF STRENGTH = 41,000 PSI
Per Inch (ft-lbf)
1/4 20 4.3 4.7 1,407 6.4 7.1 2,266
5/16 18 8.6 9.5 2,319 13.5 15 3,734
3/8 16 15 16.5 3,429 24.9 27.6 5,522
7/16 14 24 27 4,704 39 43 7,574
1/2 13 37 41 6,279 60 66 10,110
9/16 12 54 60 8,054 87 96 12,968
5/8 11 74 82 10,001 120 132 16,103
3/4 10 91 101 10,271 212 234 23,798
7/8 9 147 163 14,207 342 378 32,918
18 222 245 18,635 513 567 43,179
1 1/8 7 314 347 23,462 726 802 54,364 7
1 1/4 7 442 489 29,797 1,025 1,132 69,041 7
1 3/8 6 580 641 35,516 1,344 1,485 82,294 7
1 1/2 6 770 851 43,204 1,783 1,971 100,106 7

1/4 28 5.0 5.5 1,611 7.8 8.7 2,594
5/16 24 9.3 10.2 2,567 15.7 17.3 4,133
3/8 24 17.1 18.9 3,885 28 31 6,256
7/16 20 27 30 5,252 44 49 8,457
1/2 20 42 46 7,076 68 75 11,393
9/16 18 60 66 8,983 97 107 14,464
5/8 18 84 93 11,328 135 150 18,240
3/4 16 102 113 11,470 237 261 26,576
7/8 14 162 180 15,652 377 417 36,266
14 242 268 20,387 561 620 47,239 7
1 1/8 12 352 389 26,322 815 901 60,990 7
1 1/4 12 489 541 32,995 1,135 1,254 76,451 7
1 3/8 12 660 730 40,436 1,530 1,691 93,694 7
1 1/2 12 866 957 48,616 7 2,006 2,218 112,646 7
F593 F593
G or H U
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
CLASS 4.6 CLASS 8.8
T.S. = 400 MPa T.S. = 830 MPa
PROOF STRENGTH = 225 MPa PROOF STRENGTH = 600 MPa
T.S. is for all dia. T.S. is for all dia
*Metric socket head screws*
METRIC SERIES
Min. Torque
Diameter - pitch Torque Force Torque Torque Force
(ft-Ibf)
(ft-Ibf) (Ib) (ft-Ibf) (ft-Ibf) (lb)
M3 - .5 .4 .5 183 .9 1.2 489
M3.5 - .6 .6 .73 247 1.5 1.9 659
M4 - .7 .9 1.1 320 2.1 2.9 854
M5 - .8 1.7 2.1 516 4.3 5.8 1,378
M6 - 1 2.9 3.7 732 7.2 9.9 1,954
M8 - 1.25 6.9 8.9 1,331 17 23 3,550
M10 - 1.5 14 17 2,106 33 47 5,617
M12 - 1.75 24 31 3,055 57 81 8,148
M14 - 2 38 48 4,177 91 129 11,141
M16 - 2 57 74 5,664 141 199 15,106
M18 2.5 81 104 6,975 195 278 18,600
M20 2.5 112 145 8,851 274 388 23,604
M22 2.5 151 196 10,940 372 524 29,174
M24 - 3 193 251 12,746 472 671 33,989
M27 3 280 365 16,570 690 974 44,186
M30 - 3.5 381 496 20,216 934 1,325 53,911 7
M33 3.5 514 670 24,961 1,267 1,787 66,563 7
M36 3.5 656 857 29,422 1,627 2,285 78,460 7
M39 - 4 852 1112 35,122 2,102 2,966 93,661 7
M42 - 4.5 1,059 1380 40,363 2,599 3,681 107,634 7
M48 - 5 1,586 2069 53,038 7 3,899 5,518 141,435 7
M56 - 5.5 2,535 3310 73,007 7 6,253 8,828 194,686 7
4.6 8.8
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
CLASS 10.9 CLASS 12.9
T.S. = 1040 MPa T.S. = 1220 MPa
T.S. is for all dia T.S. is for all dia.
* Metric socket head screws*
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5 1.3 1.7 676 1.5 2.0 790
M3.5 - .6 2.1 2.7 911 2.5 3.1 1,065
M4 - .7 3.1 4.0 1,182 3.7 4.7 1,381
M5 - .8 6.2 8.0 1,906 7.3 9.4 2,228
M6 - 1 10.6 13.7 2,703 12 16 3,159
M8 - 1.25 25 33 4,910 29 38 5,739
M10 - 1.5 50 65 7,771 58 76 9,082
M12 - 1.75 87 112 11,271 101 131 13,172
M14 - 2 138 179 15,411 162 210 18,011
M16 - 2 212 275 20,897 247 321 24,422
M18 2.5 297 384 25,730 347 449 30,070
M20 2.5 414 537 53,911 483 628 38,159
M22 2.5 557 726 40,358 651 848 47,165 7
M24 3 715 929 47,019 7 836 1,086 54,950 7
M27 3 1,034 1,347 61,125 7 1,209 1,574 71,435 7
M30 - 3.5 1,408 1,833 74,577 7 1,646 2,142 87,157 7
M33 3.5 1,896 2,473 92,079 7 2,216 2,890 107,611 7
M36 4 2,421 3,161 108,536 7 2,829 3,695 126,843 7
M39 4 3,145 4,103 129,564 7 3,675 4,795 151,418 7
M42 - 4.5 3,907 5,093 148,894 7 4,566 5,952 174,009 7
M48 - 5 5,853 7,633 195,652 7 6,840 8,921 228,654 7
M56 5.5 9,352 12,212 269,316 7 10,930 14,272 314,743 7
10.9
12.9
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
CLASS 4.6 CLASS 8.8
T.S. = 400 MPa T.S. = 830 MPa
T.S. is for all dia. T.S. is for all dia
*Metric socket head screws*
METRIC SERIES
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5 0.3 0.4 183 0.7 0.9 489
M3.5 - .6 0.5 0.6 247 1.1 1.5 659
M4 - .7 0.7 0.9 320 1.6 2.0 854
M5 - .8 1.3 1.7 516 3.2 4.2 1,378
M6 - 1 2.2 2.8 732 5.4 7.0 1,954
M8 - 1.25 5 7 1,331 13 17 3,550
M10 - 1.5 11 14 2,106 25 32 5,617
M12 - 1.75 18 23 3,055 43 56 8,148
M14 - 2 29 37 4,177 68 89 11,141
M16 - 2 43 56 5,664 106 137 15,106
M18 2.5 61 79 6,975 146 190 18,600
M20 2.5 84 109 8,851 206 267 23,604
M22 2.5 113 147 10,940 279 363 29,174
M24 - 3 145 188 12,746 354 460 33,989
M27 3 210 273 16,570 518 673 44,186
M30 - 3.5 286 371 20,216 701 911 53,911 7
M33 3.5 386 501 24,961 950 1235 66,563 7
M36 3.5 492 640 29,422 1220 1586 78,460 7
M39 - 4 639 831 35,122 1577 2049 93,661 7
M42 - 4.5 794 1033 40,363 1949 2534 107,634 7
M48 - 5 1190 1546 53,038 7 2924 3802 141,435 7
M56 - 5.5 1901 2472 73,007 7 4690 6097 194,686 7
4.6 8.8
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
TORQUE VALUES FOR BOLTS WITH AN ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND
CLASS 10.9 CLASS 12.9
T.S. = 1040 MPa T.S. = 1220 MPa
T.S. is for all dia T.S. is for all dia.
* Metric socket head screws*
Min. Torque
(ft-Ibf)
M3 - .5 1.0 1.3 676 1.1 1.5 790
M3.5 - .6 1.6 2.0 911 1.9 2.4 1,065
M4 - .7 2.3 3.0 1,182 2.8 3.6 1,381
M5 - .8 4.7 6.0 1,906 5.5 7.1 2,228
M6 - 1 8.0 10.3 2,703 9.0 11.7 3,159
M8 - 1.25 19 24 4,910 22 28 5,739
M10 - 1.5 38 49 7,771 44 57 9,082
M12 - 1.75 65 85 11,271 76 98 13,172
M14 - 2 104 135 15,411 122 158 18,011
M16 - 2 159 207 20,897 185 241 24,422
M18 2.5 223 290 25,730 260 338 30,070
M20 2.5 311 404 32,652 362 471 38,159
M22 2.5 418 543 40,358 488 635 47,165 7
M24 3 536 697 47,019 7 627 815 54,950 7
M27 3 776 1008 61,125 7 907 1179 71,435 7
M30 - 3.5 1056 1373 74,577 7 1235 1605 87,157 7
M33 3.5 1422 1849 92,079 7 1662 2161 107,611 7
M36 4 1816 2360 108,536 7 2122 2758 126,843 7
M39 4 2359 3066 129,564 7 2756 3583 151,418 7
M42 - 4.5 2930 3809 148,894 7 3425 4452 174,009 7
M48 - 5 4390 5707 195,652 7 5130 6669 228,654 7
M56 5.5 7014 9118 269,316 7 8198 10657 314,743 7
10.9
12.9
The following tables specify torque values for fasteners used

with Nord-Lock washers.
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt 8.8
Oil Graphite
Pitch Torque Clamp Torque Clamp
Washer Size Bolt Size
(mm) (ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (lb)
NL3 M3 .5 1.2 540 1.2 540
NL4 M4 .7 3.0 944 2.7 944
NL5 M5 .8 5.8 1,529 5.2 1,529
NL6 M6 1.0 10 2,181 9.1 2,181
NL8 M8 1.25 24 4,047 22 4,047
NL10 M10 1.5 47 6,295 43 6,295
NL12 M12 1.75 82 8,992 74 8,992
NL14 M14 2.0 129 12,364 117 12,364
NL16 M16 2.0 197 16,861 177 16,861
NL18 M18 2.5 276 20,682 249 20,682
NL20 M20 2.5 385 26,527 348 26,527
NL22 M22 2.5 525 32,822 474 32,822
NL24 M24 3.0 664 37,993 599 37,993
NL27 M27 3.0 968 49,683 873 49,683
NL30 M30 3.5 1,322 60,474 1,192 60,474
NL33 M33 3.5 1,779 74,861 1,600 74,861
NL36 M36 4.0 2,295 88,125 2,067 88,125
NL39 M39 4.0 2,960 105,211 2,663 105,211
NL42 M42 4.5 3,663 120,947 3,297 120,947

Oil Graphite
Washer Pitch Torque Clamp Torque Clamp
Bolt Size
Size (mm) (ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (lb)
NL3 M3 .5 1.7 719 1.5 764
NL4 M4 .7 3.9 1,259 3.5 1,326
NL5 M5 .8 7.8 2,046 6.7 2,158
NL6 M6 1.0 14 2,900 12 3,057
NL8 M8 1.25 33 5,171 29 5,620
NL10 M10 1.5 64 8,318 56 8,768
NL12 M12 1.75 110 12,140 95 12,814
NL14 M14 2.0 175 16,636 151 17,535
NL16 M16 2.0 268 22,481 230 23,830
NL18 M18 2.5 375 27,651 323 29,225
NL20 M20 2.5 524 35,070 451 37,093
NL22 M22 2.5 714 43,613 613 46,086
NL24 M24 3.0 903 50,582 776 53,505
NL27 M27 3.0 1,318 66,094 1,128 69,691
NL30 M30 3.5 1,798 80,482 1,542 84,978
NL33 M33 3.5 2,422 99,590 2,068 105,211
NL36 M36 4.0 3,125 117,350 2,673 123,870
NL39 M39 4.0 4,030 140,281 3,440 148,149
NL42 M42 4.5 4,988 160,963 4,262 170,180
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
Oil Graphite
Bolt Size
NL3 M3 .5 1.9 877 1.6 922
NL4 M4 .7 4.4 1,506 3.8 1,596
NL5 M5 .8 8.7 2,450 7.4 2,585
NL6 M6 1.0 15 3,462 13 3,664
NL8 M8 1.25 36 6,295 31 6,744
NL10 M10 1.5 72 9,892 61 10,566
NL12 M12 1.75 123 14,613 105 15,287
NL14 M14 2.0 196 20,008 167 21,132
NL16 M16 2.0 298 26,977 252 28,551
NL18 M18 2.5 419 33,272 355 35,070
NL20 M20 2.5 585 42,264 494 44,512
NL22 M22 2.5 797 52,380 670 55,303
NL24 M24 3.0 1,009 60,698 850 64,295
NL27 M27 3.0 1,470 79,133 1,235 83,629
NL30 M30 3.5 2,005 96,668 1,688 102,063
NL33 M33 3.5 2,699 119,598 2,265 126,343
NL36 M36 4.0 3,483 140,730 2,927 148,823
NL39 M39 4.0 4,490 168,157 3,763 177,599
NL42 M42 4.5 5,560 193,336 4,666 204,126
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with Stainless Steel Bolt A4

A4-70 w/ Graphite Lube A4-80 w/ Graphite Lube
Bolt Size
NL3 M3 .5 0.9 337 1.2 450
NL4 M4 .7 1.9 585 2.6 764
NL5 M5 .8 3.7 922 5.1 1,236
NL6 M6 1.0 7 1,326 9 1,754
NL8 M8 1.25 16 2,473 21 3,147
NL10 M10 1.5 32 3,822 41 5,171
NL12 M12 1.75 54 5,620 72 7,419
NL14 M14 2.0 85 7,644 114 10,116
NL16 M16 2.0 130 10,341 174 13,713
NL18 M18 2.5 183 12,589 244 16,861
NL20 M20 2.5 256 16,186 341 21,357
NL22 M22 2.5 349 20,008 465 26,527
NL24 M24 3.0 441 23,155 588 30,799
NL27 M27 3.0 643 30,124 858 40,241
NL30 M30 3.5 877 36,869 1,170 49,233
NL33 M33 3.5 1,182 45,636 1,576 60,698
NL36 M36 4.0 1,525 53,729 2,034 71,714
NL39 M39 4.0 1,968 64,071 2,624 85,652
NL42 M42 4.5 2,435 73,737 3,247 98,241
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt Grade 5
Oil Graphite
Washer Bolt Pitch Torque Clamp Torque Clamp
Size Size (TPI) (ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (lb)
NL3 #5 40 1.1 550 1.0 550
NL3.5 #6 32 1.4 630 1.3 630
NL4 #8 32 2.7 970 2.4 970
NL5 #10 24 3.9 1,200 3.5 1,200
NL1/4 20 9.1 2,200 8.3 2,200
NL8 5/16 18 18 3,600 16 3,600
NL3/8 3/8 16 30 5,400 28 5,400
NL11 7/16 14 47 7,300 42 7,300
NL1/2 13 73 9,800 66 9,800
NL14 9/16 12 104 12,600 94 12,600
NL16 5/8 11 145 15,600 131 15,600
NL3/4 10 254 23,100 230 23,100
NL22 7/8 9 408 31,900 369 31,900
NL 1 1 8 617 41,800 557 41,800
NL30 1 1/8 7 771 46,400 697 46,400
NL33 1 7 1075 58,900 969 58,900
NL36 1 3/8 6 1410 70,200 1,270 70,200
NL39 1 6 1860 85,500 1,670 85,500
NORD-LOCK Delta Protekt Washers with Zinc Plated Bolt Grade 8

Oil Graphite
(TPI) (ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (lb)
NL3 #5 40 1.5 740 1.3 780
NL3.5 #6 32 1.9 840 1.7 890
NL4 #8 32 3.5 1,300 3.1 1,400
NL5 #10 24 5.1 1,600 4.6 1,700
NL1/4 20 12 2,900 11 3,100
NL8 5/16 18 24 4,900 21 5,100
NL3/8 3/8 16 41 7,200 36 7,600
NL11 7/16 14 64 9,800 56 10,400
NL1/2 13 99 13,100 86 13,900
NL14 9/16 12 138 16,800 122 17,800
NL16 5/8 11 197 20,900 171 22,100
NL3/4 10 346 30,900 299 32,700
NL22 7/8 9 556 42,700 479 45,100
NL 1 1 8 840 56,000 724 59,200
NL30 1 1/8 7 1,190 70,600 1,030 74,500
NL33 1 7 1,660 89,600 1,430 94,600
NL36 1 3/8 6 2,180 107,000 1,880 113,000
NL39 1 6 2,870 130,000 2,470 137,000
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with ASTM A574 Bolt
Oil Graphite
(TPI) (ft-lbf) (lb) (ft-lbf) (lb)
NL3 #5 40 1.7 870 1.6 910
NL3.5 #6 32 2.2 990 2.0 1,050
NL4 #8 32 3.8 1,500 3.7 1,600
NL5 #10 24 5.8 1,900 5.5 2,000
NL1/4 20 13 3,400 12 3,700
NL8 5/16 18 26 5,700 23 6,000
NL3/8 3/8 16 45 8,400 39 8,900
NL11 7/16 14 70 11,500 60 12,200
NL1/2 13 109 15,400 93 16,300
NL14 9/16 12 148 19,800 141 20,900
NL16 5/8 11 216 24,600 184 26,000
NL3/4 10 378 36,400 321 38,400
NL22 7/8 9 607 50,200 514 53,000
NL 1 1 8 916 65,900 776 69,600
NL30 1 1/8 7 1,300 83,000 1100 87,700
NL33 1 7 1,810 105,000 1530 111,000
NL36 1 3/8 6 2,380 126,000 2020 133,000
NL39 1 6 3,140 153,000 2640 161,000
NORD-LOCK Stainless Steel with ASTM F593 Bolt

Oil Graphite
(TPI) (ftlb) (lb) (ftlb) (lb)
NL3 #5 40 - - - -
NL3.5 #6 32 - - - -
NL4 #8 32 - - - -
NL5 #10 24 - - - -
NL1/4 20 5.2 1,300 5.2 1,300
NL8 5/16 18 10.3 2,200 10.3 2,200
NL3/8 3/8 16 18 3,300 18 3,300
NL11 7/16 14 28 4,500 28 4,500
NL1/2 13 43 6,000 43 6,000
NL14 9/16 12 61 7,700 61 7,700
NL16 5/8 11 85 9,500 85 9,500
NL3/4 10 104 9,800 104 9,800
NL22 7/8 9 166 13,500 166 13,500
NL 1 1 8 251 17,700 251 17,700
NL30 1 1/8 7 356 22,300 356 22,300
NL33 1 7 497 28,300 497 28,300
NL36 1 3/8 6 653 33,800 653 33,800
NL39 1 6 859 41,100 859 41,100
SIZE DWG NO REV
A DS00008 F
DCF0045 (REV B)
General Lubrication Bulletin
General Lubrication Bulletin for

CE Drilling Equipment
ADDITIONAL CODE SDRL CODE TOTAL PGS This document contains proprietary and confidential information
which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. National Oilwell Varco
Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the RIG SOLUTIONS
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to 11000 Corporate Centre Drive
CLIENT PO NUMBER NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was Houston, TX 77041
loaned. This document and the information contained and
represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER National Oilwell Varco
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV

CE-538E 06
www.nov.com
Document number CE-538E
Revision 06
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
06 14.02.2012 Engineering Requested Change TMH GDH GDH

05 07.12.2011 Spelling Corrected TMH
04 06.12.2011 Spelling Corrected TMH
03 24.03.2005 Updated Logo BKF
02 28.02.2005 Updated to new template PG
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

02 Updated to electronic format from pdf to ms word in new template
03 Updated Logo
04 Spelling changed from Overrruning to Overruning.
05 Spelling changed from Overrruning to Overrunning.
06 Removed Recommended Lubrication Product Chart from the document.
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINENTAL EMSCO

PRODUCTS DRILLING EQUIPMENT .............................................................................. 4
1.1 Crown and Traveling Blocks: .................................................................................. 4
1.2 Swivels: .................................................................................................................. 4
1.3 Rotary Machines and Unitized Rotary Chain Coupling: .......................................... 4
1.4 GB & GBH CATHEADS: ......................................................................................... 5
1.5 Drawworks, Compound Transmissions, Unitized Rotary Transmissions,
ECR Units & Pump Drives: ..................................................................................... 5
1.6 Electrohoist II Gear Box .......................................................................................... 5
1.7 Electrohoist II, IV & V Gear Box .............................................................................. 5
1.8 Airline Lubricators: .................................................................................................. 5
1.9 Duplex & Triplex MUD & Slurry Pumps: ................................................................. 5
1.10 Overrunning Clutch: ................................................................................................ 6
1.11 Caution: .................................................................................................................. 6
2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TRIPLEX MUD PUMP TRANSMISSION
LUBE OIL ......................................................................................................................... 6
3 GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN ............................................................................ 7
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 4
1 GENERAL LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINENTAL EMSCO PRODUCTS

DRILLING EQUIPMENT
Using the right kind of oil or grease on a regular basis extends the service life of machinery.
Where and how to lubricate is described in each Maintenance Manual for the particular
piece of equipment.
The following information lists the recommended type of lubricant to use. The equipment
user must insure that the lubricant selected meets or exceeds the specifications provided.
1.1 Crown and Traveling Blocks:
1.1.1 Grease - Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.

Ambient temperatures 0F to 125F (-18C to 52C) NLGI #2
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
1.2 Swivels:
1.2.1 Main reservoir Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
Ambient temperatures 0F to 155F (-18C to 68C) AGMA #6EP
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) AGMA #4EP
1.2.2 Wash pipe packing, oil seals and bail pins Use a multipurpose lithium bas grease.
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
1.3 Rotary Machines and Unitized Rotary Chain Coupling:
1.3.1 Main Reservoir Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
1.3.2 Pinion Cartridge Use a multipurpose lithium base grease

-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 5
1.4 GB & GBH CATHEADS:

Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.
-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
1.5 Drawworks, Compound Transmissions, Unitized Rotary Transmissions, ECR Units &
Pump Drives:
Grease lubricated bearings, drum brake centralized lubrication system, and all
miscellaneous grease fittings Use a multipurpose lithium base grease.

-20F to 40F (-29C to 4C) NLGI #0
Motor couplings require a multipurpose lithium base NLGI #1 grease.

Electrohoist III, IV & V gear couplings require Texaco Crater Compound #0 or equivalent.
Oil lubricated bearings and roller chains Use a non-detergent machine oil as follows;
Ambient temperatures 80F to 125F (27C to 52C) SAE 40
32F to 100F (0C to 38C) SAE 30
0F to 40F (-18C to 4C) SAE 20
1.6 Electrohoist II Gear Box

Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
1.7 Electrohoist II, IV & V Gear Box

Use an extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming, mineral base gear lubricant.
Ambient temperatures Below 40F* to 80F (4C to 26C) AGMA #3EP
80F to 120F (27C to 49C) AGMA #6EP
*Heaters are required to bring oil to 40F (4C) for starting.
1.8 Airline Lubricators:

Use SAE 10 Wt. Motor Oil.
1.9 Duplex & Triplex MUD & Slurry Pumps:

Use a extreme pressure, non-corrosive, anti-foaming gear lubricant.
Note: See Section 2 for initial filling of triplex pumps.
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 6
1.10 Overrunning Clutch:

Use SAE 50 Wt. Non-detergent machine oil.
Equipment not manufactured by National Oilwell should be lubricated as specified by the
manufacturer.
1.11 Caution:
Do not mix greases with different bases. Always clean reservoirs thoroughly when
changing to grease with a different base.
2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS FOR TRIPLEX MUD PUMP TRANSMISSION

LUBE OIL
National Oilwell has recently made a change in the design and material of the gears used
in our triplex mud pump line. The new gears will be made from a harder material which will
ultimately provide better performance and longer life but they do require some special
treatment during the break-in period. Effective immediately National Oilwell will begin using
specially designed gear oil, for the test runs in our manufacturing facilities, which is highly
saturated with liquid soluble molybdenum disulfide, and other extreme pressure and
corrosion resistant additives.
This oil will help to polish the gear tooth surfaces to prevent initial pitting which is common
on mud pump gears. This is especially important on the new harder gears as they are
more susceptible to cold welding and scoring during the break-in period. The product will
also provide rust prevention during storage periods. It is strongly recommended that the
End User also use this product for at least the initial filling of the pumps. At the first oil
change it would be at the users discretion whether to continue its use or change to another
AGMA EP gear oil that meets the general specifications.
A manufacturer of the above product is made by: Schaeffer Oil & Grease Mfg. C.O.
Phone (800) 325-9962
Fax (314) 865-4107
Website: www.schaefferoil.com
If the operator chooses not to use this oil for the initial filling, then a 5% by volume of a
good Moly product, such as Dow Corning M Gear Guard, should be added to the approved
AGMA EP gear oil.
Implementation of the above recommendations will be well worth the extra cost of the
products by extending the life of the equipment and power savings due to reduction of
friction.
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 7
3 GENERAL LUBRICATION BULLETIN
Oil Capacities for Continental Emsco Equipment
Drawworks
C-1 Type II 105 U.S. Gal. 400 Liters
C-1 Type III 105 U.S. Gal. 400 Liters
C-3 Type I 60 U.S. Gal, 230 Liters
D-1 78 U.S. Gal. 296 Liters
EH-II 41 U.S. Gal. 155 Liters
EH-III, IV & V See Operation & Maintenance Manual
Type AU= Catworks 45 U.S. Gal. 170 Liters
W/Right Angle Drive 50 U.S. Gal. 190 Liters
Compounds
CT-5 130 U.S. Gal. 493 Liters
D-221 W/Separate Lube System 80 U.S. Gal. 303 Liters
D-232 W/Separate Lube System 80 U.S. Gal. 303 Liters
F-Series Triplex Pump
F-350 40 U.S. Gal. 152 Liters
F, FA, FB & FC-1300 100 U.S. Gal. 380 Liters
F, FA, FB & FC-1600 100 U.S. Gal. 380 Liters
FC-2200 120 U.S. Gal. 454 Liters
Unitized Pump Drive for
Electric Motor, Per Guard 20 U.S. Gal 76 Liters
Type F Unitized Pump Chain Drive
F-500 30 U.S. Gal 15 Liters
www.nov.com
Revision 06
Page 8
Duplex Pumps
DB-550 58 U.S. Gal. 220 Liters
DC-700 65 U.S. Gal. 246 Liters
Rotaries
T-1750 (S/N 181 Only) 6 U.S. Gal. 23 Liters
T-1750 (S/N 182-253) 12 U.S. Gal. 46 Liters
T-1750 (S/N 254-268) 8 U.S. Gal. 31 Liters
T-1750 (S/N 269 & up) 10 U.S. Gal. 38 Liters
T-2050 (S/N 31 Only) 5 U.S. Gal. 19 Liters
T-2750 (S/N 89-94) 9 U.S. Gal. 34 Liters
T-2750 (S/N 95-228) 13 U.S. Gal. 50 Liters
T-3750 15 U.S. Gal. 57 Liters
Rotary Transmissions
RT-3A Vertical 21 U.S. Gal. 80 Liters
RT-3A Horizontal 28 U.S. Gal. 106 Liters
Chain Coupling 1 U.S. Gal. 4 Liters
Swivels
LB-140 3-3/4 U.S. Gal. 14 Liters
LA, LB-200 4-3/4 U.S. Gal. 18 Liters
LA, LB-300 6-3/4 U.S. Gal 26 Liters
LA, LB-400 10 U.S. Gal 38 Liters
LB-500 15 U.S. Gal 57 Liters
L, LB & LC-650 19-1/2 U.S. Gal 74 Liters
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Recommended Spare Parts FD-1600 D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001 01
www.nov.com
Recommended Spare Parts
FD-1600
RIG/PLANT
REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

This document contains proprietary and confidential information
which is the property of National Oilwell Varco, L.P., its affiliates or
loaned for limited purposes only and remains the property of NOV. National Oilwell Varco
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE Reproduction, in whole or in part, or use of this design or
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the RIG SOLUTIONS
express written consent of NOV. This document is to be returned to 12950 West Little York
CLIENT PO NUMBER NOV upon request or upon completion of the use for which it was Houston, TX 77041
loaned. This document and the information contained and
represented herein is the copyrighted property of NOV.
Client Document Number DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001 01
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Document number D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001
Revision 01
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 14.05.2008 First Issue BTS RLP GDH

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First issue
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 3
1 SPARE PARTS LIST

This document provides a list of recommended spares. The list is presented by assemblies, and the
recommended spare pages are arranged in numerical order.
2 DEFINITIONS
This section provides definitions for accessibility of spare parts and recommendations of spare parts.
2.1 Spare Parts Accessibility
Spares Definition
Category
Area 1 Equipment operating within easy access to a National Oilwell Varco store or customers own
regional warehouse and expendable parts anticipated for operation of one year.
Area 2 Equipment operating in remote areas.
Group I Spares for one unit per year.
Group II Spares to support up to two units operating in the area per year.
2.2 Recommendations
Operations Recommendations
Equipment in 1 Lot of Spares for each unit.
accessible
Area 1
Equipment in 1 Lot of Group I Spares for each unit per year,
accessible OR
Area 2
1 Lot of Group II Spares for approximately each 2 units
2-3 years Multiply Class A spares by 2.
operations
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 4
This page intentionally left blank.
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 5
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

This document provides a list of recommended spare parts for the FD-1600 mud pump. The parts
are grouped to the sub-assemblies in which they are used.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Accessibility Area
Area
Part No. Description Area 2
1
Group Group
I 2
Power End Complete
Parts Drawing 6316-1001-03
0-6316-0028-00 Extension, Crosshead 1 3 3
0-6316-0047-00 Gasket, Crosshead Door 6 6
0-6397-0546-00 Spring, Diaphragm S.B. Lock 3 3
0-7501-1269-00 1-8 X 2 Soc Hd C.S. 12 12
0-7502-0103-00 Gasket, Inspection Door 1 2 8
0-7602-1610-22 O-Ring (Dia. Stf. Box) 3 9
0-7602-1600-39 O-Ring (Dia. Stf. Box) 9 27
0-7602-2131-47 Seal, Single Lip Oil 3 18 54
0-7602-2132-76 Seal, Double Lip Oil 3 18 54
0-7602-0212-67 Bearing, F-1600 Pinion 2 4
0-7502-0840-00 Gasket, Carrier 2 8
0-7502-0841-00 Gasket, Carrier 2 8
0-7602-2131-18 Seal, Oil 1 2 6
0-7602-0212-68 Bearing, F-1600 Eccentric 3 6
0-7602-0201-37 Bearing, F-1600 Main 2 4
0-6316-0127-00 Gasket, Plate 1 4
0-7602-1610-22 O-Ring (Crosshead) 3 9
0-6316-0081-00 Gasket, Plate 3 12
0-6301-0038-00 Bearing, Crosshead F-1600 3 6
7817600438 O-Ring (Rubber) 3 9
0-6397-0548-00 Spring, Stuffing Box 3 9
0-6397-0546-00 Spring, Lock 3 9
0-7602-1070-03 Filter, Oil 1 2
0-7502-0581-00 Gasket, Cover 4 16
0-7602-1071-13 Element, Filter 1 1 2
0-7602-5940-00 Gasket, Strip 19 ft. 76 ft.
0-6316-0049-00 Gasket, Cover F-1600 Main Bearing 2 8
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 6
7815926 Pump, 2S B&S Oil 1 2
Fluid End Complete

Parts Drawing 6316-1002-01
0-6316-0039-90 Cover, Valve Pot 1 3
0-6316-0092-00 Seal, Valve Pot Cover 3 24 72
0-6316-0093-00 Disc, Baffle 3 9
0-6316-0096-00 Bushing, Lower Valve Guide 9 27
0-6316-0107-11 Clamp, Piston Rod 1 3 9
0-6316-0164-00 Cover, Liner End 3 9
0-6316-0354-00 Guide, Lower Valve w/ Bushing 3 6
1551703 Rod, Piston 1 6 12
0-6316-0360-00 Bolt, Lock (Valve Guide) 3 6 12
0-6316-0362-90 Head, Cylinder 1 3
0-6316-0363-00 Ring, Alignment 1 3
0-6316-0364-90 Plug, Cylinder Head 1 3
0-6316-0365-00 Plate, Wear 3 9
0-6316-0366-00 Ring, Liner Lock Thread 1 3
0-6316-0367-20 Lock, Liner 1 3
0-6316-0369-00 Seal, Cylinder Head 6 48 144
0-6316-0373-00 Seal, Liner & Wear Plate 6 72 216
0-6397-0293-01 Strainer 3 9
0-6397-0575-00 Guide, Upper Valve 12 36
0-6397-0603-00 Retainer, Upper Valve Guide 6 18
0-7501-0051-00 Screw, Valve Guide Retainer 24 72
0-7503-0230-49 Assembly, Hose 3 9 27
0-7601-2588-50 Nipple, Pipe 3 9
0-7602-1600-25 O-Ring (Disc Manifold) 3 6 12
0-7602-1600-40 O-Ring (Strainer Cap) 3 9 27
0-7602-1600-44 O-Ring (Liner Lock) 3 6 18
0-7602-1600-52 O-Ring (Suction Flange) 6 18
0-7602-1600-61 O-Ring (Suction Manifold) 6 18
6908033 Seal, R-39 Ring Joint 1 3 9
6908040 Seal, R-44 Ring Joint 1 3 9
Fluid End Expendables

05499400 Liner, Mission 4 6 24 96
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 7
012180170 Piston, Mission 4 6 24 96

05499450 Liner, Mission 4 6 24 96
012180196 Piston, Mission 4 6 24 96
05499500* Liner, Mission 5 6 24 96
012180253 Piston, Mission 5 6 24 96
05499550* Liner, Mission 5 6 24 96
012180337 Piston, Mission 5 6 24 96
05499600* Liner, Mission 6 6 24 96
012180394 Piston, Mission 6 6 24 96
05499650* Liner, Mission 6 6 24 96
012180535 Piston, Mission 6 6 24 96
05499700* Liner, Mission 7 6 24 96
012180618 Piston, Mission 7 6 24 96
* For HP style liner, add HP to end of part no.
07211001 Gasket, Liner (all sizes) 6 24 96
060155041 Valve, Mission 6 24 96
061101507 Seat, Mission Valve 6 24 96
055413397 Spring, Mission Valve 6 24 96
015180102 Rubbers, Pair 4 6 18 72
015180144 Rubbers, Pair 4 6 18 72
015180185 Rubbers, Pair 5 6 18 72
015180227 Rubbers, Pair 5 6 18 72
015180268 Rubbers, Pair 6 6 18 72
015180300 Rubbers, Pair 6 6 18 72
015180342 Rubbers, Pair 7 6 18 72
6308241 Nut, Piston 3 16 64
Fluid End Tools

0-7601-0110-54 Chaser, 1-1/4-8 Tap & Die Thread 1
0-7601-0110-55 Chaser, 1-1/2-8 Tap & Die Thread 1
H-67376-L Tap, 1-1/4-12-2B Special Taper 1
0-7110-0115-00 Tap, 1-1/2-12-2B Special Taper 1
Puller, Hydraulic Seat w/ Puller Head to fit API #7
0-7602-1800-15 seats (Specify Manufacturer of Seats) 1*
0-7602-1810-26 Pump, Hand Air 1*
0-7602-1810-27 Gauge, Tire Pressure 5-50 PSI 1*
These items should be available for
* commissioning
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 8
Power End Tools

Wrench, Square Drive Torque (600 ft.-lb.
0-7602-3010-74 capacity) 1
Machine, HY-25 SL 2-1/2 Square Drive
0-7602-3010-67 Hydraulic Torque 1
0-7602-3010-68 Pump, Air/Hydraulic 10,000 PSI Capacity 1
0-7602-3010-58 Socket, 3-5/8 Impact w/ 2-1/2 Square Drive 1
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
Revision 01
Page 9
This page intentionally left blank.
www.nov.com
D290-6316-1003-01-SPL-001/01
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1
Vol. Chapter/ Title

Section
1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams

Section Not Applicable
1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument

www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Gen Arr, FD-1600 RMBD Single MTR CM632UUT 10830401-GAD-DOS 01
Order Cpt, FD-1600 RMBD PT Citra Tubindo 10830401-ASM-DOS 01
General Assembly FD-1600 Pump 6316-1000-03-DOS M
Fluid End Assembly FD-1600 Triplex Pump 6316-1002-01-DOS A
Discharge Accessory Manifold Assembly 6317-0125-10-DOS B
Power End Complete (DBLHelix) FD-1600 6316-1001-03-DOS B
Pinion Shaft Assy (DBL Helix) FB-1600 6316-0098-20-DOS A
Crankshaft Assembly, Cast FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump 6316-1001-02-DOS C
Crosshead Assembly F-1600 Series Pump 6316-0183-00-DOS N
Lubrication Assembly Power End (Double Helix) 6316-0227-10-DOS C
External Lube System, 460V Nema, FD-1600 RMBD SGL 10702595-DOS 01
Ext. Lube Oil Pump Assembly with Magnetic & Coalescing 1262028-DOS E
Filters
Liner Spray System FD-1600 w/ Integrated Tank 6316-0275-14-DOS 03
Liner Spray Pump Assembly less Nema Motor 1290448-DOS B
Stroke Counter Installation FD-1600 Pump 6911-2730-80-DOS C
SD-8 Suction Desurger Assembly Triplex Mud Pumps 6922-0062-00-DOS H
Fluid End Expendable Servicing Crane (Less Hoist) 6316-0020-20-DOS D
Tool List for F-1600 Series Triplex Mud Pumps 6316-0250-02-DOS A
Drive Assy, FD-1600 RMBD Single MTR CM632UUT w/ 10706968-DOS 02

LRG Hub
Driveshaft Assy, F/ Large Motor Hub, RMBD Single MTR 10696042-DOS 01
www.nov.com
M
DISCHARGE ACCESSORY
MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY
1 OF 1
6317-0125-10-DOS B
-DOS
-DOS
335
EXT. LUBE OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
WITH MAGNETIC & COALESCING FILTERS
1 1
1262028-DOS E
LINER SPRAY PUMP ASSEMBLY
240
LESS NEMA MOTOR
1 1
1290448-DOS B
-DOS
Document number: 6316-0250-02-DOS
Revision: A
TOOL LIST
FOR F-1600 SERIES TRIPLEX MUD PUMPS
REQD PART NO. DESCRIPTION

6316-0250-02 TOOL LIST FOR F-1600 SERIES PUMPS
(CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING)
1 7602-3010-59 SNAP ON SOCKET
(FOR MAIN BEARING HOUSING BOLTS)
1 6397-0691-00 BAR, VALVE COVER
1 7602-3010-09 SOCKET (FOR 1-1/2 HVY. HEX NUTS)
(CYLINDER THRD. RING & BLOCK TO FRAME)
1 7602-3010-22 SOCKET (FOR 1-1/4 HVY. HEX NUTS)
(DISCHARGE MANIFOLD)
1 7602-3010-05 BAR, SLIDING
1 7602-3010-48 PLUG, SLIDING
1 7602-3010-07 8 EXTENSION
1 6316-0277-00 WRENCH, CYLINDER HEAD
1 7602-3010-63 ADAPTER
1 7602-3010-61 SOCKET (FOR 1 STD. HEX NUT)
(LINER THREAD RING)
1 7602-3010-65 WRENCH, 12 POINT BOX
(FOR VALVE GUIDE LOCK BOLT)
1 6316-0392-00 EXTENSION, WRENCH
(FOR PART NO. 7602-3010-65)
www.nov.com
4 3 2 1
REV DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE MADE CHKD DATE APPD
D D
KEY (NOT INCLUDED)
SHAFT DRIVE BUSHING REF: 10626952-001
DRIVE SHEAVE
(NOT INCLUDED)
MMW22230-FIXED
WEAR SLEEVE
MMW22230-FLOAT
C C
7-1/8"
REF:
GEAR COUPLING 1060G (6.0") WEAR SLEEVE 24-3/8"
B PART NO. 10706699-001 B
28-1/8"
WEAR SLEEVE
31-7/8"
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. THIS DRAWING REPRESENTS AN ASSEMBLY OF KITTED PARTS FURNISHED BY THE VENDOR.

THIS ASSEMBLY CONSISTS OF ALL THE SAME COMPONENTS AS
PART NO. 10639419-001 (FOR SMALL MOTOR HUB)
WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE GEAR COUPLING.
3. IDENTIFY KIT WITH PART NO. "10696042-001" AND REVISION.
4. ALL PARTS TO HAVE LONG TERM STORAGE PROTECTION. PRODUCT: TRIPLEX PUMPS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
TOLERANCES ARE:
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO,
L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR SUBSIDIARIES (ALL COLLECTIVELY
END ITEM: X.X .1 ANGLES .50 DEG REFERRED TO HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR
LIMITED PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF
A 5. SUGGESTED VENDOR:
NATIONAL PETROLEUM OILFIELD PRODUCTS
NEXT ASSY:
X.XX .03
X.XXX .010
FRACTIONS 1/16
BREAK EDGES .02/.03
NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR USE OF
THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO
TITLE: A
10650 WEST LITTLE YORK ROAD
SIMILAR TO: 10639419-001 DO NOT SCALE DRAWING
OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN
CONSENT OF NOV. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED
TO NOV UPON REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE
DRIVESHAFT ASSY, F/ LARGE
WT LBS: 2450 CURRENT INITIAL
HOUSTON, TX 77041 FINISH DRAWN R. RILEY
USE FOR WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN
IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
MOTOR HUB, RMBD SINGLE MTR
C
PH: 713-466-4040 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED CHECKED R.L. PAZ SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHT:
TOL < .06 TOL > .06 RIG SOLUTIONS 1:4 1 OF 1
APPVD R.L. PAZ MECHANICAL ENGINEERING DWG NO. REV:
250 1000
DATE 07-DEC-12 10696042-DOS 01
DRAWN IN SW
4 3 2 1 RS-MECH_C-TPL-001
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams

www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument

www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
Product Datasheet FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump FD-1600-DAS-001 01
www.nov.com
Product Datasheet
FD-1600
Triplex Mud Pump

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump
This document contains proprietary and confidential information National-Oilwell, L.P.
which belongs to National-Oilwell, L.P.; it is loaned for limited 12950 West Little York
REMARKS purposes only and remains the property of National-Oilwell, L.P.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or Houston, TX 77041
MAIN TAG NUMBER DISCIPLINE distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the USA
express written consent of National-Oilwell, L.P. This document is Phone 713-937-5000
to be returned to National-Oilwell, L.P. upon request and in any
CLIENT PO NUMBER event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. Fax 713-937-5050
National-Oilwell, L.P.
CLIENT DOCUMENT NUMBER DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
Client Document Number FD-1600-DAS-001 01
www.nov.com
Document number FD-1600-DAS-001
Revision 01
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 27.02.2006 Issued for implementation SB PG

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 First issue
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 PERFORMANCE DATA ................................................................................................... 4

2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................... 5
2.1 General Dimensions ............................................................................................... 5
2.2 Specifications for the FD-1600 ............................................................................... 6
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 4
1 PERFORMANCE DATA
7 6 6 6 5 5
Liner size, inches (mm)
(178) (171) (165) (152) (140) (127)
Max. Discharge Pressure, psi 3423 3688 3981 4665 5000 5000
(kg/cm2) (240) (259) (280) (328) (352) (352)
Pump Speed, Input HP, GPM** GPM** GPM** GPM** GPM** GPM**
spm HP (kW) (LPM**) (LPM**) (LPM**) (LPM**) (LPM**) (LPM**)
1600* 719 669 620 444 529 367
120*
(1193*) (2721) (2532) (2347) (1681) (2002) (1389)
1467 659 613 568 407 485 337
110
(1094) (2494) (2320) (2150) (1540) (1836) (1275)
1333 599 557 517 370 441 306
100
(994) (2267) (2108) (1957) (1400) (1669) (1158)
1200 539 502 465 333 397 275
90
(895) (2040) (1900) (1760) (1260) (1503) (1041)
1067 479 446 413 296 353 245
80
(796) (1813) (1688) (1563) (1120) (1336) (927)
933 419 390 362 258 309 214
70
(696) (1586) (1476) (1370) (977) (1170) (810)
800 359 334 310 222 264 183
60
(597) (1359) (1264) (1173) (840) (999) (693)
5.99 5.57 5.16 4.41 3.70 3.06
Volume/Stroke, gal. (Liters)
(22.67) (21.08) (19.53) (16.69) (14.00) (11.58)
*Rated maximum input horsepower and speed
**Based on 90% Mechanical and 100% Volumetric Efficiency
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 5
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.1 General Dimensions
Figure 1: FD-1600 Triplex Pumps (7'' x 12'')
Dimension, ft in (mm)
A 6 10 (2,083)
B 5 5 (1,670)
C 6 1 (1,864)
D 7 4 (2,245)
E 2 6 (768)
F 1 5 1116 (449)
G 4 11 (1,518)
H 1 9 (552)
I 1 1 (350)
J 1 0 (311)
K 16 0 (4,877)
L 8 0 (2,438)
M 3 2 916 (979)
N 3 6 (1,076)
P 3 11 (1,207)
R 3 (921)
www.nov.com
Revision 01
Page 6
2.2 Specifications for the FD-1600
General Specifications
Type 3 - cylinder Single-Action Piston
Pressure with 7 Liner, psi (kg/cm2) 3,423 (240)
Pressure with 5 Liner, psi (kg/cm2) 5,000 (352)
Volume with 7 Liner @ 120 SPM, gpm (Liters/min) 719 (2,721)
Volume with 5 Liner @ 120 SPM, gpm (Liters/min) 444 (1,680)
Nominal HP rating @ 120 SPM, HP (KW) 1600 (1,193)
Type Gear Double Helical
Gear Ratio 4.31:1
Lubrication Pressure and splash to all moving parts
Valve Pots Valve-over-valve, API # 7
Valve Pot Cover Screw Type
Cylinder Head Screw Type
Liner Lock Metal-to-Metal
Crossheard Guide Replaceable
Bearings
Main Shaft Bearings Spherical
Eccentric Bearings Straight Roller
Crosshead bearings Roller, double row,
Pinion Bearings Straight roller
Dimensions and Weight
Size, Bore and Stroke, in (mm) 7 x 12 (178 x 304.8)
Pinion Shaft Size and Keyway, in (mm) 8.5 (216) O.D.- 2 x 1 (51 x 25) keyway
Discharge outlet, in psi (mm kg/cm2) 5 (127 mm) 5000 psi (352 kg/cm2) API Flange
Suction inlet, in (mm) 12 (305) Flange, Female pipe thread
Approx. Weight, Less fluid end accessories, lbs (kg) 52,478 (23,804)
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Revision: 01
Page: 1

Section
1 4 Vendor Documentation
Instruction and Service Manual Model CM632UUT 10876548-201-MAN 01
Installation, Care and Operating Manual LS-National 107.132.00 03

Oilwell Pulsation Dampener Type 107.132.00 SM
Operation, and Maintenance Manual Reset Relief Valve M-34000 C

Titan Class Type C
Type F Flanged Pressure Gauge - -
www.nov.com
Instruction and Service
Manual
Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Induction Motor Powered by a Variable
Frequency Drive
Model No. CM632UUT-150E

Part No. 10876548-201
Model No. CM632UUT-150F

Part No. 10876549-201

Model CM632UUT Induction Motor
which belongs to National Oilwell Varco; it is loaned for limited 500 Industrial Blvd.
Reproduction, in whole or in part; or use of this design or Sugar Land, TX 77478-2898
distribution of this information to others is not permitted without the United States
express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Phone: +1 (281) 240-6111
event upon completion of the use for which it was loaned. Fax +1 (281) 274-0426
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
10876548-201-MAN 01
www.nov.com
Document
number
10876548-201-MAN
Revision 01
Page i
REVISION HISTORY
01 19.06.2014 Initial Release J.B. N.J. B.M.

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com
Document
number 10876548 -201-MAN
Revision 01
Page ii
CM SERIES MANUAL LIST
Manual Title Manual Number

Part 1
Instruction and Service Manual
CM SERIES
Frequency Drive
Model CM632UUT 210-CM632UUT
Part 2
Drawing and Data Package 10876548-201-DWG
CM SERIES
Frequency Drive
www.nov.com
PART 1
INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR
INSTRUCTION AND SERVICE
MANUAL
Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Frequency Drive
Manual Cannot Change without

Prior Approval of Notified Body

express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Phone: +1 (281) 240 6111
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
210-CM632UUT 05
www.nov.com
Document number 210-CM632UUT
Revision 05
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
05 23.08.2012 Updated the Declaration of Conformity S.L.M. N.J. B.M.

04 06.07.2012 Update the Declaration of Conformity S.L.M. N.J. B.M.
03 16.09.2010 Corrections Made S.L.M. N.J. B.M.
02 04.08.2010 Include Hazardous Location S.L.M. N.J. B.M.
01 26.05.2010 Initial Release S.L.M. N.J. B.M.
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
02 Include Hazardous Location For ATEX Requirements
03 Corrections Made
04 Update the Declaration of Conformity and the Motor & ATEX Nameplate. Add Revision Log.
Changed Manual Format.
05 Updated the Notifying and Notified Body on the Declaration of Conformity on pg 53.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION ............................................................................. 5
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 5
1.2 Safety Information and Warnings ............................................................................ 5
1.3 General Description ................................................................................................ 9
1.4 Motor Construction ................................................................................................ 11
2 INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 15
2.1 Receiving .............................................................................................................. 15
2.2 Unpacking and Storage ......................................................................................... 15
2.3 Inspection .............................................................................................................. 16
2.4 Location ................................................................................................................ 17
2.5 Foundation ............................................................................................................ 17
2.6 Alignment .............................................................................................................. 17
3 START-UP PROCEDURE AND OPERATION ................................................................ 24
3.1 Pre-Operation Equipment Check .......................................................................... 24
3.2 Power Connections ............................................................................................... 25
3.3 Start-Up Procedure (Uncoupled) ........................................................................... 28
3.4 Start-Up Procedure (Coupled)............................................................................... 28
3.5 Operating Information ........................................................................................... 29
4 MAINTENANCE .............................................................................................................. 30
4.1 Inspection Procedure ............................................................................................ 30
4.2 Preventive Maintenance ........................................................................................ 32
4.3 Preventive Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................ 32
4.4 Cleaning the Motor ................................................................................................ 33
4.5 Drying Procedure .................................................................................................. 34
4.6 Methods of Drying ................................................................................................. 35
4.7 Maintain Record .................................................................................................... 35
4.8 Bearing Lubrication ............................................................................................... 35
4.9 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 39
5 VARIABLE REQUENCY OPERATION ........................................................................... 42
5.1 Motor Capability Descriptions General ............................................................... 42
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 4
5.2 Drive Parameters .................................................................................................. 44

5.3 Service Condition .................................................................................................. 46
6 HAZARDOUS LOCATION APPLICATION ..................................................................... 49
6.1 Construction .......................................................................................................... 50
6.2 Standards .............................................................................................................. 51
6.3 Certification and Declaration of Conformity ........................................................... 52
6.4 Nameplate Marking Information ......................................................................... 54
6.5 System Protection ................................................................................................. 64
6.6 Variable Frequency Operation Considerations...................................................... 66
7 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................... 67
7.1 Motor Technical Description .................................................................................. 67
7.2 Spare Parts List..................................................................................................... 71
www.nov.com
SECTION 1
Revision 05
Page 5
1 INTRODUCTION AND DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction
This manual contains instructions for installing, operating, maintaining and trouble
shooting of the various induction motors built by National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land,
Texas. This section of the manual is general in scope and designed to be used with
supplementary data and attachments, which provides information that applies to a
specific model or series of motors.
1.2 Safety Information and Warnings
1.2.1 Safety Procedure
WARNING!
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE CAN CAUSE SEVERE INJURY AND/OR DEATH.
TURN OFF AND LOCK OUT POWER AT MAJOR ELECTRICAL PANEL
Dangerous voltages are present in the motor and peripheral components which can
cause serious injury, electrocution, and equipment damage. To avoid serious injury
and/or equipment damage before any other acts requiring physical contact with the
electrical or mechanical working components of this equipment are performed all
equipment must be de-energized, disconnected and isolated to prevent accidental
contact with live or rotating parts. More than one source of power may be applied to the
motor.
The successful and safe operation of motors is dependent upon proper handling,
installation, operation, and maintenance. Failure to follow certain fundamental
installation and maintenance requirements may lead to personal injury, failure or loss of
the machine, as well as damage to other property.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 6
CAUTION!
MECHANICAL RISKS: Entanglement, Drawing-in, Friction, and abrasion
of upper limbs or entanglement of clothes exist by the shaft: Motors are
to be incorporated within a system. The final installer of the system
must guard the shaft extension in accordance with the requirements of
the machinery directive.
Only qualified personnel should be involved in the inspection, maintenance, and repair
procedure. All plant safety procedures must be observed.
A qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation
of the equipment, and the hazards involved. In addition, they have the following
qualifications.
a. Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground, and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
b. Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as rubber
gloves, hard hat, safety glasses or face shields, flash clothing, etc., in
accordance with established safety practices.
c. Is trained in rendering first aid.
Motor should be installed and grounded per local and national codes to reduce
the potential hazard of shock from incidental contact. Insure motor is properly
grounded before energized.
1.2.2 Warning Labels

The following WARNING LABELS appear on the motor. The meaning of each label is
further clarified to provide additional understanding and how it relates to the safe
operation of the motor.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 7
Electrocution/Electrical Shock: The warning label shown below in Figure 1 is the

universal symbol for hazardous voltage and indicates a risk of electrical shock or burn.
The system should be turned off and locked out before servicing.
Figure 1 - Electrical Shock Safety Label
High Voltage: The warning label shown below in Figure 2 is used to alert the user of
the high voltage running in the machine. The system should be turned off and locked
out before servicing.
Figure 2 - High Voltage
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 8
1.2.3 Safe Lifting and Handling Information appears on the Outline Drawing
contained in this Instruction Manual. Consult the weight of the motor and locations and
method to lift the motor. Confirm the lifting apparatus are suitable for the motor weight
shown.
1.2.4 Amperes for Sizing the Power Supply Cable appears on the Outline Drawing
and Data Sheets contained in the Drawing and Data Package. The size and insulation
requirement of the supply cabling (feeding the motor) is dependent on the location and
application of the motor. All supply cables feeding the motor shall be installed and
grounded in accordance with Local, National or Agency codes governing the
application.
1.2.5 Conditions for Motors Supplied to the E.U.

1. The End User must provide the protection for the motor in accordance with the
instructions in this Manual provided by National Oilwell Varco and the motor starter
and emergency button in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery
Directive.
2. An Imperial Tool Kit is to be supplied with the motor.
3. Metric Units must appear on the motor dimensional information.
4. Depending on the installation, the End Use or Final Installer must guard the exposed
motor shaft in accordance with the requirements of the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC.
5. This motor is a component for installation in machinery as defined in the Machinery
Safety Directive 2006/42/EC. Commissioning is prohibited until conformity of the end
product with this directive has been established with regard to all local safety and
installation rules.
1.2.6 The Noise Level of the Motor appears on the Data Sheets. When the sound
level exceeds 85 dB(A), ear protection must be wore in the vicinity of the motor.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 9
1.2.7 Grounding
Grounding motor frames is required to safeguard personnel from electric shock and to
protect the machine itself in the event of an insulation failure in the machine or installation.
WARNING!
FAILURE TO PROPERLY GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY EXPOSE
PERSONNEL TO A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS CONDITION IN WHICH SERIOUS
OR FATAL INJURY FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK IS POSSIBLE.
Refer to Section 3.2.3 for grounding instruction details.
1.3 General Description

The motor is an alternating current squirrel cage induction motor of forced ventilated
construction designed for use with Variable Frequency Drives only. The construction of
this motor results in a totally enclosed, forced air-cooled machine (IP45) with IP54
minimum terminal boxes. *Please refer to the ATEX Certificate for proper air flow
requirement of motor rating. The motor requires a minimum of 3400 SCFM to be
provided to the inlet of the motor. The motor is provided with openings for duct
connections for air inlet and exhaust. Ducting must remain in place for certification.
The stator and coil assembly is an integral part of the frame with the stator laminations
welded directly to the frame structure. The motor frame is equipped with removable end
frames which provide support for the bearings.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 10
Figure 3 - Basic Construction Components
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 11
Principle Components Refer to Figure 3

A 3-phase induction motor has two main parts: A stationary stator (1) and a revolving
rotor (2). The rotor is separated from the stator by an air gap (5). The stator consists of
a steel frame (3) that encloses and secures the laminated stator core (4). The stator
core is made from thin laminations stacked to form a hollow cylinder. At the air gap,
along the inner circumference of the laminations, the stator laminations have evenly
spaced slots that contain the stator winding.
The rotor is also made up of punched laminations carefully stacked to create openings
(slots) along the air gap. Copper rotor bars (6) are inserted into the slots and connected
(short circuited) at each end by copper end rings (7). Bars are swaged to the slot to
avoid movement as a counter-measure against sparking and vibration. The rotor forms
a cage and is referred to as squirrel cage rotor.
The entire rotor assembly, consisting of stacked laminations, bars, and end rings, is
secured onto the shaft (8). The shaft rotates between bearings at each end (9) and
(10).
1.4 Motor Construction
1.4.1 Stator Core

The motor stator core is constructed from thin electrical steel laminations and coated
insulated to minimize hot spots and stack losses. The steel laminations are assembled
under pressure to form the stator core. The stator core is welded to the frame structure.
Insulated stator coils constructed of copper magnet wire are inserted in the stator slots.
The stator coils and core slots are insulated with electrical insulating material. The
stator assembly is vacuum and pressure impregnated with electrical grade varnish and
baked to insure proper bonding qualities, to give high dielectric strength and maximum
moisture resistance. Stator leads are routed to the appropriate location on the motor
frame for terminal termination.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 12
1.4.2 Stator Winding

The stator winding is a series of copper coils placed in the laminated stator slots core.
The winding is connected so that a 3-phase power source produces a rotating magnetic
field. This magnetic field in turn induces a rotor field that interacts with the stator field to
produce torque in the rotor.
The copper in the stator winding is insulated with materials suitable for operation at
(Class H) temperature. The thickness and strength of the insulating material are
suitable for the voltage stresses applied to the winding during the Variable Frequency
Drive Operation.
1.4.3 Squirrel Cage Rotor

The rotor is also made up of punched laminations carefully stacked to create openings
(slots) along the air gap. Copper rotor bars are inserted into the slots and connected
(short circuited) at each end by copper end rings. Bars are swaged into the rotor slot to
avoid movement and as a counter-measure against sparking and vibration. The rotor
forms a cage and is referred to as a squirrel cage rotor.
The entire rotor assembly consists of stacked laminations, bars and end rings. All
components are secured onto the shaft. The shaft along with the rotor assembly rotates
and is supported by bearings mounted at each end. The shaft has a tapered shaft
extension for ease hub installation for coupling. For detailed information, see the
Outline and Mounting drawing included in the Drawing and Data Package.
1.4.4 Bearings
National Oilwell Varco motors are constructed with a two bearing configuration system.
The two types of bearing styles are ball/ball or ball/cylindrical (roller bearing) which is
grease lubricated and equipped with specially constructed seals. The non drive end is
insulated and the rotating shaft assembly is supported by a deep groove ball bearing.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 13
The drive end of the rotating shaft assembly is supported by a fixed ball bearing or a
cylindrical roller bearing - see motor outline for specific bearing application.
Bearing re-lubrication is required at 3,000 hour intervals or on a periodic basis to extend

bearing life. Bearing replacement is recommended at 25,000 hours of operation. See
Preventive Maintenance Schedule for proper lubrication and factory installed
lubricant specifications.
1.4.5 Frame
The frame is fabricated of steel members welded to plate end rings and press plates.
Steel foot plates are welded to the frame assembly to provide rigid support of the motor
and maintain its alignment with the driven load. Lifting provisions are installed on the
frame to facilitate lifting the complete motor with a conventional overhead hoist. A steel
cover is welded to the frame structure to provide additional stiffness to the frame.
1.4.6 Accessories
National Oilwell Varco motors are available with accessories such as speed encoders
and other components required for motor application. The motors require a forced-air
ventilation system. Refer to the motor accessory description provided in the Drawing
and Data Package of this manual for specific information regarding the accessories and
configuration of the motor. (Motor Certification does not include accessories.)
If speed encoders are mounted on the NDE side of shaft, special precaution should
be taken to avoid circulating currents using appropriate insulated
hardware for installation.
All accessories must have certification ratings matching or more severe to maintain
motor certification.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 14
1.4.7 Variable Frequency Operation

This motor is to be operated with (powered by) a Variable Frequency Drive. This motor
is designed to be operated with (powered by) a Variable Frequency Drive. The list of
approved drives is listed in the current ATEX Certificate. If there is any concerns about
any approved Variable Frequency Drive please contact the manufacture, National
Oilwell Varco, Sugar Land, Texas.
DRIVE-TYPE CAUTION
In order to maintain temperature in compliance with the
Increased Safety e label of this motor, the Variable
Frequency Drive that supplies the power to the motor must be
as designated on the ATEX certificate.
www.nov.com
SECTION 2
Revision 05
Page 15
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Receiving
The motor is skidded and secured prepared for shipment and can withstand most shocks
and rough handling incurred during transit. Before accepting shipment from the transportation
company, examine the motor carefully to determine if any damage has occurred during
shipment. Unpack the unit and carefully examine the frame and sheet metal for damage.
Inspect for the presence of moisture and make certain no foreign material such as packing,
loose fasteners or dirt have fallen into the motor during transportation and unpacking. If
transportation damage is noted, determine the extent of the damage, and immediately notify
the transportation company claims office and National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas.
Be sure to provide complete and accurate details when reporting damage.
2.2 Unpacking and Storage

If the motor is received during cold weather, allow the unit to stabilize to room temperature
before removing the protective covering and packing material. This precaution will minimize
the condensation of moisture on the cold surfaces and the possibility of early malfunctions
resulting from wet windings or other insulating materials.
2.2.1 Unpacking
Unpack the motor with care to avoid damage to the unit. Connect an overhead crane to a
minimum of (4) lifting points provided on the motor, lift the unit from the shipping skid and
place it in its mounting location.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 16
CAUTION!
Failure to use lifting points and extreme care when moving the motor can result in
damage to the motor, other objects, or personal injury.
Avoid manhandling the motor and never apply a lifting force to structural points other than
those provided for that purpose.
2.2.2 Storage
If the motor is not to be installed in its operating location as soon as received, it should be
stored in a clean, dry area not subject to sudden changes in temperature and humidity.
Storage at normal room temperature is recommended. The motor should be covered to
protect it against dust, dirt, moisture and other airborne material while in storage. Consult
with National Oilwell Varco for storage recommendations when the motor cannot be stored
in a temperature and humidity controlled area or storage for a period of more than six
months is anticipated.
Space heaters, when provided in the motor frame, should be energized continuously
during storage of motor, but should be de-energized at time of installation and start-up.
Details of space heater power and connections may appear in the Drawing and Data
Package.
2.3 Inspection
Before installing the motor it is recommended that the unit be thoroughly inspected for
indications of damage or potential malfunctions. Carefully examine the exterior surfaces
of the motor for deep scratches, dents, damaged guards, loose or missing bolts, screws
and other attaching parts. Remove the screened or louvered covers from the ends of
the motor and inspect the rotor and stator and other internal components for loose or
damaged windings and lead wires, loosely mounted components, and the presence of
moisture or other foreign material.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 17
Remove all shipping materials such as blocks, straps, tapes, rubber packing, paper or
other material used to restrict movement of the rotor during shipment. Use low pressure
compressed air, 25 PSI maximum, to blow out all packing residue and dust from the
interior of the motor. Turn the rotor by hand to make certain it rotates smoothly and
without binding.
2.4 Location
The motor can be installed in any clean, dry, well ventilated area which allows a sufficient
unobstructed flow of coolant air and provides sufficient accessibility for operation and
maintenance of the unit. Avoid locations which would subject the motor to excessive
moisture, dust, steam, or fumes from acids, alkalies or other corrosive chemicals. If such
exposure cannot be avoided, a strict periodic inspection and maintenance schedule must
be established.
2.5 Foundation
The foundation or support for the motor must be rigid, level and of ample size and strength
to support the weight of the motor and withstand the motor foundation reaction loads. The
foundation must also be adequately designed to maintain coupling alignment between the
motor and driven load. It is very important that the foundation is designed in such a
manner as to not have any resonant operating frequencies at or near the operating speed,
or at a multiple of the operating speed of the unit.
2.6 Alignment
There are three basic types of alignment: parallel, angular, and axial. Misalignment can
be parallel, angular, axial, or any combination of the three. An explanation of each type
of misalignment follows.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 18
2.6.1 Parallel
Parallel (radial) misalignment, Figure 4, is the difference in position of the center of
rotation of one shaft with respect to the center of rotation of the other shaft.
Figure 4 Parallel Misalignment (For Reference Only)
2.6.2 Angular
Angular (face) misalignment, Figure 5, is the angle one shaft centerline makes with the
other shaft centerline at the coupling connection.
Figure 5 Angular Misalignment (For Reference Only)
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 19
2.6.3 Axial
Axial misalignment, Figure 6, is the relationship of the motor rotor to the motor stator.
Figure 6 Axial Misalignment
2.6.4 Alignment Procedure

There are several methods to measure the alignment of two connected shafts. Two
methods are:
(a) Two dial indicators.

(b) Dial indicator and micrometer.
2.6.4.1 Alignment Considerations

The motor and driven-load should be located and leveled on the mounting base. Care
should be taken to eliminate Soft Foot Condition.
Soft Foot is the condition where the motor does not sit flat on its base and only three of
the four mounting points support the motor. When the fourth point is clamped down the
motor frame or mounting skid is distorted causing possible vibration or erroneous
alignment information. Soft Foot can be corrected by loosening each mounting point
one at a time, measuring the relative movement with a dial indicator, and shimming
under the foot to eliminate that relative movement.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 20
The relative movement should not exceed 0.005 inch. Shims with burrs on the edges
can contribute to the soft foot condition.
2.6.4.2 Alignment Measurement

Rotate the indicators so that they are at the top location. It is suggested to zero the dial
indicator when at the top location for convenience. The coupling hub should be marked
at 0, 90, 180, and 270 degrees and a stationary reference mark placed or identified on
the equipment so that when the shafts are rotated, they can be indexed through 90
degree increments. Both shafts should be rotated together.
An easy way to record the measurements is to draw two circles on paper, one for
parallel and one for angular measurements. Also, record the radius of the measurement
point for the angular (face) measurement.
Figure 7- Dial Indicator Setup
Figure 7 shows a typical dial indicator setup. Rotate the shafts one-quarter turn and
record the dial indicator measurements. Take measurements at; 90, 180, 270 and 360
(0) degrees locations. The dial indicators should read zero when returning to the top
(starting or 0 degree) location. If the indicators do not read zero, disregard the
measurements and repeat the procedure. Figure 8 and 9 shows a typical set of
measurements and their corresponding Total Indicator Readings (TIR). Once these
measurements are recorded, the relationship of the measurements to the allowable
misalignment in Table 1 can be determined by subtracting measurements in each plane
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 21
to find the Total Indicator Reading (TIR) value.
Figure 8- Typical Parallel (Radial) Measurements
Figure 9- Typical Angular (Face) Misalignment
Table 1 lists maximum allowable parallel and angular misalignment for two bearing
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO motors. After the initial measurements are taken, the
motor must be aligned and shimmed to achieve the acceptable alignment
measurements.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 22
Allowable Misalignment
Speed Axial
(RPM)
(inch)
0 to 900 0.002 0.0005 in. / in. radius to 0 0.067

measurement point
901 to 1200 0.002 0.0005 in. / in. radius to 0 0.067
measurement point
1201 to 1800 0.001 0.0005 in. / in. radius to 0 0.067
measurement point
Table 1 - Maximum Allowable Shaft Misalignment for Two Bearing Motors
It is a good practice to first correct the parallel and angular misalignment in the
horizontal plane. Jack screws attached to the skid can be used to adjust the location in
the horizontal plane. Once corrections are made, a new set of alignment measurements
should be taken. If the alignment in the horizontal plane is within limits, then proceed
with correction in the vertical plane. The proper corrections can be determined through
careful evaluations of the measurements. Corrections for parallel and angular
misalignment may be made together. After any corrections are made in the alignment,
new measurements must be taken for all three forms of misalignment.
Once alignment is completed, it is a good practice to record measurements for future

reference.
2.6.5 Coupling
The machine must be connected to the driven equipment with flexible couplings. (pin
coupling, gear coupling)
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 23
CAUTION!
Careful alignment of machines, when using either solid (rigid) or flexible couplings, is
essential to prevent excessive vibration, hot bearings, or shaft failures.
Couplings must be properly sized to be capable of driving maximum machine torque.

Interference fits should be used between motor shaft and coupling.
www.nov.com
SECTION 3
Revision 05
Page 24
3 START-UP PROCEDURE AND OPERATION
3.1 Pre-Operation Equipment Check

After the motor and control equipment is completely installed and wired, but before
operating the unit for the first time, perform the following inspections.
1. Check all interconnecting wiring against the connection diagrams supplied with
the motor.
2. Make certain no foreign objects are lodged in the motor, all guards and safety
devices are securely in place. Remove all materials not required for operation
from the vicinity of all rotating equipment.
3. Ensure that mounting hardware, covers and guards are properly installed and
securely in place.
4. Be sure that the bearings are appropriately lubricated per the bearing lubrication
instructions provided in Paragraph 4.8.
5. If the motor has been subjected to extreme dampness during shipment or
storage, it may be necessary to dry out the winding prior to placing the unit into
operation. Refer to the MAINTENANCE SECTION of this manual for procedures
for testing winding insulation resistance and procedures for drying the winding
insulation. A motor being placed into service after being subjected to very low
temperatures should be slowly warmed to prevent condensation. Space heaters
must be turned off prior to motor start up.
6. Ensure the ground connection is properly installed.
7. Ensure main power leads are properly connected per the winding diagrams
contained in the outline and mounting drawing, located in the Drawing and Data
Package. Re-install all covers prior to operating the motor.
8. Verify RTDs for monitoring, winding and bearing temperatures are functioning.
Visually inspect the motor for evidence of any damage that would interfere with
protective devices or rotation of motor. Check to ensure tightness of the motor
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 25
mounting bolts. Check bearing lubrication levels.
3.2 Power Connections

The following connections to the motor should be made and checked out prior to
startup.
Machine maximum amperes for sizing the power supply cables appear on the outline
drawing and data sheets contained in this manual. The size and insulation
requirements of the cables depend on the location and application of the motor. The
power supply cables to the motor must be installed and grounded to the local electric
codes requirements.
Check the connections of the main power leads from the variable frequency drive to the
terminal leads at the motor. Proper spacing must be maintained. Motor leads are
marked T1-T2-T3 for a three (3) lead machine and (EU Nomenclature U, V, W).
Normally, motors are supplied as three (3) lead machines with neutral leads connected
together internally to the motor. Outline drawings and connection diagrams in this
manual will indicate how the connections are to be made. For motors fed by Variable
Frequency Drives, the neutral if present is not grounded. Ensure that the line voltage
and frequency correspond to that shown on the motor nameplate.
If machine is exposed to humidity and foreign particles it is highly recommended to

properly insulate the motor lead bus bars inside main terminal box.
Particular care must be exercised connecting the starting device phase leads to the
motor. The leads must have the proper sequence applied by the Variable Frequency
Drive to obtain the desired motor rotation. (For example, phase sequence L1-L2-L3 of
the power supply connected to motor terminals T1-T2-T3 will give clockwise rotation
facing the non-drive end of the motor). Reversing (L1) & (L3) of the power supply leads
will produce rotation in the opposite direction.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 26
Connections of main power supply cables to the motor must be in accordance with IEC
60034-8.
NOTE!
If there is any doubt about rotation and phasing, the motor can be bumped to
indicate the direction of rotation by momentarily energizing the motor. A
minimum of two people should check this, one at the motor and one at the
starting device with good visual/oral communication via radio. For the purpose of
bumping the motor to determine rotation, the starting device should energize
the motor only as long as it takes to cause the motor to break-away and begin
to rotate. If the rotation is incorrect, remove power from motor and allow motor to
coast to a stop. Reverse L1 & L3 of the power supply connections to the motor to
correct the rotation.
3.2.1 Space Heaters

Space Heaters are provided in the motor frame and should be energized continuously
during motor storage. (Note: During start-up and operation of the motor, the
heaters should be de-energized.) See motor outline drawing for space heater wire
diagram and power information.
3.2.2 Winding and Bearing RTDs

The bearing housings are equipped with seals and includes provisions for re-lubrication
during operation. Each bearing is equipped with one 100 ohm platinum resistive
temperature device for monitoring temperature. The temperature of the bearings should
be monitored during operation. The alarm point should be set at 90C and shut down
initiated at 100C.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 27
The stator of the motor is equipped with six 100 ohm platinum resistive temperature
devices (embedded between the coils of the stator) two per phase. The stator coils
embedded in the laminated core receive a Global VPI of non-hygroscopic resin. The
stator insulation system is Class H. For proper insulation protection, the RTD relays
should be set for alarm at 185C max, and shutdown at 190C max. The winding RTD
leads are internally shielded in the terminal block of motor terminal box.
3.2.3 Grounding Instructions

Grounding motor frames is required to safeguard personnel from electric shock and to
protect the machine itself in the event of an insulation failure in the machine or installation.
WARNING!
FAILURE TO PROPERLY GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY EXPOSE
PERSONNEL TO A POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS CONDITION IN WHICH SERIOUS
OR FATAL INJURY FROM ELECTRICAL SHOCK IS POSSIBLE.
Grounding conductors must be provided between the machine frame and the supporting
structure. The purpose for this is to avoid hazardous potential voltage difference between
the machine frame and the adjacent surface on which a person may be standing while
contacting the machine surface.
Grounding of the motor and its auxiliary equipment or boxes are compulsory and must
be performed in accordance with current regulations. The motor frame provides a
grounding pad as provision for a connection with 3/8 16 bolting.
Main connection box and auxiliary boxes provided with motor are tested and grounded,
and must not be removed.
Before installing the terminal lug on the ground cable, remove paint, rust, and oil from all
surfaces to which the cables are attached. Bolt lug securely to the surfaces and torque
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 28
the bolt or nut to 20 lb. ft. (27.12 Nm). After installation, protect the ground pad bolt,
washer, and cable lug connection from corrosion by applying a rust inhibitor on the
exposed components.
3.3 Start-Up Procedure (Uncoupled)

1. Verify correct shaft rotation; to change rotation reverse power leads as indicated in
Section 3.2.
2. Energize machine using the Variable Frequency Drive, run standard ID run and save
data, run machine for at least one hour and make sure unusual noise or vibration are
present in the machine.
3. Verify that all instrumentation are functional (Bearing and Winding RTDs, encoders
if applies, and any other instrument device provided with this unit.)
3.4 Start-Up Procedure (Coupled)

1. After rotation is verified to be correct, the motor can be started using the Variable
Frequency Drive.
2. Check the motor drive parameters full load amperes (AC amps) and confirm with the
full load current values listed in this manual. The phase currents should be balanced
within +/- 5%.
3. Temperature-monitoring equipment must be available, monitor the stator and/or

bearing RTD temperatures for safe operation. Any sudden change in temperature on
either stator RTDs or bearing RTDs is cause for shutdown. Otherwise, temperature
should gradually rise and stabilize within the 4-hour period.
4. Check the motor frame and enclosures for evidence of any excessive vibration. If
the motor frame or enclosures are vibrating excessively, the motor should be shut
down and the cause of vibration located and corrected.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 29
5. Once the motor is started, it will remain at approximately to pre-set speed, unless
voltage is lost to the main machine terminals. The machine will trip the drive
protection if the load applied to the shaft is increased to a value outside of the
normal operating limits or the torque of the load exceeds the break down torque for
which the motor is designed.
Normally, Variable Frequency Drive will contain relays to protect the motor from
overcurrent, overtemperature, stall, and excessive torque. These relays will open,
and disconnect the motor from the electric drive when abnormal conditions occur.
Vibration detection devices may also be used to disconnect the motor during
excessive vibration.
6. If after starting the motor, a shut down and attempt to restart is required; the
Instruction Manual should be followed for the number of allowable successive starts
per hour.
3.5 Operating Information

Motor is designed to operate with a Variable Frequency Drive. Consult the Variable
Frequency Operation Section supplied with this motor that appears in Section 5 of this
manual.
www.nov.com
SECTION 4
Revision 05
Page 30
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 Inspection Procedure

Prior to beginning the inspection, the following items should be available: Inspection
light, basic hand tools and wrenches, overhead lifting equipment, electric/pneumatic
wire brush suitable for the area classification, roughing/sanding pads, safety solvent,
personal protective equipment, etc. Inspections should be conducted by qualified
personnel.
Step 1: Inspect exterior bolting all bolts should be present, tight and free of rust and
dirt. Bolts should not show evidence of sparking (pitting, burned, or
blackened areas or paint powdering would be evidence of sparking). Clean
and reinspect.
Step 2: Remove end covers and side panels inspect all mating surfaces, flange
overlaps, and areas where covers are adjacent to metal parts on motor
exterior for indications of sparking or localized heating. Clean and reinspect.
Step 3: Inspect interior look for evidence of sparking on interior joints, bearing
brackets, bearing bolts, etc. Clean and reinspect.
Step 4: Inspect rotor look for evidence of sparking at rotor bar to shorting ring bolts
and rotor bolts and between the rotor bars and the laminations at the edges of
the slots at the end of the core and at each air duct. Clean and reinspect.
Step 5: Inspect gaskets look for evidence of damage to gaskets, replace them if
missing, broken, deformed or hardened.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 31
Step 6: General inspection while motor is open, inspect interior for cleanliness, filter
conditions, insulation cracks, loose bolts or brackets, leaks, or evidence of
end-turn movement. Clean or schedule shop maintenance as needed. See
repair caution below.
Step 7: Test station observers should view internal joints and the rotor to stator air
gap and start motor while watching for sparks. Repeat test start if needed.
Step 8: Clean using safety solvent, wire brush and roughing/sanding pads, clean
both sides of mating surfaces of air shields and end and side covers at bolt
connection points. Be sure to clean both metal components and not just
under bolt heads. Bare metal should be showing.
REPAIR CAUTION
In order to maintain compliance with the Certified ATEX standards incorporated on
this motor, any repair must be performed by National Oilwell Varco manufacturing
facility in Sugar Land, Texas.

500 Industrial Blvd.
Sugar Land, Texas USA 77478
Phone: (281) 260-6111
Fax: (281) 240-5074
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 32
4.2 Preventive Maintenance

A routine regular preventive maintenance program practiced conscientiously will ensure
peak performance, extend motor life and minimize or eliminate equipment breakdowns.
The following preventive maintenance schedule is a guide for establishing a preventive
maintenance program for motors operating under standard conditions. Specific operating
conditions should be analyzed by the equipment user and a preventive maintenance
program established accordingly.
4.3 Preventive Maintenance Schedule

Under standard operating conditions, the following maintenance and inspections should
be performed every 30 days.
1. With the motor stopped, clean the outside of the motor and its ventilation
screens, to remove dirt, dust, oil or other contaminants.
2. With the motor stopped, inspect the motor for loose or damaged windings,
cracked, burned or broken insulation, loose mounting components, loose hold
down bolts, and the presence of moisture or other foreign material.
3. With the motor stopped, inspect the area surrounding the bearings for signs of
excessive leakage of oil or grease. Lubricate the bearings in accordance with the
recommendations set forth in the bearing lubrication instructions provided in
Section 4.8 of this manual.
4. With the motor stopped, inspect the lead wires and control device wiring for
cracked or damaged insulation and loose terminals.
5. With the motor running, observe any unusual noise or vibration.
6. With the motor running, inspect the motor control and monitoring devices for
correct adjustment and operation.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 33
4.4 Cleaning the Motor

Cleaning the motor is essential to long-term motor life. When the drilling motor is
removed from its machinery, accumulated dirt and oil buildup can be removed. The
external motor surfaces can be cleaned by steam cleaning. The internal motor
components should not be sprayed with a steam cleaner. To clean the motor:
1. Clean the external motor surfaces only when the drilling motor is removed from its
machinery and power is removed from the motor.
WARNING!
PERSONNEL PERFORMING CLEANING PROCEDURES MUST WEAR
PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GLOVES, AND EYE PROTECTION. FOLLOW LOCAL
PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES FOR CLEANING. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY
RESULT IN INJURY OR DEATH.
WARNING!
ALKALI AND CHLORINATED HYDROCARBON CLEANING SOLUTIONS SHOULD
NOT BE USED FOR CLEANING DRILL MOTORS DUE TO THE ADVERSE AFFECTS
ON MOTOR INSULATION. USE OF THESE SOLUTIONS MAY CAUSE MOTOR
FAILURE OR REDUCED MOTOR LIFE.
WARNING!
DO NOT SPRAY THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF THE MOTOR WITH A STEAM
CLEANER. MOISTURE CONTAMINATION MAY CAUSE MOTOR FAILURE OR
REDUCED MOTOR LIFE.
2. Cover the motor air inlet and outlet with heavy plastic and tape in place. Ensure
the interior motor components are protected from spray during cleaning.
3. Steam clean the external surfaces of the motor. Do not direct the spray at motor
openings or the plastic covers.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 34
4. When steam cleaning is complete, let excess fluid drain from the motor.
5. Remove plastic covers or protective covers and tape from the motor. Clean the
inside of the motor by using a vacuum cleaner or dry low pressure compressed
air, 25 PSI maximum, to remove any accumulation of dirt, dust or other gritty
particles. Stubborn deposits of grease, oil or similar substances on the metal
components that are located away and clear of the windings and insulating
components may be cleaned using a clean cloth moistened with a nonflammable
solvent.
WARNING!
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHOULD THE SOLVENT OR SOLVENT
MOISTENED CLOTH BE ALLOWED TO CONTACT THE WINDINGS OR
INSULATING COMPONENTS.
Deposits of grease, oil, or similar substances on the winding or insulating components

should only be removed with a clean dry shop cloth. Consult with National Oilwell
Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if the winding or insulating components are contaminated
to an extent where wiping with a cloth will not remove the contaminants. See Drying
Procedure.
4.5 Drying Procedure

If the motor has been subjected to extreme dampness during shipment, storage, or
cleaning, a procedure may be required to thoroughly dry all windings.
If the stator insulation resistance measures less than 2 megohms, the machine must be
dried out until at least the minimum recommended resistance value is obtained. The
drying-out process can be accomplished by applying either external or internal heat as
necessary to obtain an end-winding temperature of 167F (75C) by thermometer.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 35
4.6 Methods of Drying

The easiest and most convenient method of drying out a motor consists of placing the
complete, or partially disassembled, machine in an oven. External heat also can be
applied by placing space heaters beneath the motor so as to obtain an even distribution
of heat along the length of the unit. Care must be taken to provide adequate air
circulation during the drying-out process to insure a complete and thorough job.
CAUTION!
The temperature of the motor should be raised slowly to avoid building up
excessive vapor or gas pressure, which could prove harmful to the insulation. Do
not exceed a temperature rise of 18F (10C) per hour.
CAUTION!
Do not hurry the drying-out process. Never permit the temperature of the motor
to exceed the maximum allowable temperature rise marked on the name plate.
4.7 Maintain Record

It is advisable to maintain a record of the insulation resistance and humidity during
measurements for each motor. The measurements, taken at maintenance intervals, will
provide a means of detecting a gradual deterioration of the winding insulation. Such
records should list the prevailing site conditions, such as the test voltages, ambient
temperature and humidity, at the time of each test since these conditions will affect the
results.
4.8 Bearing Lubrication
4.8.1 Application
Grease lubricated anti-friction bearings (NGLI #3)
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 36
4.8.2 Grease Specifications

A high quality NGLI #3 grease is recommended, with the following physical properties:
Soap Base..........Lithium
Dropping Point.............383oF
Worked Penetration Per ASTM D217...238 NGLI #3
Operating Temperature Range...-40oF to 275oF
Oxidation Inhibited..YES
Corrosion Inhibited..YES
Flash Point.415F
The use of the following grease is recommended:
Shell Oil Company - Cyprina - Product Code 504-538
4.8.3 Bearing Lubrication

Typically grease is periodically added to the bearing cavity to replenish grease
consumed by the bearing and to replace contaminated grease with fresh grease. The
frequency and amount of grease added to a bearing for each application is dependent
on the bearing size, speed, operating temperature, the grease used, seal condition,
ambient conditions etc.
The motor is factory furnished with the bearing properly prepared with the correct
amount of grease for initial operation. The bearing housing is equipped with provisions
for a grease zerk and a grease vent to facilitate the addition of grease to the bearing. At
each lubrication interval and during preventive maintenance inspections, the grease
seal area and adjacent shaft area should be inspected for signs of excessive leakage.
If excessive leakage is present the seals should be replaced and the shaft and seal
sleeves repaired or replaced as necessary.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 37
The recommendations for typical installations may need to be adjusted for specific
applications. In applications for standby use, the amount of grease may need to be
reduced to avoid over greasing. In applications of extreme temperatures or higher than
normal air born contaminates, the amount or frequency of lubrication may need to
increase. Please consult National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if you have
questions concerning a specific application. If over greasing occurs, the motor can
be run as long as the temperature of the bearing is closely monitored and the unit is
shut down when it reaches the alarm point specified in Paragraph 3.2.2. The bearing
temperature should always be monitored after relubrication. A slight increase in the
bearing temperature for several hours immediately after fresh grease is added is
normal.
Please consult with National Oilwell Varco in Sugar Land, Texas if you have
questions concerning over greasing or temperature fluctuations in the bearings.
Should it become necessary to remove the bearing from the motor, it should be
thoroughly inspected for wear or damage prior to re-installation, and replaced if
necessary. The seals of the bearing housing should also be inspected for wear or
damage and replaced if necessary. When re-installing the bearing, the bearing should
be hand packed with grease and the bearing housings should be packed to 1/2 to 2/3
full with grease. Care should be taken to insure that no foreign material is allowed into
the grease, bearing or bearing housing.
It is recommended that the following relubrication interval and amount be adhered to for
proper bearing operation and life.
For location or installations not re-greasing or repacking the bearings as routine

maintenance, it is recommended to replace the bearings every 25,000 hours or five
years.
Refer to Section 7 for bearing type.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 38
NOV Part No. Bearing Grease Quantity Interval
1030-20-0076 6330M 100 - 105 grams* Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
1030-20-0080 7320 50 - 55 grams* Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
1030-14-0004 BC1-1330 100 - 105 grams* Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
10090160-001 6320 50 - 55 grams* Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
1030-08-0113 BB1-3039 50 55 grams* Every 3000 hours of operation or 3 months
*A typical industrial grease gun pumps approximately one gram of grease for every
stroke of the gun. Therefore 50 grams is approximately 50 shots from a standard
grease gun. This should be checked with each individual grease gun to assure the
proper amount of grease is used.
4.8.4 Bearing Operating Temperature

Monitoring of bearing temperature can provide a warning of an impending failure of a
bearing and prevent costly mechanical damage resulting from bearing failure. The
operating temperature of a bearing can vary depending on load, speed and the amount
of grease in the bearing. Monitoring of bearing temperature should focus on a sudden
increase in bearing operating temperature over temperatures which have been
observed as normal for a specific motor. A bearing should be closely monitored if its
operating temperature exceeds 210oF (99oC). The motor should be shut down and the
bearing inspected or replaced if the operating temperature of the bearing reaches 225oF
(107oC). The described limits above are to be determined by measurement of the
temperature of the bearing housing.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 39
4.9 Troubleshooting
The most important item to keep a unit running with very little down time is to set up a
program for intelligently analyzing the malfunctions, and making the necessary
corrections. Although regular preventive maintenance inspections are conducted, be
alert between inspections for any signs of motor trouble. When a minor problem is
located, correct it immediately. Minor defects can result in costly repairs and down time.
Some of the more common symptoms, along with probable causes and helpful
remedies, are found in the following chart.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 40
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART
Note: Always disconnect the machine from the Power Source before
investigating a fault or performing any work on the motor.
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY

Motor does One phase is missing Check. Reset circuit breaker or replace
not start fuses if open.
The fuse has blown
Over-voltage, under-voltage, or overload Check for cause of abnormal condition.

devices tripped (when protective devices Correct any deficiencies. Reset devices.
incorporated in circuit) Check Motor Data Plate for nominal
operating values.
High motor Cooling air is too hot Adjust for sufficient ventilation for the
temp. Ambient Temperature is too hot motor.
Overload Check voltage and current to eliminate

overload.
One phase is missing Stop running motor and check. Repair

Fuse is blown fault.
External blowers not working Repair fault.

Blower motors protection has tripped
External blowers rotating in the wrong Change direction of rotation.

direction
Motor fan rotating in the wrong direction Fan motor or fan must be corrected.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 41
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSES REMEDY

Bearing
issues:
Vibration Misalignment Check and realign.
Noise Mounting of components Examine and correct defective mounting.
Temp. rise Inadequate lubrication Lubricate.

thrust overloading Correct overload.
Increase of Case distortion Replace bearings.

the
Seal damage or displacement
rotational
torque
www.nov.com
SECTION 5
Revision 05
Page 42
5 VARIABLE REQUENCY OPERATION

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series induction motors are specifically designed for Rig
Applications and Variable Frequency Drives. The loss distribution and performance has
been optimized for operation with Variable Frequency Drives. The motors capability is
described on the nameplate and in published curves. This section of the Instruction
Manual explains the significance of the descriptions that define the capability of the motor
under variable frequency operation.
5.1 Motor Capability Descriptions General

The following diagram shows GENERAL capability ranges of a motor under variable
frequency operation. The SPECIFIC ranges are marked on the nameplate. Data sheets
and curves detailing the motors performance under Variable Frequency operation also
appear in the Drawing and Data Package.
Figure 10- Motor Performance Torque Vs Speed Curve (Reference Only)
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 43
Figure 10 shows a typical Speed-Torque Curve for rating values, please refer to data
sheets and curves for specific model number.
HORIZONTAL AXIS Speed of the motor controlled by a Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
in RPM.
VERTICAL AXIS Torque of the motor Lb-ft units.
The intersection of 100% (full torque) and based speed, Point 1 Figure10 gives the rated
torque of the motor and its base speed.
Constant TORQUE SPEED RANGE (Line 2 Figure 10): The motor is capable of
continuously producing the torque equal to its rated. In this speed range, the motor flux is
kept constant by the drive; therefore, motor draws almost the same amount of current for
the same torque request at any speed.
Constant HP SPEED RANGE (Line 3 Figure 10): The motor is capable of continuously
producing the power equal to its rated. At base speed, motor voltage reaches its
maximum. Beyond the base speed, motor voltage stays at its maximum; consequently,
motor flux decreases as the motor speed increases. The decreases of motor flux and the
thermal limitation defined by the rated current results the constant HP Speed Range, in
which the decreases of the torque is inversely proportional to the increase of the speed.
The speed range of constant HP is defined on the nameplate.
Reduced HP SPEED RANGE (Line 4 Figure 10): The motor cant hold the rated power
anymore, as the break down torque falls off by the square of the reduced flux. Instead, it
produces a reduced power, determined based on the breakdown torque (pull out) of the
motor at each corresponding speed.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 44
VOLTAGE: Motor voltage reaches its maximum at base speed, at speeds lower than
the base speed the motor voltage increases linearly with its speed. This is due to the
constant volts-Hz ratio controlled by the Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). Once motor
speed exceeds the base speed, motor voltage remains at its maximum, even with the
increase of the motor speed. Consequently, the volts-Hz ratio reduces with the speed
increase. As volts-Hz ratio reflects the strength of the motor field, point 1) gives the
speed beyond which the field weakening starts.
MOTOR COOLING: Motor is designed to operate with auxiliary blower at all times,
regardless of the drilling motor speed. Blower should be on when the main motor is
energized.
5.2 Drive Parameters

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series induction motors are specifically designed for
Rig Applications involving Variable Frequency Drive sources. The motor performance
has been optimized for a certain level of Flux present in the motor. The settings of the
Variable Frequency Drive control the Flux level and affect the temperature and
performance of the motor.
The following motor parameters when used in the Variable Frequency Drive program
will provide optimum performance to the motor. When the motor is certified for
application in a Hazardous Area, the temperature rise and validity of the certification is
dependent on the drive providing output of the parameters shown.
The following are Drive-program parameters that affect the temperature and
performance of the motor with an explanation of the relationship. The specific Drive
parameters are located in the data sheets provided in the Drawing and Data
Package and on the nameplate.
Supply Voltage: The 3-phase rms voltage into the Drive. This establishes the
maximum available voltage at the Voltage Level Point (Field Weaken Frequency).
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 45
Rated Power: The Horsepower rating of the motor. Usually the units of this
parameter are in KW, which is 0.746 times the HP rating.
Voltage Level Point (Hz): The Frequency where the maximum voltage is
supplied to the motor. Above this frequency, the voltage remains constant at rated
volts. At frequencies higher than this parameter, the motor flux is reduced. This
frequency parameter controls the flux level in the motor and the amount of magnetic
saturation in the motor. The No-load amps, full-load amps, slip, temperature, and power
factor are affected by this parameter.
Synchronous Speed (RPM): The motors stator-field rotates at a speed that is

dependent on the number of poles and the applied frequency. The motor rotates very
close to this speed when uncoupled (No-load).
Nominal Speed (RPM): When loaded, the conductors of the rotor cut the stators flux
and power is induced in the rotor. The rotor rotates slower than the stator magnetic
field, dependent on the amount of flux in the stator and the load torque applied to the
shaft. This speed is lower than the motors Synchronous speed.
Slip at Rated Load (RPM): The difference between the synchronous speed and
the speed of rotor rotation at rated load in RPM.
Nominal Current (Amps): The amp draw of the motor at rated voltage and
output. This value is obtained from test measurements using Current Transformers.
Magnetizing Current (Amps): The amps drawn by the motor at no-load and rated
voltage. The motors magnetizing current (No-load amps) is affected by the voltage and
frequency applied.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 46
The magnetizing amps provide amp-turns to develop the magnetic flux in the motor.
Uncoupled or at no-load, the motor should draw the same magnetizing current to
maintain a constant flux over the range of constant Volt-per-Hertz slope.
Power Factor: The power factor parameter defines the magnitudes of

magnetizing-amps and load-amps.
Carrier Frequency: The Carrier Frequency of the Variable Frequency Drives

PWM output affects the temperature of the motor. Higher carrier frequencies improve
the harmonic content and losses within the motor and result in lower temperatures. If a
carrier frequency is specified the value is a minimum.
Other parameters of the Drive program can be set with consideration for factors of the
Drive and the application. Limiting the motor current, torque, and power less than the
rated values will affect motor output.
5.3 Service Condition
5.3.1 General
Motors should be properly selected with respect to their service and operating
conditions. CM632 Series induction motors are designed for operation in accordance
with their ratings (as marked) under usual service conditions. While the motor may be
capable of operating under one or more unusual service condition a SPECIAL motor
may be required for some unusual conditions. Usual and unusual conditions are listed
below as the basis for evaluating proper application of the motor.
Applying a motor with service conditions other than those specified as usual may
involve some degree of hazard. The additional hazard depends upon the degree of
departure from the usual condition and the severity of the environment to which the
motor is exposed. The conditions of hazard could result from overheating, mechanical
failure, premature insulation deterioration, corrosion, fire, and explosion.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 47
5.3.2 Usual Service Conditions

Unless otherwise marked, the following conditions are the basis for defining the
motors capability.
1. Grease lubricated bearings lowest ambient temperature: -20C

(minus)
2. Water cooling lowest ambient temperature: 5C
3. An altitude that does not exceed 3300 feet (1000 meters)
4. Installation on a rigid mounting surface
5. Installation in areas where motor ventilation is not compromised
5.3.3 Unusual Service Conditions

National Oilwell Varco should be consulted if any of the following unusual service
conditions exist.
A. Exposure to:
1. Combustible, explosive, abrasive or conducting dusts
2. Lint or very dirty operating conditions where accumulation of dirt may

interfere with normal ventilation
3. Chemical fumes, flammable or explosive gases
4. Nuclear radiation
5. Steam, salt-laden air, or oil vapor
6. Damp or very dry locations, radiant heat, vermin infestation, or

atmospheres conducive to the growth of fungus
7. Abnormal shock, vibration, or mechanical loading from external sources
8. Abnormal axial or side thrust imposed on the motors shaft
B Unusual Operation where motor voltage is unbalanced by more than one percent
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 48
C. Unusual Operation at speeds above the rated speed or speed marked on the
nameplate
D. Unusual Operation in a poorly ventilated room, in a pit, or in and inclined position
E. Unusual Operation where subjected to:
1. Torsional impact load
2. Repetitive abnormal overloads
3. Reversing or electric braking
F. Unusual Operation with a Variable Frequency source where:
1. The settings of the Drive do not provide optimum flux levels as marked.
2. The air flow does not provide the required CFM at the motor as marked.
3. The Drive type is not as specified on the nameplate. Certification requires

the motor to be operated with the specific drive type that it was tested
with.
4. The voltage to the motor is low from low input into the drive or a drop in
the line due to length.
www.nov.com
SECTION 6
Revision 05
Page 49
6 HAZARDOUS LOCATION APPLICATION
WARNING!
MOTORS FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS ARE SPECIALLY DESIGNED TO
COMPLY WITH OFFICIAL REGULATIONS CONCERNING THE RISK OF
EXPLOSION. IF IMPROPERLY USED, BADLY CONNECTED, OR
ALTERED, NO MATTER HOW MINOR, THEIR RELIABILITY COULD BE
IN DOUBT. STANDARDS RELATING TO THE CONNECTION AND USE
OF ELECTRICAL APPARATUS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS MUST BE
TAKEN INTO CONSIDERATION, ESPECIALLY NATIONAL STANDARDS
FOR INSTALLATION. ONLY TRAINED PERSONNEL FAMILIAR WITH
THESE STANDARDS SHOULD HANDLE THIS TYPE OF APPARATUS.
WARNING!
MOTORS OPERATED FROM INVERTERS SHOULD NOT BE USED IN
ANY HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS UNLESS THE MOTOR IS
IDENTIFIED ON THE NAMEPLATE AS ACCEPTABLE FOR SUCH
OPERATION. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS WARNING COULD
RESULT IN AN UNSAFE INSTALLATION THAT COULD CAUSE
DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
PERSONNEL, OR BOTH.
All external wiring to power motor or accessories mounted on the motor must be in
compliance with EN 60079-14, Explosive Atmospheres Part 14: Electrical Installation
Design, Selection and Erection.
End users must comply with the special conditions for safe use listed on ATEX
Certificate and on Declaration of Incorporation.
Conditions are:
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 50
1. This motor requires the following two measures to maintain the safe
temperatures of Increase Safety e protection for a maximum of 200C surface
temperature.
a) Motor requires Thermal protection.
b) Motor requires forced air during operation providing a minimum of
3400 SCFM.
2. Do not open when energized. All components, including anti condensate heaters
must be de-energized before opening access covers or enclosure covers.
3. Use only with Variable Frequency Drive designated on ATEX Certificate. Not
intended for across-the-line start.
4. The responsibility for insuring safe operation lies with the end user and special
conditions for safe use on the ATEX Certificate must be followed.
5. This is a standard motor that may require additional wiring, modifications and
accessories to be added prior to installation and use. These additional elements
are not included in this certification and the user of the certificate must ensure
that the final installation conforms to the relevant ATEX requirements.
6.1 Construction
National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series of motors is specifically designed for Rig
Applications involving Variable Frequency Drives.
When the motor is marked with a nameplate reading Increased Safety e, the motor is
provided with a type of protection in which additional measures are applied so as to give
increased security against the possibility of excessive temperatures and of the
occurrence of arcs and sparks inside and on external parts of electrical apparatus in
normal service. The type of protection is denoted by e and the additional measures
are those required by Standard EN60079-7 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially
Explosive Atmospheres Increased Safety e.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 51
6.2 Standards
This motor has been designed manufactured to the applicable requirements of NEMA
MG1.
This motor has been designed manufactured to the applicable requirements of IEC/EN
60034-1. (Rotating Electrical Machines, Part 1: Rating and Performance)
The performance and features of construction are in accordance with the requirements
set forth in the following Standards for use in a potentially explosive atmosphere.
(IEC/EN 60079-0) Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Gas Atmospheres

General Requirements.
(IEC/EN 60079-7) Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres

Increased Safety e.
(IEC/EN 60034-5) Degree of Protection Provided by the Integral Design of Rotating

Electrical Machines (IP code) - Classification.
The following other standards are incorporated into the performance and features of
construction not related to the specifics of Increased Safety e.
EN 60034-1 Rotating Electrical Machines- Part 1 Rating and Performance.
NEMA MG-1 Part 31 Definite-purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors.
IEEE Standard 303 Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Motors in Class I,
Groups A, B, C, and D Division 2 locations.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 52
This motor is non-sparking and has a defined maximum surface temperature.

Compliance with the performance and construction requirements for Increased Safety
e also enables the motor to be applied in North American areas designated Division 2.
This motor designated as Increased Safety e conforms to the guidelines listed in IEEE
Standard 1349 Guide for Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 and Class I,
Zone 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations, also conforms guidelines and codes listed on
NFPA 70 (NEC) Article 500 for Class I, Division 2 and Class I, Zone 2 Location.
6.3 Certification and Declaration of Conformity

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series Motor has nameplates that are marked with the
agency that certifies compliance with the standards listed. When shown on the
nameplate the motor design and performance is certified to comply with the standards
listed on the nameplate. The certifying agency may be a Third Party organization with a
listing-file or certification may be from testing performed by National Oilwell Varco.
Certification requires the motor to be tested with the specific drive type used in the final
application. The following two pages are the Declaration of Conformity that ships with
the motor and lists specific motor serial numbers.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 53
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 54
6.4 Nameplate Marking Information

National Oilwell Varcos CM632 Series Motor has nameplates that comply with all
requirements of NEMA MG1, IEC/EN 60034-1 and Standards for induction motors. The
motor has various markings depending on the order requirements. All induction motors
are marked with a Main Induction Motor Nameplate common to all induction motors. SEE
PHOTO. Other optional nameplates are listed and described below.
6.4.1 Induction Motor Main nameplate

The following information is shown as a sample of the Main Nameplate for the motor.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 55
Manufacturer: National Oilwell (Or after March 2005, National Oilwell Varco) is located
at 500 Industrial Blvd., Sugar Land, Texas 77478, USA.
MODEL: Each motor has a Model Number identification that defines the features and
performance. Duplicate motors share the same Model Number.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 56
SERIAL No.: Each motor has a unique number that identifies a specific motor. No two
motors have the same Serial Number. Complete traceability of manufacturing is
maintained with this identifier.
MFG YEAR: The year the motor was manufactured.
6.4.2 Variable Frequency Hazardous Location Nameplates

This motor is designated to be Group II equipment, which means it is suitable for the
appropriate explosive atmosphere(s) other than for mining applications. Equipment for
mining applications is designated as Group I.
This nameplate is for a motor designed and tested to be Increased Safety e defined
from EN 60079-7: Increased Safety e.
A type of protection in which additional measures are applied so as to give

increased security against the possibility of excessive temperatures and of the
occurrence of arcs and sparks inside and on external parts of electrical
apparatus which does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service. The e denotes
the type of protection and the additional measures are those required by the
Standard EN 60079-7.
The following information is shown on the Hazardous Location Nameplate for induction
motors.
When a mark does not appear in the field on the nameplate, the information Does Not
Apply.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 57
MODEL: Each motor has a Model Number identification that defines the features and
performance. Duplicate motors would share the same Model Number. This is the same
Model Number that appears on the Main Motor Nameplate.
SERIAL NO.: Each motor has a unique number that identifies a specific motor. No two
motors have the same Serial Number. Complete traceability of manufacturing is
maintained with this identifier. This is the same Serial Number that appears on the Main
Motor Nameplate.
CERTIFICATION LISTING:
FILE NUMBER: The Identification number from a Certifying Agency regarding the
motors compliance to the standards of construction and performance listed.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 58
TYPE OF PROTECTION: Comments or clarifications in the protection of the motor are

shown regarding compliance with the standards or temperature limits. Note: The motor
is a passive device that depends on proper energization and removal of power to
maintain safe temperatures. Proper application of a motor in a hazardous-location
requires proper system parameters such as pre-start purging, adequate cooling-air,
drive-programming, and overload and stall protection.
AGENCY: The Certifying Agency that has reviewed compliance with the standards of
construction and performance listed.
STANDARDS: The identification number assigned to the written specifications that

define the construction and performance requirements of the motor.
QUALIFICATIONS: Any comments or clarifications in the application of the motor

regarding compliance with the standards or temperature limits are marked in this
location on the nameplate.
DRIVE PERFORMANCE AND SETUP:

SUPPLY VOLTAGE: The voltage input to the Variable Frequency Drive in R.M.S.
VOLTS / HZ LEVEL-POINT: This is the frequency setting of the Variable Frequency

Drive where the Volts per Hertz slope stops and becomes level. This frequency defines
the flux level, magnetization amps, and power factor performance of the motor.
NOMINAL SPEED: The speed of the motor at full-load in RPM. The Slip R.P.M. is
determined from this marking by the difference in full-load RPM and the synchronous
RPM.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 59
NOMINAL CURRENT: The amp-draw of the motor at full-load in amps R.M.S. The
amps shown are when rated voltage is applied at the motor terminals. This is the
current designated by IN equal to 1/0 P.W. amps.
NOTE: Typically, voltages lower than rated voltage reach the motor. Other motor
currents can be determined from this marking by increasing the amps by the ratio of the
voltages.
CURRENT RATIO (IA/IN): This is the ratio of the stall current IA (at rated conditions)
divided by Nominal full-load amps IN. This ratio defines the motor current in a locked-
rotor (stall) condition. This marking is required by Standard EN 60079-7 for Increased
Safety e motors. This marking is used with time (tE) to set over temperature
Protection of the motor. The drive must be set to limit the motor to this value of current
overload.
Initial Starting Current IA as defined in EN 60079-7: Highest r.m.s. value of current

absorbed by an AC motor when at rest with its armature clamped in the position of
maximum air gap when supplied at rated voltage and rated frequency. The transient
inrush is not represented. The drive must be set to limit the motor to this value during a
stall.
SAFE STALL TIME (tE): The time in seconds for an AC winding when carrying starting
current IA, to be heated up from the temperature reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature to a temperature that does not exceed the limiting
(maximum surface) temperature. At the current level IA at stall, power must be
removed from the motor before time (tE).
MAG. (NL) AMPS: The current drawn by the motor at rated voltage and rated
frequency at the no-load (uncoupled shaft) conditions. This is the magnetization amps
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 60
of the magnetic circuit that is dependent on the voltage and frequency settings of the
Variable Frequency Drive.
POWER FACTOR: The Cosine of the angle between voltage applied and the amps
drawn by the motor. The Power Factor can be multiplied by 100 and represented by a
percentage.
TEMPERATURE PROFILE GRAPH:

Standard EN 60079-7 Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Gas Atmospheres
Increased Safety e includes a diagram of motor temperatures and the time to reach
the temperatures under conditions of 1) normal running and 2) locked rotor stall. The
standard requires that data be provided so the user can set protection to limit motor
temperatures. For clarity, National Oilwell Varcos nameplate displays the information
on the motor hazardous location nameplate as current ratio (IA/IN) and safe stall time
(tE).
CONDITION 1) NORMAL RUNNING (Rated Service)

TIME TO THERMAL STABILITY: (t1): The time in hours for the motors stator winding to
reach thermal stability at rated conditions. The total temperature shown is the allowable
temperature for a Class H insulation system.
CONDITION 2) LOCKED ROTOR STALL

SAFE STALL TIME (tE): The time in seconds for an AC winding when carrying starting
current IA, to be heated up (from the temperature reached in rated service and at
maximum ambient temperature) to a temperature that does not exceed the limiting
(maximum surface) temperature.
The drive must be set to limit the amps into the motor at stall to the value IA. At the
current limit IA. Power must be removed from the motor before time (tE).
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 61
The total temperature allowed for the Hazardous Location maximum surface
temperature is marked on the nameplate at the top of the graph as LIMITING
TEMPERATURE. The maximum surface temperature marked will not be exceeded if
power to the motor is removed before the time marked as (tE).
Intermittent Duty:
The CM632 Series motor is capable of short time overloads indicated as the
Intermittent Duty on the motors published data. The motor is suitable for high load
excursions without exceeding the surface temperatures of the rated conditions if limited
to the Duty Cycle listed.
The temperatures of the rated condition will not be exceeded if the r.m.s. current of the
Duty Cycle does not exceed rated current.
Intermittent Duty Cycles may require higher current outputs from the Variable
Frequency Drive than shown as the motors IA/IN stall ratio. To obtain higher current
levels, the allowable stall time must be reduced by the square of the higher current.
The allowable stall time is less at higher amps by the square of the ratio.
For example, if the IA/IN ratio of the motor is 1.2 PU current and the time (tE) is 30
seconds, the rotor temperature is capable of 1.8 PU current for 13 seconds.
The shorter allowable stall time of 13 seconds was calculated by the square of the ratio
1.2/1.8 times the original 30 seconds.
CE Marking: The CE marking is legally required (mandatory) for products intended for
sale or placed into service in Europe. The marking applies to all manufacturers,
whether located within or outside of the E.U.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 62
In order to be compliant with the CE Marking requirements, a manufacturer must ensure

that the product meets all applicable Directives.
The impetus behind the CE Marking of products is to allow free movement and sales of
goods within the Union, and to eliminate country specific requirements.
Directives (laws) contain the requirements that a product must meet to be sold in the
E.U. For this motor, special documentation requirements and test requirements have
been met for compliance with E.U. Directive on Machinery Safety 98/37/EC.
Compliance is demonstrated with the marking affixed to the product, in this case, the
CE Marking appearing on the motor nameplate. Specifically, conformity with EHSR
1.5.1 has been demonstrated by compliance with the requirements of EN 60204-1
Markings: ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Tamb. -40C to +55C
Ex e Increased Safety (EN50019 / EN60079-7)

Group II Surface Not mining underground
Category 2 Equipment may be installed in Zone 1 or Zone 2
areas
Temperature Class T3 200C maximum surface
G-Atmosphere surrounding the motor explosive gas
6.4.3 Space Heater Nameplate

This nameplate addresses the requirements defined by NFPA 70 (National Electric
Code), CE, and IEEE Standard 303 for marking of space heaters used in hazardous
locations.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 63
AREA CLASSIFICATION: The environment the motor is suitable to be operated in.

When an area is classified as hazardous, the type of environment is defined based on
the hazardous material involved. The hazardous area classification defines the
requirements of the motor and the space heaters to be suitable for operation in that
area. The Area Classification marked on the motors nameplate must agree with the
area where it is to be operated. If the Area Classification marking on the motor
nameplate is BLANK, the motor is not suitable for hazardous locations. It is suitable for
an area that is NOT CLASSIFIED as hazardous.
NOTE: In order to maintain the suitability of the motor in hazardous locations,

replacement of space heaters must not exceed the original surface temperature
marked. This cautionary note also appears on the space heater nameplate.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 64
6.5 System Protection

The motor provided with this manual has construction features and tested performance
required by (IEC 60079-7). Increased Safety e Electrical Apparatus. This motor is
NOT explosion proof and will NOT contain an ignition source if surfaces inside the motor
exceed permissible temperatures. This motor requires thermal protection to remove the
power source before non-permissible temperatures are reached. The motor is a passive
device that depends on proper energization and removal of power to maintain safe
temperatures. Proper application of a motor in a hazardous-location requires proper
system parameters such as pre-start purging, adequate cooling-air, drive-programming,
and use of overload and stall protection.
The application of the (IEC 60079-7) Increased Safety e designation of this motor
requires the motor temperature to not exceed the maximum temperature allowed by the
Temperature Code. In order to avoid non-permissible temperatures on surfaces of the
motor, external methods such as an inverse-time delay overload protective device are
required. The motor requires system protection.
CAGE MOTOR THERMAL PROTECTION - When the motor is intended for use with a
current-dependent device to protect against non-permissible temperatures, the starting
current ratio (IA/IN) and the time (tE) marked on the motor are to be used.
The inverse-time delay overload protective device needs to 1) monitor motor current
and 2) disconnect a stalled motor within the time (tE). The protective device is to be set
using the current / delay-time characteristic curves so that the (IA/IN) starting current
ratio and time (tE) data marked on the motor.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 65
Per EN 60079-7 it is required that motors supplied with varying frequency and voltage
by a Drive (converter) be tested with the Variable Frequency Drive and certified for the
duty marked on the nameplate. Testing of the protective devices provided for the motor
are also required to be tested at final installation.
FORCED-AIR DUCTED COOLING: This motor is forced-air ventilated IC 37 as defined

per IEC/EN 60034-6 Methods of Cooling (IC Code).
The motor requires an independently powered externally mounted blower to provide

forced air through the motor to cool it.
The quantity of cooling-air at the motor is marked on the nameplate as air volume in
SCFM (Standard Cubic Feet per Minute). This is the air required into the motor opening
to maintain the maximum surface temperature listed. The density of the cooling-air is
defined to be less than an altitude of 3300 feet (1000 meters). The maximum
temperature of the cooling-air is defined to be less than the ambient temperature listed
on the Main Motor Nameplate.
Motor cooling is dependent on the air supplied to the motor. The cooling air is a System
requirement for proper application of the motor.
WARNING!
IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN COMPLIANCE WITH THE INCREASED SAFETY e
APPLICATION OF THIS MOTOR, THE DUCTED AIR FLOW PROVIDED AT THE
MOTOR MUST BE EQUAL OR GREATER THAN SHOWN ON THE NAMEPLATE.
A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH OR OTHER MEANS TO ENSURE
REQUIRED AIR FLOW IS RECOMMENDED.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 66
6.6 Variable Frequency Operation Considerations

The motor fed by a Variable Frequency Drive power source will exhibit increased
temperature as compared to a motor operated on a sine-wave due to the affects of the
harmonic frequencies produced by the drive. The amount of increase in losses and
increase in motor temperatures is dependent on the harmonic characteristics of the
drive feeding the motor and the design of the motor.
This motor has been specially designed and tested for operation with the Variable
Frequency Drive type(s) listed on the motor nameplate. The operating program of the
drive affects the temperature of the motor if it is not done properly. The parameters for
programming the Variable Frequency Drive are provided with this manual.
WARNING!
ANY CHANGES TO THE PROGRAMMING OF THE VARIABLE
FREQUENCY DRIVE COULD ADVERSELY AFFECT THE TEMPERATURE
AND PROTECTION OF THE MOTOR AND INVALIDATE THE SUITABILITY
OF THE INCREASED SAFETY e APPLICATION OF THE MOTOR IN A
POTENTIALLY EXPLOSIVE GAS ATMOSPHERE.
www.nov.com
SECTION 7
Revision 05
Page 67
7 SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 Motor Technical Description
7.1.1 Description
MODEL SERIES CM632UUT
7.1.2 General
This model of motor is an alternating current induction motor of open force ventilated
construction. It is a two bearing configuration.
7.1.3 Ratings
Ambient -40C to 55C Ambient -40C to 55C

1,500 HP 1,600 HP
600/690 Volts 600/690 Volts
1.0 Service Factor 1.0 Service Factor
1,440 Amperes 1,570 Amperes
44 Hertz nominal 44 Hertz nominal
3 Phase 3 Phase
870 RPM nominal 870 RPM
Refer to the outline drawing, nameplate, motor data, and application information
provided in this manual for more specific information.
7.1.4 Motor Frame

The construction of this motor results in a totally enclosed air-over machine with a
(IP45) enclosure with. The stator and coils assembly is an integral part of the frame
with the stator laminations welded directly to the frame structure. The motor frame is
equipped with removable end frames, which provide support for the bearings.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 68
7.1.5 Ventilation
This motor is designed for ducted ventilation. This type of ventilation requires external
air-flow. Air is blown into the motor through the NDE openings in the frame. Hot air is
exhausted through the drive openings. The blower must be operational and providing
the required amount of air (3400 SCFM) in order for the motor to provide rated output at
the temperatures required.
7.1.6 Bearings
This motor is of two bearing construction. The non drive end of the rotating shaft
assembly is supported by deep grove ball bearing. The drive end of the rotating field
and shaft assembly is supported by a fixed ball bearing or cylindrical bearing. The drive
end bearings are grease lubricated, BCI-1330 Type or 6330. Depending on the model
one or both of the bearings DE and NDE are electrically insulated. The bearing
housings are furnished with seals and includes provisions for refilling during operation.
Each bearing is equipped with one 100 ohm platinum resistive temperature device.
Refer to Bearing Lubrication Instructions provided in Paragraph 4.8 of this manual for
specific lubrication details.
7.1.7 Stator and Coils Assembly

The stator and coils assembly consists of coil groups embedded in slots within the
laminated steel core of the stator. The lamination material is coated with a non-organic
coating. The stator coils are of form wound construction and interconnected on the non
drive end of the stator. The stator connections are located in a side-mounted connection
box. Labeled lead cables are provided in the connection box for the customer
connections to the power source. The stator of the motor is equipped with six 100 ohm
platinum resistive temperature devices embedded between the coils of the stator.
RTDs are shielded internally to the motor.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 69
The stator coils embedded in the laminated core receive a Global VPI of non-
hygroscopic resin. The stator insulation system is Class H.
7.1.8 Rotating Assembly

The rotating assembly consists of specially shaped copper rotor bars connected in a
cage arrangement. The bars are shorted at each end by copper end rings.
7.1.9 Connection to Driven Load

This motor is equipped with a drive shaft for coupling the motor to the driven load. Refer
to the Motor Alignment Procedure starting with Paragraph 2.6 of this manual for specific
motor to load alignment details.
7.1.10 Area Classifications

Confirm hazardous materials are not present before starting the motor.
7.1.11 Accessories and Terminal Boxes See Outline for Locations

Auxiliary Terminal Box The auxiliary terminal box contains the connections for the
Stator and Bearing RTDs, and space heaters.
A.) The motor is provided with Stator and Bearing Resistance Temperature
Detectors. The RTDs are 100 ohm platinum. Each RTD has three wires
brought out to a terminal strip located in a terminal box.
B.) Space heaters for the motor are brought out separately to terminals.
Energize per nameplate data located on the terminal box. H1 (L) and H2
(N) connect to motor space heaters.
Main-Power Connections - The motor connects to the power system with leads brought
to the main-power terminals.
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 70
7.1.12 Space Heaters

This motor has been provided with space heaters to prevent moisture absorption when
the machine is out of service. The space heaters are specially designed to limit surface
temperatures for suitability with the Hazardous Area application. A wide range of
voltages can be applied to the Space Heaters as marked. The range is 120 to 240
Volts AC or DC. The motor requires 200 watts, single phase, 120 / 240 volt AC power.
The space heaters should be energized whenever the motor is not in use. This includes
motor storage and all other cases when the motor is not operating. If the motor is in a
humidity controlled environment, then the space heaters do not need to be energized.
When the motor is in storage, provision shall be made to allow adequate air circulation
for moisture removal and prevention of overheating.
7.1.13 Recommended Relay Settings
ALARM TRIP CONTACT

(SHUTDOWN)
DE Bearing RTD 90C 100C
NDE Bearing RTD 90C 100C
RTD Winding 185C 190C
Proximity Probes Customer Customer
Stall Time 45 Seconds
www.nov.com
Revision 05
Page 71
7.2 Spare Parts List
7.2.1 Recommended Spare Parts List
CM632UUT SPARE PARTS LIST

Parts May Vary By Model
Models: CM632UUT-
DESCRIPTION *QTY **NOV PART LIST ORACLE PART NO.
Space Heaters Motor 100 Watt 2 6550-10-0069 10032318-003
RTD, DE/NDE Bearing Probe, 100 2 6550-25-0029 10021574-001
Bearing, BCI 1330 Type 1 1030-14-0004 10032517-016
Bearing, 6330M Type 1 1030-20-0076 10032508-009
Seal, DE 2 1555-02-0013 10032360-015
Seal, Bearing Retainer 1 G54417 10019326-001
Seal Lip 1 - 10511454-001
Seal Sleeve, Lip Seal 1 - 10509096-001
*QTY. Indicates original quantity supplied with motor

**NOV National Oilwell Varcos Part Number
www.nov.com
PART 2
Drawing and Data Package
Model CM632UUT
CM Series
Frequency Drive

express written consent of National Oilwell Varco. This document is Phone: +1 (281) 240-6111
DOCUMENT NUMBER REV
10876548-201-DWG 01
www.nov.com
Document number 10876548-201-DWG
Revision 01
Page i
REVISION HISTORY
01 19.06.2014 Initial Release J.B. N.J. B.M.

CHANGE DESCRIPTION

01 Initial Release
www.nov.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Page
1 DATA SHEETS
Induction Motor Data 1-5
Hazardous Location Information 2-5
Torque - Speed Performance Curve, 600 Volts 3-5
Torque - Speed Performance Curve, 690 Volts 4-5
Torque - Current Performance Curve, 600 Volts 5-5
Torque - Current Performance Curve, 690 Volts 5-5
2 DRAWINGS
3 ATEX CERTIFICATION
ii
SECTION 1
MOTOR MODEL SERIES CM632UUT
AC INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR DATA SHEET
FOR USE WITH VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
Drive Motor AMBIENT

HP TORQUE SPEED CURRENT
System Terminal VFD DUTY (SECONDS) TEMPERATURE
(OUTPUT) (Lb-Ft) (RPM) (AMPS)
(Volts) (Volts) (DEGREE)
1600 600 560 9659 870 1570 S1, Continuous -40C to +55C
1600 690 640 9659 870 1500 S1, Continuous -40C to +55C
1850 600 560 11168 870 1735 S9, 120 Sec ON, 60 Off -40C to +55C
2000 600 560 12074 870 1912 S9, 120 Sec ON, 90 Off -40C to +55C
Note: See page 2 of 5 for drive parameter input information.
MOTOR MODEL SERIES : CM632UUT

APPLICATION(S) : Draw Works, Mud Pump, Rotary Table and Top Drive
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE(S) : For hazardous applications refer to ATEX certificate for
: approved drives.
ENCLOSURE PROTECTION : Motor Enclosure: IP45, Terminal Box: IP56
METHOD OF COOLING : Forced air blower providing 3400 SCFM min.
(Maintain min. force air requirement while motor is
running)
INSULATION : Class H
MAXIMUM ALTITUDE : 3300 Ft above sea-level (or 1000m)
MAX PERMISSIBLE SPEED : See outline drawing for bearing specification application
DRIVE SUPPLY VOLTAGE : 600V / 690V RMS 3-Phase 50 or 60 Hz
PHASE SEQUENCE : A, B, C (U, V, W), CW viewed from NDE
: C, B, A (W, V, U), CCW viewed from NDE
SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL : 95 dB(A) at 3 Ft (per IEEE 85) without blower - See note
below
Note: The sound level will exceed 85 dB(A) - ear protection must be worn while in the vicinity of the motor
when running.
STATOR RTD SETTINGS (Recommended): 185C Alarm, 190C Trip.
TITLE:
DATA SHEET
AC INDUCTION DRILLING MOTOR
02 5/20/2013 M. Carter C. Wade
MODEL NUMBER: CM632UUT
REV. DATE BY APPVL. 1600 HP RATING
DWN. BY: 03/22/12 CHK. BY: 03/22/12 APVD BY: 03/22/12 DWG. NO. REV.
J. Portos/S. Liu B. Moats N. Bannick 10645297-DAS SHT 1 OF 5 02

FORM NO. 112-A
HAZARDOUS LOCATION INFORMATION
MOTOR CONSTRUCTION: Increased Safety e in normal operation does not produce sparks,
arcs, or dangerous temperatures.
Comply with : CE Marking on the rating plate per ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
: IEC/EN 60079-7: Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres Increased Safety e and IEC/EN 60079-0:
Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive Atmospheres General
Requirements.
Certified By: : Trac EMC & Safety. Under certification files: TRL05ATEX31082X
Qualifications: : Special conditions for safe use required.
Markings: : II 2 G Ex e II T3 Gb Tamb. - 40C to + 55C
MAX. SURFACE TEMPERATURE : 200 Degree C Temperature (T3 Code)

THERMAL STABILITY - Running : 3 Hours
MAX. LOCKED ROTOR SAFETY FAULT : 38 Sec (tE Safe stall time)
CURRENT RATIO [ Ia / In ] : 1.2 [ Start / Nominal ] 1728 A / 1440 A
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE USE REQUIRED:

Thermal protection of the motor fed by a Variable Frequency Drive is based on the Torque and Amp
limiting functions of the Drive and RTDs in the stator windings of the motor. Therefore, it is
imperative that thermal sensors are monitored and is a requirement to maintain Increased Safety
e protection.
DRIVE PARAMETER INPUT INFORMATION
Drive Input Source 600 Volts 690 Volts

Control Mode DTC DTC
Motor Voltage 600 V 600 V
Current 1570 A 1570 A
Frequency 44 Hz 44 Hz
Nominal Speed 870 RPM 870 RPM
Power 1600 HP 1600 HP
Important Note:
1) Standard ID run is required prior to starting up the motor.
DWG. NO. REV.

10645297-DAS SHT 2 OF 5 02
FORM NO. 112-A
600 V OPERATION
Continuous: 1600HP
Constant Torque (*) : 0 to 870 RPM
Constant Horsepower (*) : 870 to 1400 RPM
Reduce Power : 1400 to 2400 RPM
(*) Above points are witnessed and certified by the ATEX notifying body on page 2 of 5
Motor Performance Curve

Torque versus Speed
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
TORQUE(LbFt)
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
SPEED(RPM)
Tested Points from 0 to 2400 RPM
DWG. NO. REV.

10645297-DAS SHT 3 OF 5 02
FORM NO. 112-A
690 V OPERATION
Continuous: 1600HP
Constant Torque (*) : 0 to 870 RPM
Constant Horsepower (*) : 870 to 1400 RPM
Reduce Power : 1400 to 2400 RPM
(*) Above points are witnessed and certified by the ATEX notifying body on page 2 of 5

Torque versus Speed
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
TORQUE(LbFt)
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200
SPEED(RPM)
Tested Points from 0 to 2400 RPM
DWG. NO. REV.

10645297-DAS SHT 4 OF 5 02
FORM NO. 112-A
600V OPERATION
Torque versus Current @ 870 RPM
14000
12000
TORQUE(LbFt)
10000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250
CURRENT(Amps)
690V OPERATION

Torque versus Current @ 870 RPM
14000
12000
)t 10000
f
b
L( 8000
E
U 6000
Q
R
O
T 4000
2000
0
0 250 500 750 1000 1250 1500 1750 2000 2250
CURRENT(Amps)
DWG. NO. REV.

10645297-DAS SHT 5 OF 5 02
FORM NO. 112-A
SECTION 2
2 DRAWINGS 10876548-201-DWG
Title Drawing Number
Specification, CM632UUT-150E............................................................ 10876548-201-SPC
Specification, CM632UUT-150F ............................................................ 10876549-201-SPC
Outline, AC Induction Motor (CM632)...........10506689-GAD
Motor Shaft Details and WK..................................................................... 10503859-DAD
Installation, Drive End, End Frame ............................................................... 10503856-ASM

Bill of Material .............................................................................. B/M 10503856-001
Installation, Non Drive End, End Frame ....................................................... 10504249-ASM

Installation, Bearing RTD, D.E. ................................................................................. G97288

Bill of Material ............................................................. 10010235-001 (B/M G97288)
Installation, Bearing RTD, N.D.E. ............................................................................. G97289

Bill of Material .............................................................. 10010236-001 (B/M G97289)
Installation, Connection Box ......................................................................... 10738912-ASM

Installation, Heater .................................................................................................... G97546

Nameplate, Heater.G25313
2-1
Title Drawing Number
Nameplate, AC Motor (CM632) .................................................................... 10626766-DAD
Installation, Nameplates and Tags ........................................................................ G97379-3

Bill of Material ...........................................................10010728-001 (B/M G97379-3)
Nameplate, ATEX (CM632).10730451-DAD
Assembly, Frame and Stator Coil (632 FR).............................................................. G93277

Bill of Material ............................................................. 10022979-001 (B/M G93277)
Installation, Access Covers ....................................................................................... G97331

Installation, Exhaust......................G97125
Bill of Material10010372-001 (B/M G97125)
Installation, Pressure Switch ..10626771-ASM

Bill of Material..B/M 10626771-001
Installation, Drive HubG97318
Installation, Blower10746842-ASM
Bill of Material..B/M 10746842-001
Assembly, BlowerNo Drawing Available

Part Number.10700335-301
2-2
Printed By:ramirezrl Printed On: Wed Aug 6 15:56:29 GMT-0500 2014
MOTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET
Description: 1600 HP, 690V, CM632UUT Motor equipped with 100W heater 120/240V, six
100 ohm platinum stator RTDs, One 100 ohm platinum RTD for each bearing,
max rated speed 2400RPM, ambient temperature -40C to 55C, and furnished
with the following:
Accessories:
1) Connection Box: Stainless steel mounted right side, (viewed from NDE)
IP56
2) Pressure Switch: United Electric J120K - 455
3) Blower Assembly: Furnished; see detail below.
4) Shaft / Hub: 5.65 inch tapered shaft with 10.470 inch Hub
5) Encoder: None
6) Exhaust Hood: Top mounted drive end exhaust.
Model Number: CM632UUT-150E
NOV Part Number: 10876548-201

rd
3 Party Certifications: ATEX
Paint or Primer NOV Blue

Specifications: 050-2000-M-001
Customer Standard Documentation

Documentation: a. Electronic Operations Manual
b. Electronic Test Reports
Special Documentation: See Special Instructions
Manual & Reference Base Motor O & M Dwg.

Drawings: No. 10506689-001
User Manual: 10876548-201-Man
Special Instructions: None
Blower Description: 4200 CFM Blower assembly with a 20HP 440\480V 3 phase 60Hz motor.
Blower assembly has weather louvers installed on air intake.
Blower Installation NOV # 10746842-001, Blower Assy. Part # 10700335-301
Encoder Description: None
TOLERANCE EXCEPT AS NOTED

DECIMAL FRACTIONAL
.XXX .005 1/16
.XX .010 TIR .010
.X .060 ANGULAR
FINISH 125 1/2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING TITLE:

DWN. 11/13/13 CHK. 11/13/13
H. Torres K. Harwood
APPVL 11/13/13 APPVL 11/13/13
SPECIFICATION, DRILL MOTOR
FORM NO. 136W-1-D
REV DATE BY APPVL

S. Bao B. Moats SIZE DWG. NO. REV
NEXT ASSY FSCM NO. SCALE
52142 A 10876548-201-SPC SHT. 1 OF 1 01

THIS IS A PROPRIETARY DESIGN OF NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO REPRODUCTION OR USE OF THIS DESIGN BY OTHERS IS
PERMISSIBLE ONLY IF EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.
TC Number: 10876548-201-SPC Printed REV: 01 Latest REV: 01

MOTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET
Description: 1600 HP, 690V, CM632UUT Motor equipped with 100W heater 120/240V, six
100 ohm platinum stator RTDs, One 100 ohm platinum RTD for each bearing,
max rated speed 2400RPM, ambient temperature -40C to 55C, and furnished
with the following:
Accessories:
1) Connection Box: Stainless steel mounted left side, (viewed from NDE)
IP56
2) Pressure Switch: United Electric J120K - 455
3) Blower Assembly: Furnished; see detail below.
4) Shaft / Hub: 5.65 inch tapered shaft with 10.470 inch Hub
5) Encoder: None
6) Exhaust Hood: Top mounted drive end exhaust.
Model Number: CM632UUT-150F
NOV Part Number: 10876549-201

rd
3 Party Certifications: ATEX
Paint or Primer NOV Blue

Specifications: 050-2000-M-001
Customer Standard Documentation

Documentation: a. Electronic Operations Manual
b. Electronic Test Reports
Special Documentation: See Special Instructions
Manual & Reference Base Motor O & M Dwg.

Drawings: No. 10506689-001
User Manual: 10876549-201-Man
Special Instructions: None
Blower Description: 4200 CFM Blower assembly with a 20HP 440\480V 3 phase 60Hz motor.
Blower assembly has weather louvers installed on air intake.
Blower Installation NOV # 10746842-001, Blower Assy. Part # 10700335-301
Encoder Description: None
TOLERANCE EXCEPT AS NOTED

DECIMAL FRACTIONAL
.XXX .005 1/16
.XX .010 TIR .010
.X .060 ANGULAR
FINISH 125 1/2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING TITLE:

DWN. 11/13/13 CHK. 11/13/13
H. Torres K. Harwood
APPVL 11/13/13 APPVL 11/13/13
SPECIFICATION, DRILL MOTOR
FORM NO. 136W-1-D
REV DATE BY APPVL

S. Bao B. Moats SIZE DWG. NO. REV
NEXT ASSY FSCM NO. SCALE
52142 A 10876549-201-SPC SHT. 1 OF 1 01

THIS IS A PROPRIETARY DESIGN OF NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO REPRODUCTION OR USE OF THIS DESIGN BY OTHERS IS
PERMISSIBLE ONLY IF EXPRESSLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO.
TC Number: 10876549-201-SPC Printed REV: 01 Latest REV: 01

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
C C
SHT 2 SHT 2
58.44
[1484.38] 2.50 THRU
31.00 TYP (4) PLCS
SHT 2 48 3/4 7 5/8 [787.40]
B [1238.25] [194.33]
32 3/16 18 1/4
2 1/16 16.75 20.40
[51.80] [425.45] [518.18] [817.35] [463.55]
D .81 D
[20.56]
6.12 2X DRILL & TAP THRU
.22 [155.45] 1/4-20 UNC-2B TAP
[5.57] PRESSURE SWITCH MOUNT
1/4 NPT GREASE 5.53 19.38

INLET TYP EACH [140.40] [492.25]
END
14.75 12.75 38.03

12.75 14.75
[374.65] [323.85] PRESSURE SWITCH [965.99]
[323.85] [374.65]
MOUNTING PAD
16.651.005
[422.940.13]
C 1/4 NPT SHAFT DETAIL C
GREASE VENT 10X SHEET 2 10 7/16

TYP EACH END DRILL & TAP [264.56] 1.53
3/8-16 UNC-2B X 0.75 [38.76]
SPACED AS SHOWN.
NON DRIVE END
DRIVE END GROUND 6.50 8.25
B WIRE [165.10]
30.00
[209.55] 18.00
SHT 2 [457.20]
[762.00]
BASE MOTOR CM632UUT-130/138 TYP
36.00
DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL
[914.40]
FOR RIGHT OR LEFT
CONNECTION BOX POSITION
(RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN)
DRILL & TAP 3/4-10
UNC - 2B THRU TYP
(4) PLCS
VIEW FACING
(DRIVE END)
1.56 THRU v 3.00
0.13 DEEP (FARSIDE) GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
TYP (4) PLCS
B TYPE---------------------------- CM SERIES - INCREASED SAFETY "e" MAX SURFACE TEMP -------- 200~C B
MODEL------------------------- CM632UUT-____ ENCLOSURE --------------------- IP44, WITH EXTERNAL FORCED AIR BLOWER / DUCT
HP --------------------------------1500 (1119 Kw) AND AIR EXHAUST COVER.
CONSTANT TORQUE ----- 9050 LB-FT CONNECTION BOX ------------ IP56
SOURCE ---------------------- VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE (PWM) D.E. BEARING ------------------- ANTI-FRICTION, BALL / INSULATED (3000 RPM MAX)
16.50 VOLTS ------------------------- 600V/690V RMS 3-PHASE WITH NO SIDE LOAD
[419.10]
TYP DUTY --------------------------- CONTINUOUS D.E. BEARING ------------------- CYLINDRICAL, ROLLER / INSULATED (2300 RPM MAX)
SPEED ------------------------- 870 RPM WITH SIDE LOAD
(1400-1800 CONSTANT HP) N.D.E. BEARING ---------------- ANTI-FRICTION, BALL / INSULATED (3000 RPM MAX)
(1800-3000 CURVE) BEARING LUBRICATION ---- GREASE, NGLI #3 / CYPRIANA
33.00 MAX MOTOR SPEED LIMITED SPACE HEATER --------------- (2) 100W - 120V / 240 AC/DC TEMP LIMITING
[838.20] BY BEARING CAPACITY STATOR RTDS ----------------- (6) 2-PER PHASE (100 OHM PLATINUM)
AMBIENT TEMP ------------ 45 OR 55 C BEARING RTDS ---------------- (2) 1-PER BEARING (100 OHM PLATINUM)
INSULATION ------------------ FORM WOUND CLASS-H
FORCED AIR ----------------- 4200 CFM MOTOR CERTIFIED INCREASED SAFETY "e" AND ENCLOSURE RATING BASED
ROTATION -------------------- BI-DIRECTIONAL ON PERIPHERAL ATTACHMENTS PROVIDED BY OTHERS. SEE OPERATION AND
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE APPLICATION DETAILS.
X.XX DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND `.06 UNLESS NOTED
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
A A
TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN
9/27/2010
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
DECIMAL J. KROBOT NATIONAL- OILWELL, L.P.. IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED

PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF
CHK
.XXX .005
9/27/2010 NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE
OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR
.XX .020 TITLE:
H. TORRES DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
NOT PERMITTED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN
.X .060
FINISH 125
APPVL
9/27/2010 CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.. THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL-
OUTLINE AND MOUNTING,
B. MOATS OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT
NON 22.13 5.25 APPVL

9/27/2010
UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS AC INDUCTION MOTOR
DRIVE END
LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
DRIVE END (CM632UUT-130/138)

CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN IS THE
[561.98] [133.35]
FRACTIONAL C. WADE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
1/16"
SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
D
FSCM No.
23.13 8.40 3/16

TIR .010
1 5
52142
REV DATE BY APPVL
POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP of
ANGULAR
[587.38] [213.45]
500 INDUSTRIAL BLVD.
DOCUMENT NUMBER: REVISION:
1/2 ESTIMATED WEIGHT NEXT ASSY.
SUGARLAND, TEXAS 77478 01
DO NOT SCALE DWG. - 10506689-GAD
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TC Number: 10506689-GAD Printed REV: 01 Latest REV: 01
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5.520 .125 DRILL

10X .88+.00 4.25 +0.000
[140.21] 0.44 DEEP -.06
-0.001
DRILL & TAP
4.850 .62+.00 1.50
3/8-16 UNC -2B x 0.750 -.06
6.15 [123.19] [38.10] 6.67
SPACED AS SHOWN
GAGE LINE
[156.21] [169.33]
D
TYP C
15.38 7.65 B
D D
[390.53] [194.21]
11.47
TYP TYP
[291.31]
TYP
B .125 DRILL 1.62 DEEP
30.75 5.879 A+0.001 .332 DRILL X DEPTH SHOWN G +0.000
-0.002

22.94 60 SEAT AS SHOWN E +0.000
[781.05]
[582.63] [149.33] -0.001 -0.002
OPENING OPENING (4.754 [120.74]) 3/8-24 UNF -2B (FLAT BOTTOM) TO F +0.000 H +0.000
TYP -0.002 -0.002
TYP DEPTH SHOWN
DETAIL B
SCALE 3/16
.25 .06 X 45
1.25" TAPER CHAMFER
MOTOR N/P
PER FOOT [6.35]
1-8 UNC -2B 1.500 DEEP
1.125 X 90 .25 X 45
ATEX N/P (LIFTING PROVISION) CHAMFER
SEE SHAFT
EXTENSION DETAIL 12X
1-14 UNC-2B X 2.25 DEEP
SHAFT SHAFT OPTIONS HUB OPTIONS FOR 5.25 & 5.65 TAPER E.Q. SP ON "E" B.C.
8.34 MODEL -A- -B- -C- -D- -E- -F- -G- -H-
[211.79]
C
14X TYP 1 5.250 1.934 1.500 .134 10.470 6.730 8.350 10.343 C
DRILL & TAP 4.19 2 5.650 2.250 1.625 .125 10.470 6.730 8.350 10.343
3/8-16 UNC -2B 0.750 DEEP [106.36]
SPACED AS SHOWN TYP
8.38
[212.73] NON
BASE MOTOR CM632UUT-130/138 50 7/16
DRIVE END DIMENSIONS ARE TYPICAL
DRIVE END TYP [1280.90]
FOR RIGHT OR LEFT
CONNECTION BOX POSITION 18 1/4 32 3/16
(RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN) [463.55] [817.35]
5.75
[146.05] VIEW C-C 2 3/4
[69.85]
31
[787.40]
4.16 TYP (TOP VIEW)
[105.78] 11.50
TYP [292.10] 11.25 4.29
TYP [285.75] [108.95]
8.40 8.13
[213.31] [206.50] TYP TYP 12X
5.62 DRILL & TAP
TYP TYP [142.87]
4.07 3/8-16 UNC-2B x 0.750
TYP SPACED AS SHOWN
10X [103.25]
DRILL & TAP TYP
19.38
3/8-16 UNC - 2B x .75
[492.25]
SPACED AS SHOWN 5.25
B
[133.35] B
TYP
5.50
[139.70] 17 1/4 38 36
TYP [437.62] 21.00
12.68 [965.99] [915.19]
[322.03] OPENING TYP [533.40]
16.50

TYP TYP
[419.10] OPENING
TYP

21.08
[535.42]
OPENING OPENING 23.38
[593.85]
4 TYP
[102.39] VIEW B-B ( NON DRIVE-END)
1/2 NPT FEMALE CONNECTION ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
A NON A
DRIVE END TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN
9/27/2010
DRIVE END

CHK
.XXX .005
.XX .020 TITLE:
.X .060
1/2 NPT FEMALE CONNECTION PROVISION FINISH 125

APPVL
FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH TYP APPVL

9/27/2010
UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS
AC INDUCTION MOTOR
EACH SIDE (CM632UUT-130/138)

1/16"
D
FSCM No.
TIR .010 REV DATE BY APPVL
52142 3/16 2 of 5
SIDE VIEW
POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP
ANGULAR
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
55 5/16
66 9/16 [1404.72]
[1690.81] MAY VARY DEPENDING
D D
OPTIONAL BLOWER
ON BLOWER MANUFACTURER
AND FILTER
OPTIONAL BLOWER
AND FILTER
OPTIONAL EXHAUST HOOD

OPTIONAL EXHAUST HOOD
C C
OPTIONAL BLOWER
EXTENSION ADAPTER
70 3/4
[1797.71]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
OPTIONAL
ON BLOWER MANUFACTURER
PRESSURE SWITCH
OPTIONAL ENCODER
COVER BROKEN HEATER
OPTIONAL HUB
OUT FOR CLARITY BOX
SEE SHEET 2
B B
NON
DRIVE END DRIVE END
RIGHT HAND FACING DRIVE END

WITH BLOWER & TOP EXHAUST SHOWN
A A
9/27/2010

CHK
.XXX .005
.XX .020 TITLE:
.X .060
FINISH 125
APPVL
APPVL
9/27/2010 LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
(CM632UUT-130/138)
1/16"
D
FSCM No.
TIR .010
ANGULAR
REV DATE BY APPVL
52142 POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP 3/16 4 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
52 13/16
[1340.70] 66 9/16
MAY VARY DEPENDING [1690.81]
D ON THE BLOWER MANUFACTURER OPTIONAL BLOWER OPIONAL BLOWER D
AND FILTER AND FILTER
OPTIONAL OPTIONAL EXHAUST HOOD

EXHAUST HOOD
C C
OPTIONAL BLOWER
EXTENSION ADAPTER
70 3/4
[1797.71]
MAY VARY DEPENDING
ON THE BLOWER MANUFACTURER OPTIONAL HEATER
PRESSURE SWITCH BOX
OPTIONAL HUB
SEE SHEET 2
OPTIONAL ENCODER COVER
B B
NON
DRIVE END DRIVE END
FACING DRIVE END LEFT HAND

WITH BLOWER & TOP EXHAUST SHOWN

A A
9/27/2010

CHK
.XXX .005
.XX .020 TITLE:
.X .060
FINISH 125
APPVL
APPVL
(CM632UUT-130/138)
1/16"
D
FSCM No.
TIR .010
ANGULAR
REV DATE BY APPVL
52142 POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP 3/16 5 of 5
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2 1
21.57
n 5.91
n 6.63
n 5.91
n 6.63
n 5.65
B B
n 5.17
58.44
53.49
47.08
45.68
43.18
16.93
14.43
13.00
10.12
5.52
4.85
1.63
1.38
0.00
CENTER
CENTER
CENTER
LINE -A-
ROTOR
SHAFT
30.06
29.96
29.79
A A
TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 6/14/2010 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
DECIMAL CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
MAXIMUM MAGNETIC PULL IN POUNDS PER 0.001 INCH = 172.6 .XXX ` .005 J. KROBOT NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
SUBSIDIARIES (ALL COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO
.XX ` .020 CHK 6/15/2010 HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF TITLE:
MUD PUMP (n5.65 TAPER SHAFT) .X ` .060 J. BLACK NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS
FINISH 125 APPVL 6/23/2010 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
2 2
ITEM WEIGHT (LB) WK (LB-FT ) CENTER GRAVITY (IN) H. TORRES
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON WK^2, CM632UUT-138C&D
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR
FRACTIONAL APPVL 6/23/2010 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
SHAFT 682 33.6 29.79 ` 1/16"
B. MOATS
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
TIR .010
FSCM No. SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
ROTOR ASM. 2017 914.2 30.06 ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
52142 NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO
1/4 B 1 OF 1
TOTAL 2699 947.8 -A- 29.96 ESTIMATED WEIGHT NEXT ASSY
SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 10503859-DAD 01
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: 10503859-LAY Printed REV: 01 Latest REV: 01
2 1
16 3 4
5 2
15 19 13 14 19 POSITION ITEM-2
10
WITH SLOT AT
TYP (8) PLCS TYP (8) PLCS 12 O'CLOCK 6 7
POSITION
B B
NOTES:
1. PLACE GASKET, ITEM 4, ONTO INNER BEARING CAP, ITEM 3. A
USE SEALANT, ITEM 20, TO HOLD GASKET IN PLACE. NEXT
FILL BEARING CAP CAVITY 2/3 FULL WITH GREASE, ITEM 7,
THEN SLIDE ASSEMBLY ONTO SHAFT.
2. MEASURE SHAFT IN THREE LOCATIONS AROUND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE. DO THIS IN AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS AXIALLY. RECORD MEASURED DIMENSIONS.
3. NEXT, HEAT BEARING, ITEM 6, TO 230 DEG. F (110 DEG. C). PRESS
BEARING ONTO SHAFT (WITH BEARING MODEL NUMBER FACING
OUT) UNTIL BEARING SEATS AGAINST SHOULDER OF SHAFT.
ALLOW BEARING TO COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE
PROCEEDING FURTHER.
4. AFTER BEARING HAS COOLED, FULLY HAND-PACK WITH GREASE, ITEM 7. A 9
5. AFTER BEARING HAS BEEN PROPERLY GREASED, INSTALL END
FRAME, ITEM 1, USING AN X TIGHTENING PATTERN, TORQUE BOLTS
TO THE TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
6. HEAT SLEEVE, ITEM 9, UNTIL THE SLEEVE INNER DIAMETER IS
GREATER THAN THE SHAFT DIAMETER. PLACE SLEEVE IN OVEN,
OR USE INDUCTION HEATER. DO NOT USE A DIRECT FLAME TO
20 1 19 12 11 18 19 17
HEAT SLEEVE. SLEEVE TEMPERATURE SHOULD NOT EXCEED
TYP (8) PLCS TYP (3) PLCS POSITION ITEM-3
300 DEG. F (149 DEG.C). CAREFULLY SLIDE SLEEVE ONTO SHAFT
UNTIL SLEEVE SEATS AGAINST BEARING RACE. HOLD IN POSITION
SECTION A-A WITH SLOT AT
A 6 O'CLOCK POSITION A
UNTIL IT COOLS ENOUGH TO STAY IN POSITION. ALLOW SLEEVE TO SCALE 3/8
COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE PROCEEDING FURTHER. TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 6/8/2010 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
7. PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE OUTER BEARING CAP, ITEM 2, INSERT SEAL, .XXX ` .005 J. KROBOT NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
ITEM 9, INTO BEARING CAP PER SEAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. .XX ` .020 CHK 6/16/2010 HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
.X ` .060 J. BLACK NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
8. AFTER SEAL HAS BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED, MOUNT BEARING CAP FINISH 125 APPVL
6/16/2010 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
ONTO END FRAME WITH GASKET, ITEM 5. TIGHTEN BOLTS OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, END FRAME DE
H. TORRES DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
USING AN X PATTERN PER TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2. FRACTIONAL
6/16/2010 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
(CM632)
APPVL
` 1/16" THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
9. AFTER FULLY ASSEMBLED, PUSH/PULL ON THE SHAFT AXIALLY BY TIR .010
C. WADE HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
HAND TO CHECK END PLAY. RECORD THE DISTANCE THAT THE ANGULAR FSCM No. SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
SHAFT MOVES AXIALLY. ` 1/2

REV DATE BY APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
52142
NEXT ASSY
NATIONAL
500
OILWELL
INDUSTRIAL
VARCO
BLVD.
1/8 B 1 OF 2
10. FORWARD RECORDED DATA FROM NOTES 2 AND 9 TO ENGINEERING. N/A SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
01
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 10503856-ASM
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: 10503856-ASM Printed REV: 01 Latest REV: 01
2 1
TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES FOR SAE GRADE BOLTS

GRADE 5 GRADE 8 STAINLESS STEEL
SIZE TIGHTENING TORQUE (FT-LB)[N-M] SIZE TIGHTENING TORQUE(FT-LB)[N-M] SIZE TIGHTENING TORQUE(FT-LB)[N-M]
#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
J. KROBOT NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
.XXX ` .005
CHK 6/16/2010
.XX ` .020 HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, END FRAME DE
FRACTIONAL 6/16/2010
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR (CM632)
APPVL WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
TIR .010
ANGULAR FSCM No. SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO
1/8 B 2 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A 10503856-ASM 01
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
11/11/2013
Bill of Material-Engineering
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, End Frame DE 320Fr
Part Number: 10503856-001
Legacy Number: 10503856-001
Revision: 01
Reference
Item No. Oracle No. Legacy No. Description UOM Quantity Designator
1 10008336-001 G58175 END FRAME, MACH DE CM632 Each 1
2 10504089-001 10504089-001 Cap, Bearing Outer Each 1
3 10004813-001 G45660 CAP, BEARING INNER DE/NDE Each 1
4 10009471-001 G21806 GASKET, CAP INNER DE/NDE 626FR Each 1
5 10009478-001 G21814 GASKET, CAP OUTER DE/NDE 626FR Each 1
6 10032517-016 1030-14-0004 BEARING, ROLLER CYLINDERICAL Each 1
7 10009669-001 1885-05-0013 GREASE, SHELL-CYPRINA Pound 1
9 10090179-001 1555-10-0019 SEAL, LIP PTF SKFE SKF Each 1
10 10001220-001 G56491-3 OIL DEFLECTOR DM626 Each 1
11 10032557-034 7612022 WASHER, HI-COLLAR SPG LOCK 3/4 Each 6
12 10032444-208 3929-05-0014 SCRW,CAP;HD HEX;THRD SZ 3/4-10IN Each 6
13 10032557-016 1690-10-0008 Superseded by 10490016-020 Each 8
14 10032454-037 3219-05-0040 SCREW,CAP;3/8" DIA;5" LG;SOCKET Each 8
15 10032442-015 2013-10-0004 FHMS, #10-24 X 1/2 316SS Each 8
16 10032314-004 1315-25-0002 FITTING, GREASE 1/4 NPT Each 1
17 10032387-017 1320-05-0110 PLUG,PIPE;SZ 1/4;HEX HD;BLK Each 1
18 10032387-035 1320-05-0040 PLUG,PIPE;SKT HD;STL Each 3
19 10018318-001 1885-11-0015 LOCTITE, #242 BLUE Each 1
20 10005087-001 1885-11-0028 SEALANT, SILICONE GASKET Each 1
2 1
16
3 4
5 2
13 14 18 POSITION ITEM-2
15 18 10
WITH SLOT AT
TYP (8) PLCS TYP (8) PLCS 12 O'CLOCK
POSITION 6 7
B B
NOTES: A
1. PLACE GASKET, ITEM 4, ONTO INNER BEARING CAP, ITEM 3.
USE SEALANT, ITEM 19, TO HOLD GASKET IN PLACE. NEXT
FILL BEARING CAP CAVITY 2/3 FULL WITH GREASE, ITEM 7,
THEN SLIDE ASSEMBLY ONTO SHAFT.
2. MEASURE SHAFT IN THREE LOCATIONS AROUND THE
CIRCUMFERENCE. DO THIS IN AT LEAST TWO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS AXIALLY. RECORD MEASURED DIMENSIONS.
3. NEXT, HEAT BEARING, ITEM 6, TO 230 DEG. F (110 DEG. C). PRESS
BEARING ONTO SHAFT (WITH BEARING MODEL NUMBER FACING
OUT) UNTIL BEARING SEATS AGAINST SHOULDER OF SHAFT.
ALLOW BEARING TO COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE
PROCEEDING FURTHER. A
4. AFTER BEARING HAS COOLED, FULLY HAND-PACK WITH GREASE, ITEM 7. 9
5. AFTER BEARING HAS BEEN PROPERLY GREASED, INSTALL END
FRAME, ITEM 1, USING AN X TIGHTENING PATTERN, TORQUE BOLTS
TO THE TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2.
6. HEAT SLEEVE, ITEM 9, UNTIL THE SLEEVE INNER DIAMETER IS
GREATER THAN THE SHAFT DIAMETER. PLACE SLEEVE IN OVEN, 19 1 11 12 18
OR USE INDUCTION HEATER. DO NOT USE A DIRECT FLAME TO TYP (8) PLCS
HEAT SLEEVE. SLEEVE TEMPERATURE SHOULD NOT EXCEED 17 POSITION ITEM-3
300 DEG. F (149 DEG.C). CAREFULLY SLIDE SLEEVE ONTO SHAFT SECTION A-A WITH SLOT AT
A UNTIL SLEEVE SEATS AGAINST BEARING RACE. HOLD IN POSITION SCALE 3/8 6 O'CLOCK POSITION A
UNTIL IT COOLS ENOUGH TO STAY IN POSITION. ALLOW SLEEVE TO ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
COOL TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE BEFORE PROCEEDING FURTHER. TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 6/9/2010 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
7. PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE OUTER BEARING CAP, ITEM 2, INSERT SEAL, .XXX ` .005 J. KROBOT NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
CHK 6/16/2010
ITEM 9, INTO BEARING CAP PER SEAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. .XX ` .020 HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
8. AFTER SEAL HAS BEEN PROPERLY INSTALLED, MOUNT BEARING CAP FINISH 125 APPVL
6/16/2010 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
ONTO END FRAME WITH GASKET, ITEM 5. TIGHTEN BOLTS OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, END FRAME NDE
USING AN X PATTERN PER TORQUE VALUE SPECIFIED ON SHEET 2. FRACTIONAL
6/16/2010 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
(CM632)
APPVL
9. AFTER FULLY ASSEMBLED, PUSH/PULL ON THE SHAFT AXIALLY BY TIR .010
HAND TO CHECK END PLAY. RECORD THE DISTANCE THAT THE ANGULAR FSCM No.
SHAFT MOVES AXIALLY. ` 1/2

REV DATE BY APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
52142
NEXT ASSY
NATIONAL
500
OILWELL
INDUSTRIAL
VARCO
BLVD.
1/8 B 1 OF 2
10. FORWARD RECORDED DATA FROM NOTES 2 AND 9 TO ENGINEERING. N/A SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
01
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
J. KROBOT NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
.XXX ` .005
CHK 6/16/2010
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, END FRAME NDE
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR (CM632)
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
1/8 B 2 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A 10504249-ASM 01
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
11/11/2013
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, End Frame NDE 320Fr
Revision: 01
Reference
1 10008338-001 G58177 END FRAME, MACH NDE CM632 Each 1
2 10504297-001 10504297-001 Cap, Bearing Outer Each 1
3 10004814-001 G45660-2 CAP, BRG INNER DE/NDE Each 1
4 10009471-001 G21806 GASKET, CAP INNER DE/NDE 626FR Each 1
5 10009478-001 G21814 GASKET, CAP OUTER DE/NDE 626FR Each 1
6 10032508-009 1030-20-0076 BEARING,BALL;150MM ID;320 MM OD; Each 1
7 10009669-001 1885-05-0013 GREASE, SHELL-CYPRINA Pound 1
10 10001220-001 G56491-3 OIL DEFLECTOR DM626 Each 1
11 10032557-034 7612022 WASHER, HI-COLLAR SPG LOCK 3/4 Each 6
13 10032557-016 1690-10-0008 Superseded by 10490016-020 Each 8
14 10032454-037 3219-05-0040 SCREW,CAP;3/8" DIA;5" LG;SOCKET Each 8
15 10032442-015 2013-10-0004 FHMS, #10-24 X 1/2 316SS Each 8
16 10032314-004 1315-25-0002 FITTING, GREASE 1/4 NPT Each 1
17 10032387-017 1320-05-0110 PLUG,PIPE;SZ 1/4;HEX HD;BLK Each 1
18 10018318-001 1885-11-0015 LOCTITE, #242 BLUE Each 1
19 10005087-001 1885-11-0028 SEALANT, SILICONE GASKET Each 1
TC Number: G97288:37 Printed REV: B Latest REV: B


1 of 1
9/21/2011
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, BEARING RTD DE
Legacy Number: G97288
Revision: B
Reference
1 10032548-051 6550-25-0040 BEARING SHIELDED LEADS Each 1
2 10032444-036 700010611 SCREW, HEX HD CAP 1/4-20 X 3/4 Each 1
3 10005338-001 G60803 CLIP, INS VINYL CLAD I/4DIA Each 1
4 10012333-001 G21649 MARKER, LEAD HEAT SHRINK RTD8 Each 1
6 10032326-018 G62017 TERMINAL,ELECTRICAL Each 3



1 of 1
4/30/2012
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, BEARING RTD NDE
Revision: B
Reference
1 10032548-051 6550-25-0040 BEARING SHIELDED LEADS Each 1
2 10032444-036 700010611 SCREW, HEX HD CAP 1/4-20 X 3/4 Each 1
3 10005338-001 G60803 CLIP, INS VINYL CLAD I/4DIA Each 1
4 10012326-001 G21642 MARKER, LEAD HEAT SHRINK RTD7 Each 1
5 10025207-001 60P009040001 CABLE, SHIELDED 3LD RTD Foot 4
6 10032326-018 G62017 TERMINAL,ELECTRICAL Each 3

2 1
39
42
8 7 6
(3)
5 3/4 (1/2)
2 7/16
3 TYP 13
B B
2 7/16
41 40
4 9 12 4 9 12
2 (6) (3) (3) (6) (3) (3)
14
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY SEE NOTE 3b
44
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY
DO NOT CHANGE OR REVISE

WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVA
SUB ASSEMBLY 2 FROM CERT. ENG
A SUB ASSEMBLY 1 A
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)
NOTES: DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005 J. VARGAS
NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
CHK 5/6/2013
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANTITY. .XX ` .020
04 7/10/2014 HAB BCM
HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
.X ` .060 H. TORRES NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) REFERENCE. FINISH 125 APPVL 5/7/2013
3a. POSITION BUS BARS (ITEM 39) IN BUS SUPPORT (ITEM 2)TO 03 3/13/2014 HAB SR
INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, CONNECTION BOX
K. HARWOOD DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
DIMENSION SHOWN. SEAL IN PLACE USING RESIN EPOXY FRACTIONAL APPVL 5/7/2013
WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
RIGHT/LEFT
` 1/16" 02 1/3/2014 HAB BCM THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
(ITEM 40 AND ITEM 41) WITH A 50/50 MIX. BUILD UP APPROXIMATELY TIR .010
B. MOATS HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
1/8 ALL AROUND BARS. ANGULAR FSCM No. SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
3b. ASSEMBLE BUS BARS (ITEMS 6,7, AND 8) AND LINKS (ITEM 13 AND ` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 1 OF 6
ITEM 14) WITH IDENTIFICATION POSITIONED AS SHOWN. 293 LBS SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
04
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
CONNECT BUS BARS LINKS

(ITEM 13 & ITEM 14) TO BUS 5 4 36 12 11 10 4 24 23 22 1
BARS PROTRUDING FROM (2.30)
(12) (12) (4) (4) (4) (2) (4) (4) (4) (4)
FRAME/STATOR AS SHOWN A B (1.17)
37
C C
B B
22 15 D
(12) (12)
33 32 30
(2) (2) (2)
31
A B
SECTION A-A FRONT VIEW SECTION B-B
NON DRIVE END
DRIVE END
W/ COVERS REMOVED FOR CLARITY
RIGHT CONNECTION POSITION SHOWN
A A
NOTES: TOLERANCE (U.N.)
DECIMAL
DWN 4/23/2013 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
J. VARGAS NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
4. INSERT GLASTIC TUBE (ITEM 36) INTO MOUNTING HOLES OF .XXX ` .005
CHK 5/6/2013
GLASTIC BUS SUPPORT (ITEM 10). .X ` .060
04 7/10/2014 HAB BCM
H. TORRES
NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
TITLE:
5. ROUTE RTD LEADS THRU CHANNEL ON BOTTOM AND CONNECT FINISH 125 APPVL 5/7/2013
03 3/13/2014 HAB SR
TO TERMINAL BLOCKS (ITEM 20). K. HARWOOD DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR RIGHT/LEFT
6. CHASE ALL THREADED HOLES PRIOR TO MOUNTING COVERS, ETC. FRACTIONAL
` 1/16" 02 1/3/2014 HAB BCM
APPVL 5/7/2013 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
B. MOATS
APPLY THREAD SEALANT (ITEM 3) TO STEEL FASTENERS. TIR .010
HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
ANGULAR FSCM No.
7. TORQUE ALL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 6. ` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 2 OF 6
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 293 LBS 10738912-ASM 04
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
RTD1-R
RTD, STATOR 18 17 19 20 43
RTD1-W
PHASE A (2) (2) (35) (2)
RTD1-W
RTD2-R
RTD, STATOR SEE
RTD2-W DETAIL E
PHASE B
RTD2-W
RTD3-R 37 11 36 38 4 5
RTD, STATOR
RTD3-W REF REF REF (2) (2)
B PHASE C B
RTD3-W
RTD4-R SEE NOTE 8
RTD4-W RTD, STATOR
PHASE A
RTD4-W
RTD5-R
RTD5-W RTD, STATOR
PHASE B
RTD5-W
RTD6-R
RTD, STATOR
RTD6-W
PHASE C
RTD6-W
NON DRIVE END DRIVE END
SECTION C-C
RTD7-R
BEARING 21 16 DETAIL D 15 22
RTD7-W RTD NDE (BEARING AND STATOR RTD'S) (2) (2)
RTD7-W RTD WIRE
RTD8-R 50
BEARING SEE NOTE 10
RTD8-W
A RTD DE A
RTD8-W ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10738912-001)
SCHEMATIC TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 4/23/2013 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
RTD TERMINAL DETAIL E DECIMAL

.XXX ` .005 J. VARGAS
CHK 5/6/2013
` .020 HEREINAFTER AS "NOV"). IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
SCALE: 6/1 .XX
.X ` .060
04 7/10/2014 HAB BCM PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF TITLE:
H. TORRES NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
NOTES: TYP (24) PLCS FINISH 125
03 3/13/2014 HAB SR
APPVL 5/7/2013
8. LEAVE A 2 FOOT SERVICE LOOP FOR RTD LEAD CABLE. K. HARWOOD DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR RIGHT/LEFT
FRACTIONAL APPVL 5/7/2013
9. APPLY PUTTY TO ALL BOLTED JOINTS AND HALF LAP BUS BARS ` 1/16" 02 1/3/2014 HAB BCM
WITH TAPE; THEN APPLY DRY VARNISH. THIS IS TO BE DONE TIR .010
ANGULAR
ONCE ALL CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE MOTORS
INTERNAL BUS BARS.
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 3 OF 6
10. CRIMP FERRULE (ITEM 50) PER MP1272. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 293 LBS 10738912-ASM 04
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
34
29 4
(3)
(36) (36)
35
(3)
28 27
(2) (2)
B B
TOP VIEW 45
TYP TOP AND BOTTOM (2)
29 4
(22) (22) 25 26
45
REF
A A
TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 4/23/2013
NOTES: DECIMAL
J. VARGAS
11. CENTER LABLES ON FRONT, TOP, AND BOTTOM COVERS AS SHOWN.

.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/6/2013
FINISH 125 APPVL 5/7/2013
03 3/13/2014 HAB SR

RIGHT/LEFT
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 4 OF 6
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
B B
ISOMETRIC VIEWS
W/ COVERS REMOVED FOR CLARITY
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/6/2013
03 3/13/2014 HAB SR

RIGHT/LEFT
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 5 OF 6
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]
B 1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96] B
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/6/2013
03 3/13/2014 HAB SR

RIGHT/LEFT
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 6 OF 6
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 2
7/23/2014
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, CONN BOX RIGHT/LEFT
Revision: 04
Reference
1 10738907-001 10738907-001 CONN BOX, ASSY. RIGHT/LEFT Each 1
2 10020358-001 G12612 SUPPORT, BUS BAR Each 1
3 10018324-001 1885-11-0048 SEALANT, VIBRATITE #3 1OZ Each 1
4 10032353-010 1690-30-0001 WASHER, COMPRSSN 3/8 X .089 ZP Each 88
6 10004417-001 G56201 BUS BAR, PHASE 1 Each 1
10 10020360-001 G12614 SUPPORT, BUS BAR Set 2
11 10744859-001 10744859-001 All-Thread, 3/8SS Foot 4
12 10744860-001 10744860-001 Locknut, 3/8-16UNC SS Each 10
13 10004420-001 G56204 BUS BAR, LINK T1 & T3 Each 2
14 10004421-001 G56205 BUS BAR, LINK T2 Each 1
15 10490361-079 50004-08-C5 SCREW,CAP-HEX HD 1/4-20 X 1 GR5 Each 14
16 10506200-001 10506200-001 Bracket, Terminal Block Each 1
17 10622232-001 10622232-001 Channel, Din Rail Each 1
18 10032438-040 2411-06-0003 SCREW,MACHINE;SZ #8-32 X 3/8;BTT Each 2
19 10042030-001 0000-6934-67 COVER, TERMINAL PHOENIX CONTAC Each 1
20 10032308-007 6176-20-0085 BLOCK, TERM PHONIX Each 35
21 10506026-001 10506026-001 Tag, Terminal RTD Only Each 1
22 10032353-015 1690-30-0009 WASHER, COMPRSSN 1/4 X 9/16 ZP Each 18
24 10025799-001 6690-60-0030 CLAMP, CABLE 3/8'' NYL .265HOLE Each 4

2 of 2
7/23/2014
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, CONN BOX RIGHT/LEFT
Revision: 04
Reference
25 10009434-001 G12615 GASKET, FRAME COVER CONN BOX Each 1
26 10902458-001 10902458-001 COVER, CONNECTION BOX FRONT SS Each 1
27 10009494-001 G21833 GASKET, BOTTOM COVER Each 2
28 10006338-001 G140121 COVER, CONNECTION BOX BOTTOM Each 2
30 10032326-009 6175-89-0054 TERMINAL, RING #2 Each 2
31 10032300-018 6690-40-0036 CABLE;2AWG;600V;1;COPPER;GREEN Foot 1
32 10032538-008 1690-01-0038 WASHER, PLAIN 3/8 SS 3/4OD Each 2
34 10013430-001 6525-58-0084 NAMEPLATE, HIGH VOLTAGE (VYL) Each 3
35 10011295-001 6525-58-0091 LABEL, HAZARDOUS VOLT WARNING Each 3
36 10032329-036 1322-30-0005 TUBING;SZ 0.390ID X 0.452 Foot 3 4 PIECES @ 10" LG
37 10515972-001 10515972-001 Gasket, Top Cover Each 1
38 10520285-001 10520285-001 Gasket, Connection Box Spacer Each 1
39 10004586-001 G56890 BUS BAR, T1 Each 3
10008379-001/01.02@RSOne-RESIN,
40 EPOXY 1885-02-0010
VERSAMID 140 x 1RESIN, EPOXY VERSAMID 140 Gallon 1
41 10008380-001 1885-02-0011 RESIN, EPOXY EPON 826 Gallon 1
42 10019142-001 6690-12-0066 SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL;HEATSHRINK TUB Foot 1
43 10025374-001 6176-32-0008 CLAMP, CHANNEL TERM BLOCK Each 2
44 10019137-001 6690-12-0054 SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL;HEATSHRINK TUB Foot 1
45 10032388-001 1320-05-0111 PLUG, PIPE 3/4 SKT HD SS Each 2
50 10942172-001 10942172-001 Ferrule, Non-Insulated Each 24

2 1
SEE SHEET 3 MOUNTING HARWARE 1

FOR LEAD SUPPLIED WITH T-BOX
CONNECTIONS
2 3
REF
10 11 12
(10) (10)
B (2 3/4) B
SEE NOTE 7
SEE DETAIL A
SEE NOTE 11
ISOMETRIC 6 9
REF ONLY 5 13
REF REF
NOTES: SEE NOTE 8
1. SLEEVE HEATER CABLE WITH 0.387 I.D. SLEEVING PRE ASSEMBLE
(ITEM 9) FROM HEATER CABLE GLAND TO PLATE (ITEM 2). 6
SEE NOTE 5
2. ROUTE HEATER LEADS AS SHOWN INTO
HEATER AUXILIARY BOX.
3. FULLY TIGHTEN ALL SCREWS TERMINALS AND SEE SHEET 3
TERMINALTION POINTS INCLUDED WITH HEATER.
4. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON
8 7 FOR LEAD CONNECTIONS
SHEET 4.
5. PRE-ASSEMBLE (ITEMS 5,6 & 7) AS SHOWN ON DETAIL A. DETAIL A
A SCALE 7/16 A
6. FILL WITH PACKING FIBER (COMES WITH ITEM 8) AFTER ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)
RUNNING HEATER WIRES THROUGH. TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 12/5/2007 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
7. TIGHTEN ELBOW PIPE (ITEM 7) INTO NIPPLE ON PLATE DECIMAL CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
(ITEM 6) UNTIL DISTANCE FROM COVER (ITEM 2) .XXX ` .005

Seitz Mike
CHK 12/13/2007
SUBSIDIARIES (ALL COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO
.XX ` .020 C 11/26/2013 HAT RIH
TO CENTER OF HUB (ITEM 5) AND ELBOW (ITEM 7) B.KROBOT
TITLE:
` .060 USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS
IS 2-3/4 INCHES. .X
APPVL 12/13/2007 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
INSTALLATION,
FINISH 125 B 1/20/2011 JCD BCM OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
8. APPLY THREAD SEALANT (ITEM 12) TO BOLTS H.PHAM DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR HEATER (1) 100W
PRIOR TO MOUNTING COVER PLATE TO FRAME. FRACTIONAL
A 10/17/2010 JK HT
` 1/16"
9. SEE OUTLINE FOR HEATER LOCATION. TIR .010
B.ISOM HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.

ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/4 B 1 OF 4
ESTIMATED WEIGHT NEXT ASSY DOCUMENT NUMBER: REVISION:
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 17.66 LBS G97546 C
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: G97546:37 Printed REV: C Latest REV: C
2 1
CENTER HEATER (9.13)

ON PLATE AS SHOWN
(2.26)
13
1 (3.63)
B B
(17.50)
6 9
SEE NOTE 5 SEE NOTE 1
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY HEATER MOUNTING
2
A A
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
Seitz Mike
CHK 12/13/2007
.XX ` .020 C 11/26/2013 HAT RIH PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF TITLE:
B.KROBOT NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
.X ` .060 USE OF THIS DESIGN OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS
APPVL 12/13/2007
FINISH 125 B 1/20/2011 JCD BCM
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION,
H.PHAM DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON

HEATER (1) 100W
` 1/16"
A 10/17/2010 JK HT THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/4 B 2 OF 4
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
(1) LEAD- BROWN

(1) LEAD- BLUE
B B
(1) LEAD- GREEN B
HEATER BOX
NOTES: WITH COVER REMOVED
10. BROWN AND BLUE LEADS TO BE CONNECTED ON
OPPOSITE SIDE FROM TERMINAL BLOCK LABELS. DETAIL B
BROWN INLINE LABEL 1, BLUE INLINE LABEL 2. LEAD CONNECTIONS
GREEN, TOP OR BOTTOM GROUND CONNECTION.
A A
11. SEAL THE ELBOW (ITEM 7) USING SEALING COMPOUND (ITEM 8) PER MP-1261. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10010679-001)
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
Seitz Mike
CHK 12/13/2007
APPVL 12/13/2007

HEATER (1) 100W
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/4 B 3 OF 4
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
DECIMAL
.XXX ` .005
Seitz Mike
CHK 12/13/2007
APPVL 12/13/2007

HEATER (1) 100W
` 1/16"
TIR .010
ANGULAR
` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
1/4 B 4 OF 4
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
12/19/2013
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, HEATER CAGE MOTOR
Revision: C
Reference
1 10032318-003 6550-10-0069 HEATER, SELF LIMITING Each 1
2 10006322-001 G140073 COVER, HEATER MOUNTING Each 1
3 10003350-001 G55738-3 BOX, TERMINAL MOD HEATERS Each 1
5 10009946-001 1225-07-0016 HUB, ENTRY 3/4 INCREASE SAFETY Each 1
6 10032382-012 1313-39-0069 NIPPLE,PIPE;SZ 3/4 X CLOSE SCH40 Each 2
7 10032377-021 1322-05-0051 ELBW,PIPE;3/4IN;NPT;SEAL Each 1
8 10005636-001 1885-02-0015 COMPOUND, SEALING POUCH Each .2
9 10019180-001 G91960387 SLEEVE,ELECTRICAL Foot 1
10 10490016-020 50906-C LOCKWASHER, SPLIT, 3/8" DIA Each 10
12 10018324-001 1885-11-0048 SEALANT, VIBRATITE #3 1OZ Each .05
13 10515973-001 10515973-001 Gasket, Top Cover Each 1



TC Number: 10626766-DAD Printed REV: 03 Latest REV: 03


2 1
A A 4 1
SHT 2 SHT 2
2 3 (8) (2) 5 3/8 TYP
REF REF SEE NOTE 5 7/8 TYP
4
(4)
B 2 3 B
REF REF
3 2
(5) (6)
2
REF
1/4 1/4
N.D.E. D.E. D.E. N.D.E.

4 7 7 4
(4) (4)
NOTES: RIGHT HAND BOX MOUNTING SHOWN

1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANITY. SEE TOP LEVEL MOTOR BOM
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE. FOR CONNECTION BOX LOCATION
3. LOCATE LABELS & TAGS (ITEMS 1, 2, 3, & 7) AS SHOWN. LEFT HAND BOX MOUNTING MIRROR IMAGE
A CENTER LABLES (ITEMS 2 & 3) ON COVERS AS SHOWN. A
MARK HOLE LOCATIONS FOR "NOV" PLATE (ITEM 1) AND GROUND NAMEPLATE (ITEM 7). ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10010728-001)
DRILL #37 DIAMETER HOLES, TYPICAL (4) PLACES, AND INSTALL TOLERANCE (U.N.)
D 10/23/2013 HAT BCM
DWN 7/13/2008 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
DECIMAL CONFIDENTAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 4). .XXX ` .005 Seitz Mike NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO
CHK 9/26/2008
4. PRIOR TO INSTALLING MOTOR NAMEPLATE, STAMP MOTOR SERIAL .XX ` .020 C 9/24/2013 HAT BCM
NATIONAL-OILWELL, LP.REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE
OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR TITLE:
.X ` .060 B. KROBOT DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
NUMBER ON FRAME UNDER NAMEPLATE LOCATION. ALSO FINISH 125 APPVL
9/26/2008 CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
STAMP MOTOR SERIAL NUMBER ON DRIVE & NON DRIVE FEET. B 5/21/2013 HAT BCM DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL- INSTALLATION,
J. MCGUANE OILWELL, L.P. UPON REQUEST AND IN ANY EVENT
5. LOCATE MOTOR, ATEX, & HEATER PLATE AS SHOWN. SEE FRACTIONAL APPVL
NAMEPLATE & TAGS
` 1/16" A 4/19/2013 HAT BCM CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN IS THE
TOP MOTOR BOM TO DETERMINE CORRECT ORIENTATION TIR .010
B. MOATS COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
BASED UPON LEFT OR RIGHT CONNECTION BOX MOUNTING. ANGULAR FSCM No.
MARK HOLE LOCATIONS AND DRILL #37 DIAMETER HOLES ` 1/2

REV DATE BY APPVL
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
52142
NEXT ASSY
POWER
500
SOLUTIONS
INDUSTRIAL
GROUP
BLVD.
1/8 B 1 OF 3
DRAWING NUMBER: REVISION:
TYPICAL (12) PLACES AND INSTALL WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 4). N/A = LBS SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
D
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING G97379-3
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: G97379-3:37 Printed REV: D Latest REV: D
2 1
PRIOR TO INSTALLATION,
5 3/8 STAMP MODEL, SERIAL NUMBER, 5 6
7/8 TYP
TYP AND YEAR ONTO NAMEPLATE (2)
PER SALES OR WORK ORDER SEE NOTE 6
1/4
B B
4
(4)
SEE NOTE 5 1/4
4
(4) 1/4
REFER TO
TOP LEVEL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, STAMP
BILL OF MATERIAL 4 DETAIL B
SERIAL NUMBER ON NAMEPLATE
IF REQUIRED SCALE: 3/8
(2) PER SALES OR WORK ORDER
A 3 2 VIEW A-A (TOP VIEW) A
REF REF TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 7/13/2008 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
DECIMAL D 10/23/2013 HAT BCM CONFIDENTAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
Seitz Mike NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
NOTES: .XXX ` .005
CHK 9/26/2008
.XX ` .020 NATIONAL-OILWELL, LP.REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE
C 9/24/2013 HAT BCM OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR TITLE:
6. LOCATE NAMEPLATE (ITEM 5) CENTERED ABOVE MOTOR & .X ` .060 B. KROBOT DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
ATEX NAMEPLATE. MARK HOLE LOCATIONS & B 5/21/2013 HAT BCM
CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL- INSTALLATION,
DRILL #37 DIA THRU TYPICAL (2) PLACES & INSTALL FRACTIONAL 9/26/2008
UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR WHICH IT WAS NAMEPLATE & TAGS
APPVL LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND THE INFORMATION
NAMEPLATE WITH DRIVE SCREWS (ITEM 6). ` 1/16" A 4/19/2013 HAT BCM
B. MOATS
COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
TIR .010
7. DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE. ANGULAR FSCM No. SCALE: PROJECTION: SIZE: SHEET:
8. IDENTIFY PART WITH PART NUMBER & REVISION, ` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP
1/8 B 2 OF 3
(EX:1XXXXXXX-XXX/REVXX) USING THE APPROPRIATE TAG.. DRAWING NUMBER: REVISION:
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A = LBS G97379-3 D
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
1/2 1/2
B B
7 4
(4)
4 7
(4)
ISOMETRIC
DRIVE END REF ONLY
A A
DECIMAL D 10/23/2013 HAT BCM CONFIDENTAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
Seitz Mike NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.IT IS LOANED FOR LIMITED
.XXX ` .005
CHK 9/26/2008
.XX ` .020 NATIONAL-OILWELL, LP.REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE
C 9/24/2013 HAT BCM OR IN PART, OR USE OF THIS DESIGN OR TITLE:
.X ` .060 B. KROBOT DISTRIBUTION OF THIS INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS
B 5/21/2013 HAT BCM
CONSENT OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.THIS
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NATIONAL- INSTALLATION,

NAMEPLATE & TAGS
` 1/16" A 4/19/2013 HAT BCM CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED HEREIN IS THE
B. MOATS COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NATIONAL-OILWELL, L.P.
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
NEXT ASSY
52142 POWER SOLUTIONS GROUP
1/8 B 3 OF 3
DRAWING NUMBER: REVISION:
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A = LBS G97379-3 D
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
10/25/2013
NOV Sugar Land
INSTL, NAMEPLATE & TAGS
Legacy Number: G97379-3
Revision: D
Reference
1 10013471-001 G20190 NAMEPLATE, NOV LOGO Each 2
2 10859965-001 10859965-001 Tag, Danger/Hazardous Voltage Each 6
3 10859963-001 10859963-001 Tag, Danger/Hazardous Voltage Each 5
4 10032453-001 1060-10-0002 SCREW, DR 4 X 1/4 TY U SS Each 32
5 10666074-001 10666074-001 UHF NAMEPLATE, RIGMS-RFID Each 1
6 10490351-043 53301-4-8-SS SCREW,DRIVE-TYPE U Each 2
7 10013306-001 54322 NAMEPLATE, GROUND Each 4

0518
ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Gb Tamb. -40 to +55 C

0518
ll 2 G Ex e ll T3 Gb Tamb. -40 to +55 C

2 1
(36.50) (11.18) WELD (4) PLCS

1/4 6 095-105-2
(18.25) 2.88
TYP 1
A (3.63) 2 (7.44)
B B
SEE NOTE 5
A
CONNECTION END DRIVE END
SECTION A-A
NOTE:
SEE SHT 2 FOR "T1" / "T3" BUS BAR MOUNTING
SEE SHT 3 FOR "T2" BUS BAR MOUNTING
NOTE:
RIGHT HAND POSITION SHOWN
MIRROR IMAGE ABOUT VERTICAL CENTERLINE
FOR LEFT HAND POSITION
CONNECTION END SEE TOP LEVEL OF BOM FOR CONNECTION BOX

DO NOT CHANGE OR REVISE
RIGHT CONNECTION BOX POSITION SHOWN POSITION
WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL
FROM CERT. ENG
A NOTES: (PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)
A
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATE QUANTITY. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE. DECIMAL CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION WHICH BELONGS TO
Seitz Mike NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
3. REMOVE EXCESS VARNISH FROM STATOR CORE AND RTD LEADS. .XXX ` .005
CHK 4/18/2008
PRIOR TO INSERTION OF STATOR, INSPECT FRAME STATOR BORE PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF TITLE:
.X ` .060 L. SPANGLE NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
AND O.D. OF STATOR. IF NECESSARY HEAT FRAME PRIOR TO FINISH 125 APPVL 4/18/2008 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
ASSEMBLY, FRAME/STATOR & CORE
STATOR INSERTION. B. MOATS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
REQUEST OR UPON COMPLETION OF THE USE FOR (632 FRAME)
4. INSERT STATOR CORE (ITEM 2) INTO FRAME (ITEM 1) FROM ` 1/16" 06 12/9/2023 HAT BCM
B. ISOM HEREIN IS THE COPYRIGHTED PROPERTY OF NOV.
CONNECTION END AND PRESS TO SHOULDER IN FRAME. TIR .010
ANGULAR
CENTER LEADS ON STATOR CORE AT 12 O'CLOCK.
5. TACK WELD STATOR SUPPORT TO FRAME BARS WHERE ACCESSIBLE.
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 1 OF 5
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 4771 LBS G93277 06
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: G93277:37 Printed REV: 06 Latest REV: 06
2 1
SHT 4 SHT 4
16 15 12 11 10 8 7 16 18
D D (12) (12) (12) (24) (2)
18 16 15 13 12 11 8
B (2) (4) (4) (8)
T3 T2 T1
B B

B SECTION B-B
CONNECT LEADS MARKED "1" & "6" TO "T1" ("T1" & "T3" BUS BARS)
CONNECT LEADS MARKED "3" & "5" TO "T3"
A
NOTES: (Cont.) A
6. MOUNT BUS LINKS (ITEM 13 AND ITEM 14) TO BUS ASSEMBLY USING (PART NUMBER: 10022979-001)
HARDWARE (ITEMS 8,11, AND 12), HAND TIGHTEN ONLY. MOUNT BUS TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 3/3/2008 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
BARS (ITEM 7) TO BUS LINKS USING HARDWARE (ITEMS 8,11, AND 12) DECIMAL
Seitz Mike
AND HAND TIGHTEN ONLY. USE COPPER SHIM STOCK IF REQUIRED. .XXX ` .005
CHK 4/18/2008
POSITION AND INSTALL INSULATORS (ITEM 4 AND ITEM 6) USING .X ` .060 L. SPANGLE NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
HARDWARE (ITEMS 3, 5, 8, AND 9) SEE SHEET #4. FINISH 125 APPVL 4/18/2008 INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS ASSEMBLY, FRAME/STATOR & CORE
7. CONNECT ALL LEAD LUGS (ITEM 10) TO BUS BARS USING HARDWARE B. MOATS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
(ITEMS 8, 11, AND 12). ` 1/16" 06 12/9/2023 HAT BCM THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
8. TIGHTEN ALL BUS BAR HARDWARE AND APPLY PUTTY (ITEM 15) TO TIR .010
BOLTED JOINTS. HALF LAP BUS BARS WITH TAPE (ITEM 16) THEN APPLY ` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
3/16 B 2 OF 5
AIR VARNISH (ITEM 18). TORQUE BOLTS PER CHART ON SHEET 5. ESTIMATED WEIGHT NEXT ASSY
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
16 15 12 11 10 8
(6) (6) (6) (12) 7 16 18
C 18 16 15 14 12 11 8
(1) (2) (2) (4)
T3 T2 T1
B B
C SECTION C-C
("T2" BUS BAR)
CONNECT LEADS MARKED "2" & "4" TO "T2"
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 4/18/2008
B. MOATS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
` 1/16" 06 12/9/2023 HAT BCM THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 3 OF 5
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
5 6
(2) (2)
9 8
B B
3 4
DETAIL E
CONNECTION END VIEW D-D DRIVE END
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 4/18/2008
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 4 OF 5
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 4/18/2008
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/16 B 5 OF 5
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
12/19/2013
NOV Sugar Land
ASSY, FRAME STTR&COIL
Revision: 06
Reference
1 10019932-001 G83335 FRAME, MACHINING 632FR Each 1
2 10019810-001 G82501 STA&COIL, 632FR Each 1
3 10032267-003 1640-02-0018 STUD, ALL THD 3/8-16 X 3/4'' LG Each 1
4 10010952-001 1825-01-0014 INSULATOR,ELECTRICAL Each 1
5 10003220-001 1640-02-0025 BOLT,STUD;SZ 3/8-16 X 1-1/4 Each 2
6 10010953-001 1825-01-0015 INSULATOR,ELECTRICAL Each 2
7 10004416-001 G56200 BUS BAR, T1,T2 & T3 Each 3
8 10032353-010 1690-30-0001 WASHER, COMPRSSN 3/8 X .089 ZP Each 49
10 10025319-001 6175-87-0063 TERM, RING #1/0 3/8H Each 18
12 10567492-001 1420-13-0004 LOCKNUT, HEX 3/8-16UNC-2B STL Each 24
13 10009748-001 G56898 BAR;BUS SUPPORT T1/T3 Each 2
14 10004592-001 G56899 BAR, BUS SUPPORT T2 Each 1
15 10008383-001 1885-11-0017 SEALANT, DUCT COMPOUND #1 BAG Pound 1
16 10020897-001 1885-10-0046 TAPE, SILICONE RUB .020TK RED Each 1
18 10032356-004 1885-06-0008 PAINT, SPRAY CLR VARNISH #600 Each 1

2 1
15 7 6 3 1 6 7 12
(10) (10) (14) (14)
B B
DE NDE
14 7 6 5 2 6 7 13
(10) (10) (12) (12)
OPPISITE SIDE OF OPPISITE SIDE OF
AUXILIARY RTD BOX MAIN CONNECTION BOX
4
ISOMETRIC
REF ONLY
(2)
DE NDE
A A
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (EBS: 10010116-001)
DOBROWOLSKI NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/9/2006
NOTES: .X ` .060
FINISH 125
C 9/20/2010 JK HT
R. RAMIREZ
APPVL 5/9/2006
TITLE:
1. APPLY THREAD SEALANT, ITEM 10, TO HARDWARE B 8/13/2010 JCD BCM OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS
INSTALLATION, ACCESS COVERS
M. SEITZ DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
BEFORE ASSEMBLY. FRACTIONAL APPVL 5/9/2006
2. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 2. ` 1/16" A 10/24/2006 TB BI THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
NEXT ASSY
3/32 B 1 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING G97331 C
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
DOBROWOLSKI NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/9/2006
C 9/20/2010 JK HT PURPOSES ONLY AND REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF TITLE:
.X ` .060 R. RAMIREZ NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
B 8/13/2010 JCD BCM
M. SEITZ
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON INSTALLATION, ACCESS COVERS
` 1/16" A 10/24/2006 TB BI THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
3/32 B 2 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING G97331 C
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1of1
11/8/2013
BillofMaterialEngineering
NOVSugarLand
INSTL,COVERASSY
PartNumber: 10010116001
LegacyNumber: G97331
Revision: C
Reference
ItemNo. OracleNo. LegacyNo. Description UOM Quantity Designator
1 10006561001 G48357 COVER,TOPNDE Each 1
2 10006563001 G48358 COVER,SIDE628FR Each 1
3 10006565001 G48359 COVER,TOPDE Each 1
4 10032388002 1320051018 PLUG,PIPE;SZ1/2;SKTHD;SS Each 2
5 10006616001 G48674 COVER,RTDBOXOPENING Each 1
6 10032444091 3919050006 SCRW,CAP;HDHEX;THRDSZ3/816IN Each 46
7 10032560028 7600024 Supersededby10490015131 Each 46
10 10018324001 1885110048 SEALANT,VIBRATITE#31OZ Each 1
12 10515971001 10515971001 Gasket,TopCover Each 1

2 1
(6 11/16) (40 3/4)
(1 1/2)
4 1
(13 1/4)
2 3 5
(REF)
FRAME (10) (10)
B B
17 5/8
(47 1/2)
NON DRIVE END DRIVE END VIEW FACING DRIVE END

A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 1/8/2007
.X ` .060 R.RAMIREZ NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
NOTES: FINISH 125 APPVL 1/4/2007
A.CARDIEL
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON INSTALLATION, HOOD (DRIVE END)
1. NUMBER IN ( ) DESIGNATES QUANTITY. FRACTIONAL APPVL 1/4/2007 WHICH IT WAS LOANED. THIS DOCUMENT AND
` 1/16" A 5/13/2010 JCD N.B. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE. TIR .010

3. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET #2. ANGULAR
4. APPLY SMALL AMOUNT OF SEALANT (ITEM-5) TO ALL SCREW

` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
1/8 B 1 OF 2
THREADS PRIOR TO INSERTION. SUGAR LAND, TEXAS 77478
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING LBS G97125 A
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
TC Number: G97125:37 Printed REV: A Latest REV: A
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]

B B
1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96]
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 1/8/2007
A.CARDIEL
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON INSTALLATION, HOOD (DRIVE END)
` 1/16" A 5/13/2010 JCD N.B. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
1/8 B 2 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING LBS G97125 A
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1of1
11/8/2013
BillofMaterialEngineering
NOVSugarLand
INSTL,AIREXHAUSTTOP
PartNumber: 10010372001
LegacyNumber: G97125
Revision: A
Reference
ItemNo. OracleNo. LegacyNo. Description UOM Quantity Designator
1 10007011001 G57391 HOOD,AIRDUCTEXHAUSTTOP Each 1
2 10032444091 3919050006 SCRW,CAP;HDHEX;THRDSZ3/816IN Each 10
3 10032557016 1690100008 Supersededby10490016020 Each 10
4 10005087001 1885110028 SEALANT,SILICONEGASKET Each 1
5 10018318001 1885110015 LOCTITE,#242BLUE Each 1




1 of 1
11/27/2012
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, Pressure Switch
Revision: 02
Reference
1 10501947-001 10501947-001 Switch, Pressure Each 1
2 10032557-014 50904-C WASHER, LOCK-REGULAR 1/4 CAD Each 4
3 10032454-017 3215-05-0004 SCREW,CAP;1/4" DIA;1/2" LG;SOCKE Each 4
4 10032368-004 1322-03-0088 BUSHING,PIPE;REDUCER;SZ 1/2M TO Each 2
5 10032377-020 1321-07-0004 ELBOW,PIPE;SZ 90 1/8NPTM-#4;90;N Each 2
6 10032352-002 1321-09-0037 FITTING;SZ 1/8NPTM-#4;SZ NPTM;SZ Each 2
7 10032509-007 G21614 FITTING, #4JIC #4 HOSE Each 2
8 10009842-001 G31438 HOSE;PUSH-LOK;BUNA-N;blue Foot 8
9 10032304-012 6690-60-0035 CLAMP, VYL COAT 1/2''SZ 3/8STUD Each 3
11 10032377-025 G21615 ELBOW,PIPE;SZ 90 SWVL #4JIC-#4;9 Each 2

2 1
Parts List
ITEM QTY UOM ITEM NUMBER DOCUMENT NO. MATERIAL / DESCRIPTION
1 1 EA 10026682-001 G56528 SHEAVE, DRIVE HUB (TAPERED)
2 - - - PER BOM (REF) SHAFT, MACHINING
(4.850) (4.850)
GAGE LINE GAGE LINE
1 1
B A B B
2
2
REF
REF
n(5.650)
n(5.650)
GAGE LINE GAGE LINE
A B
SECTION A-A SECTION B-B
VIEW A VIEW B
HUB ARRANGEMENT HUB ARRANGEMENT
A A
.XXX ` .005
CHK 7/28/2006
.XX ` .020
INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH- INSTALLATION, DRIVE HUB
B 8/3/2010 JB BLD
NOTES: A.CARDIEL
DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON
(TAPERED)
1. MOUNT HUB PER MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE MP-1247.
FRACTIONAL
A 3/12/2007 MAS BI
FOR 5.65" DIAMETER SHAFT
` 1/16"
2. TAPER ON SHAFT AND HUB: 1.25 IN/FT. TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
BY APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
5/16 B 1 OF 1
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING N/A = LBS G97318 B
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1
(17 3/8)
SEE NOTE 6
3 4
(14) (14)
B
2 B
1
(19 1/2)
5 6
(14) (14)
8 TOP COVER GASKET

(2)
7 DRIVE END
SEE NOTE 5
(2)
NON DRIVE END

DRIVE END
ISOMETRIC
A
NOTES: REF ONLY A
1. NUMBERS IN ( ) DESIGNATES QUANTITY. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED. (PART NUMBER: 10746842-001)
2. DIMENSIONS IN ( ) ARE REFERENCE. TOLERANCE (U.N.) DWN 5/13/2013 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY AND
3. TORQUE ALL STEEL FASTENERS PER TABLE ON SHEET 2. DECIMAL
H. TASSEW
4. APPLY SMALL AMOUNT OF SEALANT (ITEM 9) TO ALL SCREW .XXX ` .005
CHK 5/13/2013
THREADS PRIOR TO INSERTION. .X ` .060 DOBROWOLSKI NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
5/13/2013
5. REMOVE TOP COVER, NON DRIVE END (10006561-001) PRIOR TO FINISH 125
03 7/7/2014 HAB BCM
APPVL INFORMATION TO OTHERS IS NOT PERMITTED WITH-
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, BLOWER
INSTALLING BLOWER ASSEMBLY. K. HARWOOD DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO NOV UPON

20HP
6. SEE TOP LEVEL MOTOR SPECIFICATION FOR BLOWER ` 1/16" 02 6/14/2013 HAT BCM THE INFORMATION CONTAINED AND REPRESENTED
ASSEMBLY PART NUMBER. TIR .010
7. IDENTIFY PART WITH PART NUMBER & REVISION, ` 1/2
REV DATE BY APPVL
5/64 B 1 OF 2
(EX:1XXXXXXX-XXX/REVXX) USING THE APPROPRIATE TAG. ESTIMATED WEIGHT NEXT ASSY
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 10746842-ASM 03
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
2 1

#10-32 3.06 [4.15] #10-32 4.25 [5.76] #10-32 2.80 [3.80]
B 1/4-20 6.00 [8.13] 1/4-20 9.00 [12.20] 1/4-20 5.87 [7.96] B
3/8-16 22.50 [30.51] 3/8-16 33.75 [45.76] 3/8-16 21.50 [29.15]
7/16-14 37.50 [50.84] 7/16-14 52.50 [71.18] 7/16-14 25.30 [34.33]
1/2-13 56.25 [76.25] 1/2-13 82.50 [111.85] 1/2-13 52.38 [71.02]
5/8-11 112.50 [152.53] 5/8-11 165.00 [223.71] 5/8-11 104.28 [141.35]
3/4-10 195.00 [264.38] 3/4-10 285.00 [386.41] 3/4-10 184.94 [250.74]
1-8 480.00 [650.79] 1-8 675.00 [915.18] 1-8 455.24 [617.22]
M4 1.92 [2.60] M4 2.71 [3.67] M4 1.78 [2.41]
M6 6.56 [8.89] M6 9.26 [12.56] M6 6.08 [8.24]
M8 15.78 [21.40] M8 22.29 [30.22] M8 14.68 [19.83]
M 10 31.11 [42.18] M 10 43.92 [59.55] M 10 28.82 [39.08]
A A
H. TASSEW NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO, L.P., ITS AFFILIATES OR
.XXX ` .005
CHK 5/13/2013
.X ` .060 DOBROWOLSKI NOV. REPRODUCTION, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR
03 7/7/2014 HAB BCM
OUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT OF NOV. THIS INSTALLATION, BLOWER

20HP
TIR .010
` 1/2
REV DATE BY
ESTIMATED WEIGHT
APPVL
52142
NEXT ASSY
5/64 B 2 OF 2
DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 10746842-ASM 03
FORM No. 137-D
2 1
1 of 1
7/31/2014
NOV Sugar Land
Instl, Blower
Revision: 03
Reference
1 10532115-001 10532115-001 Fabrication, Blower Adapter Each 1
2 10532114-001 10532114-001 Gasket Each 1
3 10490361-594 50008-08-C5 Screw, Cap;Hex Head;0.500-13 UNC-2A;L 1 in;Fully
Each Threaded
14
4 10032557-018 50908-C WASHER, LOCK Each 14
5 10490361-340 50006-08-C5 SCREW,HEX HD CAP 3/8-16X1 GR5 Each 14
6 10490016-020 50906-C LOCKWASHER, SPLIT, 3/8" DIA Each 1
7 10032387-018 1320-05-0115 PLUG,PIPE;SOLID;SZ 3/4;HEX;ZP Each 4
8 10032388-007 1322-23-0004 PLUG, 1/2 SQ HD SS Each 2

SECTION 3
Installation, Care and
Operating Manual
LS-National Oilwell Pulsation Dampener

Type 107.132.00 SM
RIG/PLANT
REMARKS
CLIENT PO NUMBER
www.lsnoi.com
Document number 107.132.00SM
Revision 03
Page 2
REVISION HISTORY
01 Oct. 13,2005 Issued Li Jun Zhang Jian Wang YuanZ

02 July 26,2006 Required by Designer Li Jun Zhang Jian Wang YuanZ
03 July,3,2007 Required by NOV Li Jun Wang YingHua Wang YuanZ
CHANGE DESCRIPTION

02 The metric screws of the charging connector ,the presure gauge and the charging valve
were changed into inch.
03a Page 6,10 ---Change torque
03b Page 9.12,16---Change valve guard, pressure gage,caution tag and charging valve per
NOV requirement.
03c Part list been changed accordingly
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 3
PREFACE
LS-NOV makes no warranties of any kind, expressed or implied; including any warranty of
mechanical fitness for any particular purpose that the work performed pursuant to this
manual will be free from defects in workmanship or material.
LS-NOV retains for itself all proprietary rights in and to all designs, engineering details, data
and procedures set forth herein. This manual is intended for the sole use of LS-NOV
customers and they shall strictly control copying of same, as this manual and all copies
thereof may be recalled by LS-NOV at any time.
This manual makes recommendations only. The customer is at all times responsible for
actual disassembly, inspection, re-assembly and testing of the pulsation dampener body.
The customer is also solely responsible for providing competent and qualified persons;
equipment and facilities to perform such operations; and for workmanship and safety.
If at any time the customer is unable to understand the recommendations made in this
manual or is unable to follow those recommendations, they should consult the nearest LS-
NOV location.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 4
Contents
PREFACE.................................................................................................................................... 3
1 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Mounting ................................................................................................................... 6
1.2 Precharging (NITROGEN ONLY) ........................................................................... 6
2 DISASSEMBLY ................................................................................................................ 8
2.1 Disassembly Procedure.......................................................................................... 8
2.2 Cleaning and Inspection Procedure........................................................................ 9
3 ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................................... 10
3.1 Bottom Plate Gasket Installation........................................................................... 10
3.2 Bottom Plate Installation ....................................................................................... 10
3.3 Diaphragm Installation .......................................................................................... 10
3.4 Stabilizer Installation............................................................................................. 10
3.5 Cover Plate Installation......................................................................................... 11
3.6 Installation of Charging Valve ............................................................................... 11
3.7 Installation of Pressure Gauge ............................................................................. 11
3.8 Pressurize Pulsation Dampener ........................................................................... 12
4 MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 13
4.1 Precharge ............................................................................................................. 13
4.2 Low Precharge Effects.......................................................................................... 13
4.3 High Precharge Effects......................................................................................... 13
5 PRECHARGE ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................... 13
5.1 Precharge Low...................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Precharge High..................................................................................................... 14
6 PARTS ............................................................................................................................ 15
6.1 Pulsation Dampener Parts List (See Figure 6-1) .................................................. 15
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 5
1 INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not attempt to precharge pulsation dampener prior to mounting the unit into
the pump piping system.
The LS-NOV Pulsation Dampener should be mounted in the vertical position (refer to Figure
1-1 for mounting options) with the mating flange connection at the bottom. The discharge
dampener should be mounted as close as possible to the discharge port of the pump. If
possible, it is advantageous that the dampener be mounted in such a way that the fluid
stream is directed towards the fluid opening.
Horizontal Discharge Vertical Discharge

Dampener Dampener
Figure 1-1. Mounting Options
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 6
Nitrogen Bottle Charging Valve Hose Assy. Charging Valve.
Figure 1-2. Precharge Hookup

1.1 Mounting
1.1.1 Install stud bolts in the replaceable bottom plate.
1.1.2 Position dampener on gasket and mating flange so that the space between flange and
bottom connection is totally equal around the circumference.
1.1.3 Install one lubricated nut on each stud and tighten one turn at a time until dampener is
firmly in place. Assure that space between dampener and flange is equal.
1.1.4 Cross tighten nuts to the proper torque (appro. 1012 lb-ft or 1372 N.m).
1.2 Precharging (NITROGEN ONLY)

The correct precharge is vital for maximizing efficiency of the pulsation dampener. Generally,
precharge pressure is based on the average operating pressure of the system, but precharge can
be affected by other system parameters; for these applications, consult qualified LS-NOV
personnel for correct precharging instructions.
WARNING: ALWAYS PRECHARGE WITH ZERO PRESSURE ON THE SYSTEM AND ALWAYS
PRECHARGE WITH NITROGEN.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 7
1.2.1 General Precharging Instructions
1.2.1.1 The pressure gauge is located under the valve guard and is exposed by removing the
valve guard.
1.2.1.2 Before precharging the dampener make sure all cover stud nuts are tightened evenly and
charging valve and pressure gauge seal nuts are firmly seated on the dampener.
1.2.1.3 Precharging is accomplished by connecting one end of the charging hose assembly to a
standard commercially available NITROGEN bottle and the other end to the charging
valve located at the top of the pulsation dampener.
1.2.1.4 Precharge from a standard commercially available nitrogen bottle equipped with a
pressure regulator.
1.2.1.5 For those applications where higher precharge pressures are required, a gas booster
pump is available.
1.2.1.6 Open bottle regulator valve until recommended precharge pressure shows on regulator
gauge.
1.2.1.7 Slowly open charging valve on dampener. Allow pressure to increase in the dampener
until dampener pressure gauge reads the specified precharge
1.2.1.8 Close the charging valve and tighten. Then, close regulator valve at nitrogen bottle.
Remove charging hose, replace dust plug in charging valve.
1.2.2 Precharge Recommendations

For normal operating conditions, set the precharge pressure at 50 to 70 percent of the average
operating discharge pressure not to exceed 5000 PSI350kg/cm. The precharge pressure can
be as low as 30 percent or as high as 75 percent of system operating pressure. However, these
precharge settings may shorten diaphragm life.
1.2.3 Leak Detection

Apply leak detection fluid at all connections around valve, pressure gauge, cover, body contact
surfaces, and studs. Observe carefully for bubbles that indicate leaks. If any indications are found,
check system for loose connections and retighten. Allow the nitrogen gas in the dampener to
come to ambient conditions (approximately one-half hour) and recheck the precharge pressure.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 8
Adjust the precharge pressure as required. After precharge pressure has stabilized at specified
pressure, close valves, remove charging hose. Dampener is now ready for operation.
2 DISASSEMBLY
2.1 Disassembly Procedure

Refer to Figure 2-1.
2.1.1 Shut down pumps and remove system pressure from dampener.
2.1.2 Open charging valve and bleed off all precharge pressure. CAUTION: System and vessel
pressure must be at zero PSI before removing charging valve and pressure gauge or
loosening cover or flange bolts.
2.1.3 Remove pressure gauge from cover.
2.1.4 Check for system fluid in gauge and valve ports.
2.1.5 Loosen all cover stud nuts, but do not remove. Make sure the cover plate is not pushing
upwards against nuts. This would indicate that pressure has not been completely removed
from dampener.
2.1.6 After all pressure is removed from dampener, remove nuts from studs.
2.1.7 If dampener is equipped with a stabilizer, remove cap screw, lock washer and stabilizer
plate. Remove stabilizer so the diaphragm may be folded and removed from the body.
2.1.8 Pull neck portion of diaphragm loose from one side of dampener. Push bottom of
diaphragm down, fold diaphragm or place bar between dampener body and diaphragm
below the diaphragm mid-section to assist folding and removal of diaphragm from body.
2.1.9 If the bottom plate is to be removed for replacement or inspection, follow the procedure
below:
a. Verify cover is attached and all stud nuts are snug.
b. Remove all flange and stud nuts at bottom connection.
c. Remove dampener from flange connection. Set stud nuts and gaskets aside and save
for reinstallation.
d. Remove dirt and debris from bottom plate opening.
e. Remove socket head cap screws that hold bottom plate in place. Set aside and
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 9
save.
f. Remove bottom plate from dampener. Remove gasket and inspect for damage.
Set aside and save if reusable. Replace if damaged.
g. Inspect bottom plate for excessive pitting, corrosion or wear. If these conditions
exist, consult your nearest LS-NOV representative for corrective action.
2.2 Cleaning and Inspection Procedure
2.2.1 Flush diaphragm body, clean and remove scale and other foreign material.
2.2.2 Inspect inside of dampener body for excessive pitting. Corrosion or wear. If these
conditions exist, consult your nearest LS-NOV representative.
2.2.3 Mild pitting or scaling can be removed with application of light duty emery cloth. Inside of
dampener must be free of burrs and debris.
Figure 2-1. Typical 107.132.00 Pulsation Dampener Disassembly
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 10
3 ASSEMBLY
All metal surfaces of the cover plate, body, and bottom plate which come into contact with the
diaphragm must be cleaned carefully before reassembly. Scrape and wire brush all surfaces and
completely remove any foreign matter, rust or scale. Refer to Figure 3-1 while following the
procedure below.
3.1 Bottom Plate Gasket Installation

3.1.1 Place bottom plate gasket in groove of bottom plate.
3.2 Bottom Plate Installation
3.2.1 Insert bottom plate into body taking care not to pinch gasket and align counter bore holes
with tapped holes in body. Install socket head cap screws and tighten evenly until bottom
plate is snug against body. Torque cap screws to appro. 650 lb-ft or 882 N.m.
3.3 Diaphragm Installation
3.3.1 Apply a light coat of a general lubricant (castor oil or equivalent) on diaphragm to aid in
installation.
3.3.2 Pull up on neck of diaphragm while pushing diaphragm insert area down.
3.3.3 Take the new diaphragm in the at rest position and roll one side toward the other forming a
crude football shape. A thin belt or strap may be helpful in holding this shape.
3.3.4 Apply lubricant to the folded diaphragm and insert it long ways into the body of the
dampener as far as possible (the diaphragm should go over half way into the dampener
body).
3.3.5 Fold the remainder of the diaphragm into the vessel and allow it to open inside the body.
3.3.6 Position the diaphragm within the neck of the vessel.
3.4 Stabilizer Installation
3.4.1 When stabilizer is used, temporarily install hex screw into insert.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 11
3.4.2 Break vacuum at neck by pulling diaphragm slightly away from sealing area.
3.4.3 Pull up on hex nut so diaphragm bottom moves up near neck opening.
3.4.4 Re-seat diaphragm neck, remove hex screw, and install stabilizer.
3.4.5 Fold stabilizer with edge down and insert into diaphragm opening.
3.4.6 Assemble stabilizer plate, lock washer, and hex screw through stabilizer and fasten to
diaphragm by attaching hex screw to threaded insert.
3.4.7 Tighten securely with socket wrench.

NOTE: Make certain that the neck portion of the diaphragm and cover plate is clean and free
of any debris, rust, or scale. Coat with a light lubricant prior to installation of cover plate to the
body.
3.5 Cover Plate Installation
3.5.1 Install cover plate, studs, and lubricated nuts. Cross tighten by hand or wrench, a few turns
at a time, until cover is firmly seated on the dampener body. Cross tighten to the
appropriate torque (~2000lb-ft or 2700N.m).
3.6 Installation of Charging Valve
3.6.1 Back thread seal nut on valve and thread valve into tapped hole.
3.6.2 Tighten to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque
3.6.3 If the valve is not facing in the proper direction, take the following steps:
a. Rotate forward if less than a 1/2 turn is required to position valve in proper direction.
b. Rotate backward if the previous step is not possible until the valve is positioned in the
proper direction (. turn maximum).
c. After valve is in position, tighten seal nut to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.7 Installation of Pressure Gauge
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 12
3.7.1 Install pressure gauge so that the face is positioned in such a manner that it will be visible
through the valve guard opening.
3.7.2 Back thread seal nut on valve and thread valve into tapped hole.
3.7.3 Tighten to 20 5 ft-lb or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.7.4 If the gauge is not facing in the proper direction, take the following steps:
a. Rotate forward if less than a 1/2 turn is required to position gauge in proper direction
b. Rotate backward if the previous step is not possible until the gauge is positioned in
the proper direction (1/2 turn maximum).
c. After gauge is in position, tighten seal nut to 20 5 lb-ft or 27 7 N.m torque.
3.8 Pressurize Pulsation Dampener

Use precharge instructions in Section 1. Attach valve guard, and the pulsation dampener is
now ready for use.
Figure 3-1. Typical Pulsation Dampener-Assembly
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 13
4 MAINTENANCE
4.1 Precharge
4.1.1 When properly installed and pre-charged, the pulsation dampener is virtually maintenance
free.
4.1.2 The vessel should be checked periodically for proper precharge and leaks. Unless
conditions such as ambient temperature, operating conditions, or operating temperatures
change, checking every six months should be sufficient.
4.2 Low Precharge Effects
4.2.1 If the pre-charge pressure is TOO LOW, the pulsation dampener will fill with excess fluid,
thus losing some of the working volume of the gas and reducing dampener efficiency.
4.2.2 Additionally, excessive flexing of the diaphragm may cause premature rubber failure at the
neck or equator of the diaphragm.
4.3 High Precharge Effects
4.3.1 If the pre-charge is TOO HIGH, the diaphragm insert will rest on the bottom of the
dampener, closing off the fluid inlet.
4.3.2 Until the system pressure exceeds the precharge pressure, no dampening will take place.
4.3.3 During the time the precharge pressure is nearly equal with the system pressure, the
diaphragm will bounce on and off the inlet opening which could effect the service life of the
diaphragm.
5 PRECHARGE ADJUSTMENTS
5.1 Precharge Low
5.1.1 Original precharge may have been to low.
5.1.2 Ambient temperature may have decreased.
5.1.3 Check charging valve for leaks.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 14
a. Apply leak detection fluid to threads and valve openings.

b. Tighten loose threads, close valve stem, or replace valve if stem does not close.
5.1.4 Check pressure gauge for leaks.

a. Apply leak detection fluid to threads, face, and back cover.
b. Tighten loose threads. Replace gauge if leaks continue.
5.1.5 Check for leaks between cover and body.

a. Apply leak detection fluid to studs and cover-body contact surfaces.
b. Tighten stud nuts. If leaks persist, remove cover and clean mating surfaces.
Reassemble and repeat leak test.
5.1.6 Check Diaphragm (if all the above fail to find the leak). If the dampener will not hold
precharge pressure, it may be due to nitrogen leaks through the diaphragm. Check for
evidence of fluid at either charging valve or pressure gauge port hole. CAUTION: Make
sure dampener pressure is at zero psi before removing charging valve or pressure
gauge. If fluid is present, replace diaphragm. See Disassembly and Assembly
sections.
5.2 Precharge High
5.2.1 Original precharge may have been too high.
5.2.2 Ambient temperature may have increased. Release pressure.
5.2.3 Diaphragm may be trapping pressure (system fluid) when pump is shut down. This will be
indicated by a higher than normal pressure reading on the gauge, which is usually of a
different value, each time the pump is shut down. This condition usually occurs when the
fluid is highly viscous. Installation of a diaphragm stabilizer should cure this condition.
CAUTION: If it is determined that any items need to be replaced or dampener cover
removed, PLEASE FOLLOW THE DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 15
6 PARTS
6.1 Pulsation Dampener Parts List (See Figure 6-1)

Item
Description Part No. Qty.
No.
1 Body 107.132.01 1
2 Diaphragm 107.130.01.00-1 1
3 Diaphragm Stabilizer 107.130.02 1
4 Stabilizer Plate 107.130.04 1
5 Stabilizer Screw 1"-8UNC-2A 107.130.05 1
6 Washer 27 GB93-87 1
17 NUT,HEX HEAD,COVER PLATE 107.132.05 12
18 Stud Bolt, Cover Plate M48x3-2A 107.132.06 12
20 O-Ring 140x5.7 D4-4-66 2
21 Cap Screw, Bottom Plate M33x2-2A 107.132.07 8
22 Bottom Plate 107.132.08 1
23 Nut M33x2-2A 107.132.09 8
24 Bolt M33x2-2A 107.132.10 8
26 Cover Plate 107.132.13 1
27 Valve Guard 107.132.30.00 1
Pressuregauge,0~6000psi(40mpa)
28 7806202 1
1/4"NPT
29 Charging Valve 7500905 1
30 Tag, Caution 107.132.12 1
www.lsnoi.com
Revision 03
Page 16
Figure 6-1. Typical Pulsation Dampener - Cutaway for Part Identification
www.lsnoi.com
Operation, and Maintenance
Manual
Reset Relief Valve
Titan Class Type C
M-34000
Address: NOV Valve Group

9700 West Gulf Bank
Houston TX 77040
Phone #: 281 272 7700
Installation and Operation Manual
Reset Relief Valve C 34000
Foreword
This manual is published as a guide for the normal operation of your NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO equipment.
Because of many factors which contribute to the function or malfunction of this machinery, and not having complete
knowledge of each factor or combination of factors, we cannot detail all facets of this subject. We must therefore
confine the scope of this presentation and when situations encountered are not fully encompassed by complete,
understandable instructions, these situations must be referred to the manufacturer.
The dimension and tolerances specified in this publication are those desirable for the most efficient operations of the
equipment. When components become worn or when new parts are introduced into a worn unit, it may not be possible
or economically feasible to reestablish such strict alignment and correct all dimensional deviations.
Improvements in design, engineering, materials, production methods, etc., may necessitate changes in these
products and result in inconsistencies between the content of this publication and the physical equipment. We reserve
the right to make these changes without incurring any liability or obligation beyond that which is stipulated in the
purchase contract.
The pictures, photographs, charts, diagrams, drawings, verbal contents and specifications are not to be construed
as giving rise to any warranty on the part of NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO. NATIONAL OILWELL VARCO makes no
warranty either expressed or implied beyond that which is stipulated in the purchase contract.
! CAUTION ! CAUTION ! CAUTION !

EXERCISE SAFETY IN ALL PERFORMANCES: DO NOT IGNORE ANY WARNINGS, USE ONLY APPROVED
METHODS, MATERIALS AND TOOLS. DO NOT PERMIT ANY FUNCTION OF QUESTIONABLE SAFETY;
ACCIDENTS ARE CAUSED BY UNSAFE ACTS AND UNSAFE CONDITIONS. SAFETY IS YOUR BUSINESS AND
YOU ARE INVOLVED.
! WARNING ! WARNING ! WARNING !

BEFORE PERFORMING ANY SERVICE FUNCTION, BE CERTAIN THAT THE UNIT IS SEPARATED FROM ITS
POWER SOURCE OR THAT THE POWER SOURCE IS LOCKED-OUT TO PREVENT ANY FORM OF ENERGY
FROM ENTERING THE EQUIPMENT. THIS WOULD INCLUDE ELECTRICAL OR MECHANICAL ENERGY INTO OR
FROM THE PRIME MOVER(S), PNEUMATIC ENERGY FROM THE COMPRESSOR/AIR SYSTEM, ETC.

FAILURE TO OBSERVE THE WARNINGS AND NOTES OF CAUTION IN THIS PUBLICATION CAN RESULT IN
PROPERTY DAMAGE, SERIOUS BODILY INJURY, OR DEATH.

DO NOT PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION UNTIL THE INSTALLER HAS READ THE MANUAL IN ITS ENTIRETY.
Copyright 2007 National Oilwell Varco, all rights reserved.
1
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Publication date: August 7, 2007

All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
All rights reserved. This publication is the property of, and contains information proprietary to National Oilwell Varco. No
part of this publication may be reproduced or copied in any form, or by any means, including electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of National Oilwell Varco.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Warranty
National Oilwell Varco (NOV) warrants that, for a period of one year from the date of delivery equipment of manufacture,
the Equipment shall be free of defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service, and provided the
Equipment is used and maintained in accordance with instructions supplied. This is a sole and exclusive warranty. If a
defect in the Equipment appears within one year from the date of shipment, and Purchaser has given written notice of
such defect within thirty days from the discovery thereof, NOV will repair or replace the part, at its option, by shipping a
similar part FOB shipping point or, at its option, refund an equitable portion of the purchase price. NOV may require the
return, to a designated location, of the defective part, transportation prepaid to establish Purchaser's claim. No
allowance will be made for repairs undertaken without NOVs written consent or approval. This warranty applies only to
equipment manufactured by NOV. Warranties on equipment manufactured by others, if any, are assigned to Purchaser
by NOV (without recourse) at time of delivery. Any description of Equipment, drawings, specifications, and any samples,
models, bulletins, or similar material, used in connection with this sale are for the sole purpose of identifying the
Equipment and are not to be construed as an express warranty that the Equipment will conform to such description. Any
field advisory or installation support is advisory only. The foregoing warranties are in lieu of all other warranties, whether
oral, written, express, implied or statutory. Implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose will
not apply. NOV's warranty obligations and purchaser's remedies there under are solely and exclusively as stated herein.
Purchaser's sole and exclusive remedy, whether based upon warranty, contract or tort, including negligence, will be to
proceed under this warranty. All liability of NOV shall terminate one year from the date of delivery of the Equipment.
Intended audience
Conventions
Notes, cautions, and warnings 1-1
Notes 1-1
Cautions 1-1
Warnings 1-1
Illustrations 1-1
Safety requirements
Personnel training 1-2
Recommended tools 1-2
Genera system safety practices 1-3
Replacing components 1-3
Maintenance 1-3
Proper use of equipment 1-3
Intended audience
This manual is intended for use by field engineering, installation, operation and repair personnel. Every effort has been
made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained herein. National Oilwell Varco company (NOV), will not be
held liable for errors in this material, or for consequences arising from misuse of this material.
Conventions
2
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Notes, cautions, and warnings

Notes, cautions, and warnings appear throughout this manual to provide you with additional information, and to advise
you to take specific action to protect personnel from potential injury or lethal conditions. They may also inform you of
actions necessary to prevent equipment damage or conditions that may void your warranty.
Please pay close attention to these advisories.
Notes
The note symbol indicates that additional information is provided about the current topic.
Cautions
The caution symbol indicates potential risk of damage to equipment or injury to personnel. Follow instructions explicitly
and take extreme care.
A caution symbol may also indicate a condition that voids your equipment warranty.
Warnings
The warning symbol indicates a definite risk of equipment damage or danger to personnel. Failure to observe and follow
proper procedures is likely to result in serious or fatal injury to personnel, significant property loss or significant
equipment damage.
Illustrations
Figures provide a graphical representation of equipment components or screen snapshots for use in identifying parts or
establishing nomenclature, and may or may not be drawn to scale. For more specific component information pertinent to
your rig configuration, see the technical drawings included with your National Oilwell Varco documentation.
Safety requirements
Safety requirements
Personnel training
NOV equipment is installed and operated in a controlled drilling rig environment involving hazardous operations and
situations. Proper service and repair is important for safe and reliable operation. Operation and service procedures
provided by NOV manuals are the recommended methods of performing those operations. Figures provide a graphical
representation of equipment components or screen snapshots for use in identifying parts or establishing nomenclature,
and may or may not be drawn to scale. For more specific component information pertinent to your rig configuration, see
the technical drawings included with your National Oilwell Varco documentation.
All personnel performing installation, operation, repair or maintenance procedures on the equipment, or those in the
vicinity of the equipment, should be trained on shop safety, tool operation, and maintenance. Contact the NOV Valve
training department for more information about equipment operation and maintenance training.
Recommended tools
Service operations may require the use of tools designed specifically for the purpose described. When stated, use only
these tools.
General system safety practices

Avoid performing maintenance or repairs while the equipment is in operation.
Wear proper protective equipment during equipment installation, operation, maintenance, assembly/disassembly or
repair. Local codes may apply. Please consult them prior to performing any operation. The presence of a NOV Valve
representative at the site does not relieve the owner/ operator of responsibility to follow published installation, operation,
and maintenance instructions.
Replacing components
Verify that all components are tagged and labeled during disassembly and reassembly of equipment.
3
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Replace failed or damaged components with NOV genuine certified parts. Failure to do so could result in equipment
damage or personal injury.
Maintenance
Equipment must be maintained on a regular and routine basis. See the Maintenance and Repair chapter of this manual
for maintenance recommendations.
Proper use of equipment

NOV equipment is designed for specific functions and applications, and should be used only for its intended purpose.
Introduction
Features 2-1
Introduction
A pressure relief valve is a self operating valve that is installed in a process system to protect against over
pressurization of the system. The NOV Reset Relief Valve is designed to keep pressure from exceeding a preset valve,
which will in turn protect the liners and other internal components of a typical mud pump.
There are a wide variety of valve designs, but most valves of this type incorporate one or more helical compression
springs which are used to maintain constant force acting on the backside of a piston, causing the valve to be normally
closed. When the force exerted by the process stream (i.e. fluid pressure) against the piston is greater than the constant
force exerted by the spring, the valve "trips" open (the piston moves to its fully open position) and allows process fluid to
exit the valve and pass through a discharge line to a mud tank or pit. This valve actually utilizes a balance beam
whereby the piston force acts on a short moment arm while the spring force acts on a longer moment arm.
The NOV Titan Class "C" Valve utilizes the 34000 series part number. Various dash numbers may be added to indicate
the type of piping adapters supplied with the valve or any other auxiliary items. Please refer to the bill of material and
drawing sections to determine the complete valve assembly number.
Features
Unlike its predecessor, which utilized an elastomeric cushion ring, the Titan Class C valve incorporates a pressure
balance chamber, similar to the original RX valve. The opening movements of NOV's patented piston ports (U.S. Patent
5,715,861) are hydraulically cushioned by throttling fluid from the balance chamber to the discharge side of the valve.
The butt weld flanges or 3-1502 unions provide excellent connection integrity.
There is no load bearing threaded connections exposed to the flow media (such as line pipe threads).
The 4-bolt inlet and discharge flanges allow for easy access to the body and internal parts.
The entire valve can be replaced with all adjacent piping in place.
The valve is 100% adjustable to provide any relief pressure setting within the particular pressure range of the valve.
The relieving pressure set point may be altered easily by turning a single adjusting nut; adjustment may be made while
pressure is in the valve however, is limited to increasing the setting only.
The accuracy of the relief valve is not affected by continuous pressure surges or vibration.
The valve is easily reset by operating a single lever; no replacement shear pins are required and little, if any, down time
is encountered in resetting the valve.
Once properly calibrated, the accuracy of the valve is maintained over numerous valve trips.
The valve may be manually discharged at any time, regardless of line pressure, by striking the release button provided
on the valve.
The open or set position of the valve piston is indicated by the position of the release button. When the button is
away from the side of the bonnet, the valve is set. When the button is adjacent to the side of the bonnet, the valve is
open.
The valves internal linkage is fully enclosed and protected from debris and corrosion.
The release shaft retainer has been redesigned for greater safety.
Inspection
Installation 3-1
4
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Storage
Recommended procedure for extended storage 3-4
Inspection
Installation
Prior to setting up and operating a new Reset Relief Valve, inspect the goods as received from the shipping company. A
claim for damage or loss should be reported immediately to the carrier and to the Valve Division. Also, check the bill of
lading for any separately shipped items, including manuals and CDs. Once it is confirmed the order has been received
complete in undamaged condition, installation may begin.
The Titan C Reset Relief Valve may be installed in any position but it is generally easier to operate and maintain with
the bonnet in a vertical position together with a horizontal discharge line. The valve is outfitted with (A) a pair of 6-bolt
butt weld flanges (one on the inlet and one on the outlet) that have to be fitted, tacked, welded, and stress relieved in
accordance with ASME Section IX and/or ASME B31.1 specifications PRIOR to bolting the valve in place for operation
or (B) adapter flanges which go from a 6-bolt pattern (to match the body) to 3-1502 male and female union connections.
Material certificates for these components are available and (for the butt weld components) include heat treating times
and temperatures which may be used to write a proper weld procedure for valve installation (WPS or PQR). Due to the
service encountered and pressure rating of this equipment, the integrity of all welding, which may be required for the
installation of this valve, should be volumetrically inspected 100% using appropriate X-ray procedures. Assemblies
including component parts with butt weld ends requiring welding must follow the same procedures described above. The
dimensions of the window required for valve installation are shown in the assembly drawing. It is recommended that
the pipe I.D. be no smaller than that of a 3 Schedule XXH pipe (2.300 I.D.) for the upstream and downstream piping.
Figure 3-1 exhibits the correct setup of the upstream and downstream piping. A 3 degree minimum downward slope
must be maintained on piping.

NEVER ATTEMPT TO MAKE UP OR BRAKE OUT UNION CONNECTIONS WITH ANY INTERNAL PRESSURE IN
THE VALVE. REPLACE ALL WORN OR DAMAGED UNION COMPONENTS WITH ORIGINAL NOV PARTS.
The dimensions of the window required for valve installation are shown in the assembly drawing. It is recommended
that the pipe I.D. be no smaller than that of a 3 Schedule XXH pipe (2.300 I.D.) for the upstream and downstream
piping. Figure 3-1 exhibits the correct setup of the upstream and downstream piping. A 3 degree minimum downward
slope must be maintained on piping.
Note:
Sufficient size piping and schedule are required for operating conditions including containing working pressure, handling
cyclic nature of the pump pressures, and staying within the erosional velocity limits of the pipe for the expected
discharge fluid volumes of drilling mud and the related fluid velocity within the pipe.
The discharge line should slope gradually downwards from the valve outlet to the mud pit or holding tank. This insures
any fluid remaining in the line will self-drain.

IN FREEZING ENVIRONMENTS, FLUID REMAINING IN THE DISCHARGE LINE COULD FREEZE AND PREVENT
DISCHARGE FROM THE VALVE. THIS COULD BE DETRIMENTAL TO THE VALVE, PIPING AND PUMP.
Due to thrust loads at the time of discharge, adjacent piping for a relief valve installation requires all piping be properly
braced, anchored and supported to prevent unnecessarily high stresses from damaging the valve or any adjacent
connectors.
5
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

AVOID MOUTING THE VALVE ON A TALL RISER UNLESS THE RISER IS WELL BRACED, ANCHORED AND
SUPPORTED. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD CAUSE SEPERATION OF PIPING AND/OR CONNECTIONS AT THE
TIME OF DISCHARGE, WHICH COULD LEAD TO SERIOUS INJURIES.
Figure 3-1. Recommended downstream setup
Note:
Refer to the Parts and Drawings Section when item numbers are referenced.
Standard butt weld hubs normally supplied with this valve when requested (p/n 31953), are for mating up with 3-1/2-
SCH. XXH (4.000 O.D. x 2.728 I.D.) piping. Torque the (6) flange bolts (item 50) gradually in a crossing pattern so that
the adjacent sealing faces of the flange and body remain parallel. This will also prevent flange separation and the
resulting flange-to-body seal failure. The adjusting nut (item 32) moves the upper spring retainer (item 34) thereby
increasing or decreasing the amount of spring compression and thus spring force against the arm of the crank. The
correct position of the adjusting nut is shown by an indicator (item 33) mounted on the upper spring retainer and the
calibration plate (item 36) mounted adjacent to the indicator on the bonnet cover (item 29). It is generally undesirable to
bring a mud pump on-line with the valve at an abnormally low pressure setting. Such a practice could cause inadvertent
opening of the valve. Always verify the pressure setting by examining the indicator and calibration plate prior to placing
the valve in service. In some operating conditions, the valve may appear to discharge at a lower (or higher) pressure
than indicated by the valve setting. This phenomenon may sometimes result from (1) a lag between the actual system
pressure and the pressure gauge reading, especially for gauges with dampening devices, (2) pressure pulsations,
especially when inadequate or poorly operating pulsation dampeners are installed, (3) inaccurate or improperly
calibrated gauges, or (4) an improperly maintained valve. The release of drilling mud, especially at high pressures, can
be very destructive to internal valve parts. Operators are advised to always try to isolate and shut down a pump as
quickly as possible when the relief valve for that pump discharges. Doing so can help to increase the life of the valve
and its internal parts.
6
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Note:
Back pressure on the valve (usually due to hydrostatic head pressure from a column of fluid in the discharge line) is
usually undesirable. However, due to the balanced design of the Titan B, back pressures less than 100 psig will have
little if any affect on the operational accuracy of the valve

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESET THE VALVE WHILE THE PUMP IS IN OPERATION.
Storage
Recommended procedure for extended storage
Relief Valve should be stored inside a cool, controlled environment.
Valve should be stored in an upright position, protecting the piston and internal parts.
Internal parts should stay lubricated with synthetic grease, Mobil SHC 220, Mobilith or equal.
If the valve is in storage more than 6-15 months, the valve should be disassembled, the bonnet pulled and the piston
cap seal and o-ring inspected and changed. Clear all debris from internal parts, lubricated with recommended lubricant.
For assembly procedures, see Section 6.
If additional information is needed, please contact your sales representative or call the location shown on the cover of
this manual.
Field Setting Procedure

Valve Calibration 4-1
The zero setting 4-1
The Span setting 4-2
Hydrostatic Pressure Testing (in plant only) 4-2
Field Setting Procedure
Valve Calibration
The valve adjusting nut (item 32) should be tightened (rotated clockwise looking at the top of the bonnet) to increase the
compression on the load springs and thus increase the setting indicated by the calibration plate. Likewise, the nut should
be loosened to lower the set pressure. Going from a higher setting to a lower setting with pressure on the valve could
inadvertently cause the valve to trip. Increasing the set point with pressure on the valve is generally not a problem.
Although all NOV Reset Relief Valves are calibrated at the factory, because of the variety of mud types, it is important to
verify the operating characteristics of the valve in a particular system and with the mud being used to determine if any
additional adjustments are needed. Please refer to the section on valve calibration in this section.
The valve should be bench tested on a regular basis to verify proper calibration and accuracy. As mentioned, NOV can
provide a complete portable test unit for a modest price. For calibration purposes, an accurate test gauge should be
used (usually plus or minus 1/4% of the full scale reading). The gauge should be connected so that it indicates pressure
in the lower end of the valve. If any gauge with a built-in dampening device is used, the line pressure should be built up
slowly to allow for the actual system pressure and gauge pressure to stabilize. If possible, the system pressure should
be built up slowly and gradually with little or no pressure pulsations. Remove the adjusting nut (item 32), upper spring
retainer (item 34), two load springs (item 37), four socket head cap screws (item 50) and the bonnet cover (item 29) so
that the lower spring retainer can be lifted and turned. Drive out the Spirol Pin (item 40) from the back side (bonnet
side) of the lower spring retainer. Replace the bonnet cover using new NOV socket head cap screws. Replace the
remaining components.
The zero setting:

Adjust the valve to its minimum pressure setting as indicated by the calibration plate and indicator. Operate the reset
lever to set the valve (close the piston). Slowly increase internal pressure until the valve operates (trips), noting the
7
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
gauge pressure indicated. If the valve tripped before the gauge reached the pressure indicated on the calibration plate,
the valve
Zero setting is low (too little initial spring compression). In order to correct the zero setting, the two flats on the lower
end of the load screw (item 38) will be used to change the initial compression on the load springs. If the valve tripped
early, more initial spring compression is required and vice versa. Use a 3/8 open end wrench to tighten the load screw
further into the lower spring retainer if the valve tripped early. Looking down on the upper face of the lower spring
retainer, a clockwise rotation of the wrench will drive the load screw farther into the lower spring retainer. The amount of
change will vary somewhat between valves but a half turn of the load screw should cause approximately a 50 psig
(higher or lower depending on the direction of rotation) change in the tripping pressure of the valve. Because it will be
locked in place by the 1/4 Spirol pin upon successful completion of the calibration procedure, the load screw may only
be adjusted in half-turn increments (with the flats on the load screw left perpendicular to the lower spring retainer). Once
the zero setting is close, it is time to check the span or upper setting.
The Span setting:

Hydrostatic Pressure testing (in plant only)
Tighten the adjusting nut until the indicator points precisely to the highest setting on the calibration plate. Reset the valve
and slowly increase internal pressure until the valve trips. Note the pressure on the gauge at this point. For example,
lets assume that we are working with a typical 1500-5000 PSI valve assembly. If the valve initially tripped at 1400 PSI
for the zero setting and then tripped at say 4900 PSI for the span setting, it is possible to bring both values closer to
the desired setting. In other words, by going back to the zero setting and increasing the initial spring compression, the
valve may be made to trip at exactly 1500 PSI or plus 100 PSI. As such, we will expect the valve to trip at an
additional 100 PSI on the high end (span setting), very close to the desired 5000 PSI. We will rerun the span procedure
to confirm. However, if the valve trips at 1700 PSI at the low end and at 5300 PSI at the high end, you can not perform
the basic calibration procedure to make the valve more accurate. If we increase the initial spring compression, when
testing the high setting, to make the valve trip right at 1500 PSI we could expect the valve to trip at around 8600 PSI
which would be totally unacceptable. In short, both settings (low and high) may be either increased or decreased but
they may not be moved closer together or farther apart. Valves which do not calibrate properly may have one or more
faulty load springs, a worn upper link pin (which most often causes erratic valve behavior), excessive seal friction due to
corrosion, a faulty main crank, or binding linkage. If the operator is unable to achieve satisfactory performance from the
valve after following normal calibration procedures, contact the factory. If the valve is within acceptable tolerances at
both the low and high set points, secure the load screw with the Spirol pin (item 40) by driving it into the lower spring
retainer (against the bonnet) until the end is flush with the outboard side of the lower spring retainer. If the valve is not
within acceptable tolerances, replace the load springs or look for mechanical problems. Repeat this entire procedure
after reworking valve.
For Titan Class C valves, any in-plant or customer-witness hydrostatic pressure testing will be limited to the following
maximum values: 5000 PSIG WORKING PRESSURE, 7500 PSIG TEST PRESSURE Acceptable Tolerance, Set Point
vs. Actual Valve Trip Pressure
Pressure Range 1500-5000, psig Acceptable Tolerance +200 psig
If the valve is within acceptable tolerances at both the low and high set points, secure the load screw with the Spirol pin
(item 40) by driving it into the lower spring retainer (against the bonnet) until the end is flush with the outboard side of
the lower spring retainer. If the valve is not within acceptable tolerances, replace the load springs or look for mechanical
problems. Repeat this entire procedure after reworking valve.
Hydrostatic Pressure testing (in plant only)

For Titan Class C valves, any in-plant or customer-witness hydrostatic pressure testing will be limited to the following
maximum values: 5,000 PSIG WORKING PRESSURE 7,500 PSIG TEST PRESSURE
(Test pressure applies to the sub-assembly: valve body with sub, seat insert, and related seals only.) With the valve in
the set position and springs compressed for maximum pressure setting, slowly increase internal pressure to that of
working pressure, hold hydrostatic pressure for 3 minutes and check for leakage, bleed pressure to zero. Re-pressurize
valve to the specified pressure required and hold for 15 minutes. Check for leakage. If no leakage is observed outside
the valve and if no apparent leakage is visible from monitoring the gauge, the test is successful. Bleed pressure to zero.
Test is complete.
Reset Relief Valve Troubleshooting Guide 5-1
8
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Reset Relief Valve Troubleshooting Guide

NOV Reset Relief Valves are fairly easy to operate and are reliable and stable when properly used and maintained. The
success and performance of the valves rely on links inside that connect the piston to the bonnet. The links must be in a
straight line (3O off center) for the valves to hold pressure. Once the joint is out of line, the links retract (due to exceeding
set pressure) and the valve trips. Valves must be reset in a straight line to work properly. When pushing the handle
forward to reset the valve, a lever inside the reset crank pushes the links into alignment. There is a stop inside the valve
when the links are in the correct position, the links will be straight and the piston will be down. When the valve is fully
reset, the reset button on the backside of the bonnet sticks out approximately 3/8 inch. When the reset relief valve seals
are new, more effort to reset the valve may be required. New seals are stiff and tight.
Troubleshooting Problem Solution

If the valve cannot be fully reset even when using an extension wrench check the pump to see if its turned off and there
is no back pressure on valve. Check for foreign substance in the valve thats blocking the piston from resetting. Make
sure the reset crank handle pin is tight. Check if the crank is not bent; also check if the inner stem seal is installed
properly and has not rolled up on piston stem, preventing the valve from resetting. Sometimes the pressure activated
lower piston seal may be swollen preventing the valve from resetting; in this case, drain all the fluid out and replace the
lower piston seal. This seal can be used again when it shrinks back to original shape after drying for few minutes. If the
valve does not hold pressure, check piston seal for wear and insure links are fully reset (the reset button should be
extended 3/8 inch). Check piston and body for wear. If the valve calibration has changed, replace the load springs if they
are shorter than 7 inches. Inspect links and link pins for wear or bent. Follow calibration procedures.
If valve is leaking on outside between bonnet and body remove stem bushing seals.
If fluid is leaking through discharge side remove the flange/discharge line on valve outlet side and clean the inside of the
valve from the discharge side. Use a flashlight and check for fluid leaks.
If the fluid is leaking from bottom i.e. between piston cap and insert, turn off the pump and drain all the fluid from the
valve body, push the reset button in and reset the valve 2-3 times. If the valve is still leaking, replace the lower piston
cap seals.
If fluid is leaking from top, remove the bonnet assemble and replace the upper piston shoulder seal. Before re-
installing the bonnet assembly, check the inner valves of the body for rust, pitting or scarring.
The inner surface where the seal seats must be clean and smooth or the valve will leak. If there is more than
surface/superficial rust proceeds to send the valve body to NOV facility for further evaluation.
If you have any more problems contact NOV service guys or NOV facility for repair.
Assembly / Disassembly Procedures

Lower Piston Disassembly 6-1
Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly 6-2
Lower Body Disassembly 6-4
Lower Body Assembly 6-4
Bonnet and Linkage Assembly 6-5
Body Flange/Adapter Assembly 6-7
Assembly / Disassembly Procedures

Lower Piston Disassembly
Note:
Replacement of the lower piston seal ring (item 7) or any of its associated components requires that the bonnet
assembly first be removed from the body.
The steps required to accomplish this task are as follows:

Danger Failure to safely bleed off internal pressure prior to bonnet or flange removal could cause serious
bodily injury or even death.
1. After removing ALL internal pressure from the body, loosen all four bonnet socket head cap screws (item 54) about 3
turns. Pull up on the bonnet until the bonnet flange is again in contact with the face of the screws. Verify that the stem
9
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
bushing seal (item 14) has disengaged its respective seal bore in the body. Only then the (4) cap screws may be
completely removed from the body along with the bonnet sub-assembly.
2. Clean the upper bores of the body with a soft cloth. Verify that the seal bores in the upper end of the body are free of
marks, scratches, dings, and corrosion prior to reinstalling a cleaned up or rebuilt bonnet assembly. Also, clean and
inspect the seat insert (item 2) in the lower end of the body. DO NOT attempt to repair a leaking valve by merely
replacing the lower piston seal when the seat insert is also damaged.
3. holding the bonnet firmly loosen and remove the piston cap (item 4) from the piston body (item 3). Remove the
outboard seal retainer (item 8), the lower piston seal (item 7) and the inboard seal retainer (item 8) from the piston body.
Inspect the piston cap face seal (item 11) for damage and replace as required.
Replace item 7, (Never reuse the lower piston seal (item 7)) along with two of item 8 if necessary, and reassemble the
lower end of the piston. Note the orientation of all components for correct assembly of the piston.
4. Inspect the outer stem bushing seal (item 14) for damage and replace if required. Verify that the piston slides freely in
and out of the stem bushing. If not, there could be damage to the inner stem bushing seal (item 10) or excessive
corrosion on the internal bore of the stem bushing (item 6). Correcting this problem will require complete removal of the
piston sub-assembly from the bonnet. See the "Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly"
5. Verify that the piston shoulder seal (item 9) is in good condition. If not, it will require replacement. Again, correcting
this problem will require complete removal of the piston sub-assembly from the bonnet. See the "Bonnet & Linkage
Disassembly"
6. Using high quality synthetic grease, lubricate the upper end of the body as well as the lower and upper end of the
piston, particularly all sealing elements.
7. Again, contingent upon the inspection performed in step 2, the bonnet sub-assembly may be reinserted into the body.
Lubricate the threads and collars of four NEW cap screws (item 54) with a nickel base anti-seize compound and using a
crossing pattern, torque the screws to specification, see the "Torque Chart"

NEVER REUSE BONNET CAP SCREWS (ITEM 54).
Bonnet & Linkage Disassembly

Note:
This procedure assumes that the bonnet sub-assembly has been safely removed from the body following the procedure
in step 1 of "Lower Piston Disassembly"
1. Completely remove the adjusting nut (item 32) and lift off and remove the upper spring retainer (item 34) and the two
load springs (item 37). Check the load springs for yielding. If either spring is less than 7.00 in overall length, replace
both springs and re-calibrate the valve.
2. If the adjusting stud (item 35) must be replaced, punch out the Spirol Pin (item 40) in the bonnet cover and
unscrew the stud. Note the amount of stud protruding from the cover so that the replacement part may be reinstalled
properly as before.
3. Remove and discard the four cover cap screws (item 50) from the bonnet cover (item 29), lift off and remove the
cover.
4. If the reset roller (item 31) must be replaced, punch out the 1/8 Spirol Pin (item 44) and slide the roller from the reset
crank. Replace the roller with a new one and install a new pin.
10
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
5. If the reset crank (item 30) or the reset handle (item 16) must be replaced, punch out the 5/16 Spirol Pin (item 24).
Slide the reset handle off of the reset crank, remove the shaft seal o-ring (item 43) and pull the reset crank out of the
bonnet cover.
6. If the cover bearing (not ballooned) is damaged, it may be pressed out of the bonnet cover (with the proper tooling)
and replaced with a new one.
7. Remove the spring guide rod (item 28) along with the reset spring (item 23) and the keeper (item 27) from the bonnet.
8. Using a pair of needle nose pliers, carefully remove the two clock or linkage springs (item 25). Examine both springs
for damage. The tabs which hold the spring in place (one on the inside and one on the outside) should be in alignment
with each other. If the outer tab is more than 30 degrees out of alignment with the inner tab, replace both springs with
new NOV parts.
9. With the remaining bonnet assembly resting above the piston (item 3) which is to be positioned firmly on a flat
surface, rotate the upper link (item 21) into a horizontal position (as if the valve had tripped). Punch out the 1/8 pin
(item 19) in upper link. Note: Pulling back on the release button and locking it in the retracted position with a small block
(or other item which may be used temporarily as a spacer) during this operation will keep the inboard end of the release
shaft (item 45) from interfering with the removal of the pin (item 19). Remove the top crank pin (item 26).
10. If the crank (item 22) must be removed, lift lower spring retainer and turn it so that the diameter pin can be driven
out from side adjacent to the bonnet. Rotate the load screw (item 38) CCW to remove it from the lower spring retainer
(item 39). Lift the load screw up through the crank for complete removal from the bonnet. Punch out the 1/8 pin (item
44) from the crank to remove the crank pivot pin (item 41). The crank may now be lifted out and completely removed
from the bonnet.
11. If required, the bearing (item 15a) may be removed from bonnet (item 15) with a 19/32 punch. Again, this is a
somewhat tedious task and replacement of the bonnet sub-assembly is generally the better choice.
12. If it is necessary to remove the release shaft (item 45), hold the inboard end from rotating with a drift pin while
rotating the release button (item 47) CCW. With the release button removed, push the release shaft inboard until it
clears the notches in the release shaft retainer (item 46). A large slotted screw driver may be used to loosen and remove
the release shaft retainer (item 46). Now the release shaft and release shaft spring may be easily removed from the
bonnet.
13. The piston along with the linkage may now be carefully pulled out of the lower end of the bonnet.
14. Disassemble upper link and lower links by punching out four 1/8 pins (item 19) and removing the two link pins (item
18).
15. Remove the stem bushing by sliding it off of the small end of the piston. Inspect both the bushing outer seal (item
14) and the bushing inner seal (item 10) for wear or damage. Clean and inspect both glands for damage or corrosion.
16. If required, the bearing (item 21a) may be removed from upper link (item 21) with a 15/32 punch. Again, this is a
somewhat tedious task and replacement of the upper link sub-assembly is generally the better choice.
Note
Usually, while the valve is completely disassembled, it is always a good practice to replace any and all worn, damaged,
or otherwise questionable parts.
17. Check lower links for straightness and/or ovaling of the link pin holes. Check straightness by laying a straight edge
against the end flat on each side of the link. If either link is distorted, always replace both lower linksnever just one.
Check the small pads on one side of each lower link for damage from contacting the pad on the main crank. It is
important to note the position and orientation of the pads on both lower links. These pads MUST be placed in the same
11
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
position during assembly (the pad end of the lower link is to be farthest away from the bonnet flange while both pads are
to face towards the release shaft button).
18. Check all link pins and crank pins for straightness. If a pin is not straight or shows signs of wear, it should be
replaced. A worn pin may show cracks or dings in the surface or may no longer be perfectly straight and or round.
19. Check all pressed-in bushings. If a bushing is loose, has chipped or otherwise damaged edges, or is wallowed out, it
should be replaced with a new NOV part.
20. Check the outside diameter of the piston and all sealing surfaces for signs of wear, corrosion, or other damage that
might impair the effectiveness of a new seal.
Lower Body Disassembly

1. Removal of the sub (item 5) can be difficult at times. It will require using the special sub wrench listed in the tool
section. We will assume that the valve assembly has been removed from the line and that the bonnet/piston assembly
has been removed from the valve.
2. If the valve was supplied with butt weld flanges and the body is out of the line, the 6-bolt flange will have already been
disconnected. If the valve was supplied with 1502 connections (see section 8), the inlet adapter will need to be removed.
Using a 12-point socket or box end wrench, loosen and remove all 6 flange cap screws from the valve inlet.
3. Carefully remove the inlet flange adapter from the body and set aside. Clean and inspect the union components for
damage. Clean and inspect the face seal groove for damage or corrosion and inspect the seal.
4. It is best to carefully anchor the body when removing the sub. This may be done by using a minimum of 2 bonnet cap
screws to bolt the body to a work table. Holes will have to be drilled in the table to match the bonnet bolt pattern. Flip the
body upside down (bonnet end down) and attach it to the work table using discarded bonnet cap screws or place the
body (in a similar position) securely in a large vice.
5. Insert the lugs of the sub wrench into the sub. Looking at the inlet of the body, rotate the sub counter clockwise to
loosen and remove the sub from the body. In some cases, applying penetrating oil or similar substance to the sub may
help with its removal from the body.
6. Clean the sub (item 5) and inspect it for damage, especially in the threaded area, the radial seal groove, and the
sealing faces on the inboard and outboard ends.
7. Remove the seat insert (item 2) from the body along with the insert face seal (item 13). Carefully clean and inspect
the insert for damage, especially the internal seal surface (I.D.) and the face seal groove.
8. Clean and inspect the lower valve body internals, especially the threads and the seal bore for the sub seal (item 12).
Lower Body Assembly

Use the procedure described in "Lower Body Disassembly" on page 6-4 for mounting and holding the valve body while
working on the lower end of the valve.
1. If the body (item 1), sub (item 5), seat insert (item 2) are all cleaned and free of damage, they may be reassembled.
Always use new sealing elements when reassembling this valve.
2. Use a nickel base anti-seize compound to lubricate the threads and sealing surfaces of the lower end of the body
prior to assembly. Also lubricate the threads and inboard face and radial sealing surfaces of the sub prior to assembly.
3. Install a new sub seal (item 12) into its groove in the sub. Install a new seat insert face seal (item 13) into its groove in
the insert. As mentioned in step 1, with the bonnet side of the valve body facing downwards, place the seat insert into
the lower body cavity, face seal side up. Verify that the insert shoulder is fully seated against the step in the body.
12
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
4. Place the sub into the lower body cavity, threaded end last. Make up the sub into the body by hand. If this is not
possible, check the body and sub for thread damage. Continue making up the sub until it bumps against the seat insert.
5. Using the pipe wrench, torque the sub to 800-1000 ft.-lbs. protect the outboard sealing face of the sub when flipping
the body over for bonnet assembly.
Bonnet and Linkage Assembly

1. Lubricate and install new seals (items 10 and 14) in the stem bushing (item 6). Note that the inner seal (item 10)
MUST be installed with the seal lip energizer facing the large end of the stem bushing. Failure to install this seal properly
could cause the seal to leak and fail. Place the stem bushing sub-assembly aside. Do not proceed with bonnet and
linkage assembly, unless all parts have been cleaned, inspected, and are found in good condition. Do not reuse Spirol
pins
2. Assemble the piston body (item 3) with items 4, 7, 8 (2x), 9, and 11. Place the face seal (item 11) into its gland in the
piston cap (item 4). Place the first seal retainer (item 8) over the nose of the lower end of the piston as shown in the
assembly drawing. Carefully place the piston seal (item 7) over the nose of the lower end of the piston and against the
first seat retainer. Place the second seal retainer (item 8) over the piston seal. Screw the piston cap (item 4) into the
lower end of the piston. Be sure that the face seal (item 11) remains fully in its groove during make up. Torque the cap
to 80-100 ft.-lbs. install a (lubricated) shoulder seal (item 9) into its gland on the upper end of the piston. Again,
orientation of this seal is critical. The spring energizer MUST be oriented towards the upper end of the piston as shown.
The piston sub-assembly is now complete. Take care not to damage piston seals (items 7 and 9) during assembly.
3. Slide the stem bushing sub-assembly (from step 1) over the lubricated end of the piston, large end first. Carefully slide
the bushing down towards the big end of the piston, as far as it will go. Do not force.
4. Assemble the two lower links (item 20) to the upper end of the piston with the first link pin (item 18). Orientation of
both links is critical. The links should have side bosses facing the same direction (away from the piston centerline). The
link bosses should also be oriented away from (not adjacent to) the bushing in the piston. Secure links with two 1/8
Spirol Pins (item 19).
5. Assemble the thick end of the upper link (item 21) between the upper end of the lower links with the second link pin
(item 18) and again secure with two 1/8 Spirol pins (item 19). Upper and lower links should fit snugly with the link pins
but both link pins should turn freely in their respective bushings.
6. Slide the release shaft (item 45) into its respective hole in the side of the bonnet (big end first). Slide the release shaft
spring (item 48) over the threaded end of the release shaft. Slide the release shaft retainer (item 46) over the release
shaft, notched end last. Apply several drops of non-permanent thread locking compound to the threads of the release
shaft retainer prior to making it up fully into the bonnet. With no other components yet attached to the bonnet, the
release shaft may be pushed towards the middle of the bonnet to allow for use of a large slotted screw driver to make up
the release shaft retainer.
7. Push the release shaft towards the outboard side of the release shaft hole in the bonnet so that the threaded section
protrudes from the bonnet. Screw the release shaft button on to the release shaft. Use a few drops of non-permanent
thread locking compound to secure the release shaft button. Alternatively, the threaded end of the release shaft may be
pined with a center punch to prevent inadvertent loosening of the release shaft button.
8. Place the crank assembly (item 22), with its two bushings, into the cavity in the top of the bonnet. Slide the middle
section of the crank over the bushing in the top of the bonnet. Align the small end of the crank over the hole for the load
screw. Align the crank assembly hole with the bonnet bushing and insert the crank pivot pin (item 41). Note that the
transverse hole in the crank pivot pin must be oriented with respect to the matching hole in one side of the crank
assembly. Rotate and slide the crank pivot pin so that the transverse hole is in line with its respective hole in the crank
assembly. Drive the Spirol pin (item 44) through the hole to secure the crank assembly. The end of the pin should be
flush with the outer surface of the crank as shown in the assembly drawing.
13
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
9. Insert the linkage (attached to the piston) through the bottom of the bonnet with side bosses of lower links facing
release shaft hole. Again, orientation of the bosses on the lower links is CRITICAL to proper valve operation. Align the
hole in the upper end of the upper link with its respective hole in the crank assembly. Slide the top crank pin through the
hole.
10. With the lower end of the piston resting on a flat surface, steady the bonnet while rotating the top crank pin with
respect to the upper link. When the transverse slot in the top crank pin is aligned with the hole through the upper link,
place a 7/64 drift through the upper link to hold both members in place. Now allow the bonnet to move downwards and
the upper link to move to the near horizontal position until the parts rest against each other. (The piston is now basically
in the tripped position). Carefully remove the drift and, without disturbing the related parts, drive one 1/8 Spirol pin
through the hole in the upper link. Tap the pin carefully until it passes the top crank pin.
11. Lay the bonnet assembly on its side with the piston extended in the set position. Both lower links should be against
the side of the bonnet. Place one linkage (or clock) spring (item 25) over each end of the top crank pin. The inner tab
of the spring should slide into the slot in both ends of the top crank pin. Use a pair of needle nose pliers to grab the outer
tab of the spring to wind it tighter approximately 90 degrees and slip it into the slot in the crank. The short crook or
bend in the very end of the outer end of the spring should face towards the release shaft button. Press against the
outboard side of the spring to assure that it is fully against the side of the crank and fully engaging both slots.
12. Insert the load screw (item 38), threaded end first, through the hole in the crank assembly and out through the lower
side of the bonnet.
13. Drive a 1/4 Spirol pin (item 40) about 1/4 to 3/8 into one side of the lower spring retainer (item 39), just to hold it in
place. With the spring guide nubs facing upwards and the Spirol pin facing away from the bonnet, make the load screw
up into the lower spring retainer. The end of the load screw should protrude from the lower side of the lower spring
retainer by about 1/4.
14. Slide the reset roller (item 31) over the small end of the Z or reset crank (item 30) and secure it with one 1/8 Spirol
pin (item 44). Insert the large end of the reset crank through its respective hole in the bonnet cover from the inside.
Place the weather seal o-ring (item 43) over the reset crank shaft from outside the bonnet cover.
15. Place the reset handle (item 16) over the reset crank shaft with the large chamfer facing the o-ring (and cover). Align
the hole in the reset crank with the hole in the handle and secure both parts with a 5/16 spirol pin (item 24).
16. Screw the adjusting stud (item 35) into the bonnet cover (milled notch end first) until the end is flush with inside
surface of the cover. Rotate the stud in or out slightly to allow the notch to align with the hole through the end of the
cover. Secure the stud by driving one spirol pin (item 40) through the cover until the outer end is flush with the outer
surface of the cover.
17. Place reset spring (item 23) over the spring guide rod (item 28) and insert one end of the rod into the shallow hole
(or divot) inside of the bonnet. Rotate the reset crank to allow the spring keeper (item 27) to be inserted into its hole in
the reset crank (from the outboard side). Position the cover (item 29) over the bonnet, tilt it back to view the keeper, and
guide the keeper over the end of the spring guide rod prior to placing the cover fully against the top of the bonnet.
Secure the bonnet cover using only New NOV cap screws lubricated with a nickel base never seize compound. Tighten
all four screws in a crossing pattern according to the "Torque Chart" on page 16
18. Set both load springs (item 37) on the lower spring retainer (item 39) and place upper spring retainer (item 34) over
the top of the adjusting stud and allow it to move downwards until it engages both springs. Screw the locknut (item 32)
on the adjusting stud until a minimum amount of compression is placed on the springs to hold them in place.
19. Orient the reset handle so that it is opposite the discharge side of the valve body. After lubricating the body bores
and piston seals stab the piston carefully into the upper end of the body. Press downwards on the bonnet until the
bonnet flange mates with the body. Secure the bonnet using only New NOV cap screws lubricated with a nickel base
never seize compound. Tighten all four screws in a crossing pattern according to the torque shown in "Torque Chart" on
page 16. The valve is now ready for calibrating.
14
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Body Flange/Adapter Assembly

1. Adapter flanges, 6-bolt x 3-1/2-XXH butt-weld, 6-bolt x 3-1502 female, or 6-bolt x 3-1502 male may be attached to
or removed from the body of the RX valve assembly. When attaching these flanges, it is important to first install the
flange face seal (item 53) into its face groove in the flange. It is also important to make up all six 12-point flange cap
screws (item 51) with their respective helical lock washers (item 52) to the hand tight position prior to applying torque.
Torque all six cap screws in each flange little by little in a crossing pattern so that the flange face does not become
cocked with respect to the face of the mating body. Cocking of the flange will lead to early failure (blow our or extrusion)
of the flange face seal. Torque all twelve screws (6 on the inlet flange and 6 on the outlet flange) to the torque
prescribed in the "Torque Chart" on page 16.
2. On assemblies with the 3-1502 union connections, care must be taken to protect the threads and sealing surfaces of
these unions at all times when the valve is removed from the line. Using worn or damaged union parts can cause
failures which could lead to serious bodily injury. Union hammer nuts should always engage their mating parts using
hand force. Never try to start a thread using a hammer. After the union is mostly made up by hand, it may be tightened
using a hammer. Usually, a 4 to 8 pound hammer is sufficient. Three to four blows on the nut member after initial
rotation has ceased should suffice to achieve the proper preload. Correct calibration - The relief pressure indicator
should accurately indicate the actual relief pressure. When the valve has been completely torn down and reassembled,
it will be necessary to re-calibrate the valve, even if no new components have been installed. Binding or interference
between parts, any and all moving parts, especially parts associated with the linkage assembly, will cause the valve to
operate improperly.
34000 Series Titan Class C Valve Assembly Table
Assembly Item Special Pressure Connection

P/N No Parts Range
Inlet Outlet
36 111342 3 SCH XXH 3 SCH XXH BUTWELD
34000-01 37 20805-03 750 - 2500 PSI BUTWELD

34000-02 37 20805-04 1500 - 5000 PSI BUTWELD

34000-03 37 20805-03 400 - 1500 PSI BUTWELD
Complete Bonnet Assembly Kits Assembly

P/N Pressure Range
34011 750-2500 PSI
34012 1500-5000 PSI
34013 400-1500 PSI
Seal Kit Assembly

P/N Pressure Range
34005 All (3) Pressure Ranges
15
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Maintenance 7-1
Torque 7-1
Inspection 7-2
Tools Required 7-2
Replacement Seal Kit 7-2
Bushings 7-3
Maintenance
The Titan Class B Reset Relief Valve has been designed to require a minimum amount of maintenance. The
recommended maintenance for the valves involves removing the bonnet assembly (refer valve disassembly procedure)
every 2-4 weeks and flushing out the valve body and cleaning any debris. Then you would need to apply grease to the
inner walls of the valve body where the upper shoulder seal on the piston seals and also apply grease through the
grease fitting on the bonnet assembly itself until it is completely full of grease (from the factory it should be full of
grease). The grease will act as a rust inhibitor and this will protect against the corrosion. Flange screws, bonnet
retaining screws, and cover retaining screws should be checked for proper torque periodically. Please refer to the torque
chart.
Note:
Recommended Lubricant P/N 2560 Upper Bonnet Assembly Parts (Top Works): Maxi Glide Teflon Gel Lubricant or
Equal P/N 3015 Piston, Body I.D. and Seals: Synthetic Lubricant Grease or Equal.
Torque Chart
Size. Part No. Quantity Where Used Torque, Ft.-lbs--N-m
1/2-13 SH Cap (4) 85+9

204044-10-14 Cover 115+12.2
5/8- 11 SH Cap (4) 169+17
063150-10-15 Bonnet 229+23
1-8 12-pt. Cap (8) 420+31.5
111676 Flange Adapters 569.5+42.7
Due to the variations in pulsation dampening from rig to rig and the resulting effect on component fatigue life, it is
recommended that the 1/2 and 5/8 socket head cap screws not be reused but rather replaced with new cap screws
when servicing the valve. Verification of the valve accuracy should be done on a regular basis. After all, this is a piece of
safety equipment and it should be operated and maintained accordingly. It is recommended that the valve be calibrated
every 6 months as a minimum. For calibrating the valve in the field, NOV may provide a portable manual pump with a
proper test gauge (1/4% full scale) to aid the operator (reference part number 32590). If a pressure gauge with a built-in
dampening device is used, the line pressure should be built up slowly to allow the actual system pressure and gauge
pressure to stabilize. If possible, the line pressure should be built up slowly and gradually with little or no pressure
pulsations.
Inspection
To inspect visually, with no pressure in the valve, reset button pushed in, remove (4) Bonnet Bolts. Pull Top Work up
vertically; inspect piston seal and the body ID. Wash any debris from the body and re-lube body and piston.
Reassemble. Valve is ready for reset.
Tools Required
1.3/32 to 7/64 inch diameter x 1 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for items 19 and 44) To perform service work on
the Titan Class B Reset Relief Valve, the following tools will be required: To inspect visually, with no pressure in the
16
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
valve, reset button pushed in, remove (4) Bonnet Bolts. Pull Top Work up vertically; inspect piston seal and the body ID.
Wash any debris from the body and re-lube body and piston. Reassemble. Valve is ready for reset.
2. 7/32 to 15/64 inch diameter x 1-3/4 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for item 40)
3. 1/4 to 19/64 inch diameter x 1-3/8 inch (min.) long straight shank punch (for item 24)
4. Small hammer
5. 3/8 inch hex Allen or internal hex wrench (for item 50)
6. 1/2 inch hex Allen or internal hex wrench (for item 54)
7. 3/8 open end wrench (for item 38)
8. Large slotted screwdriver (for item 38)
9. 1-1/4 6pt. or 12 pt. box end or socket wrench (for item 32)
10. Needle nose pliers (for item 25)
11. 1-12 pt. socket and torque wrench (for item 51)
12. Sub wrench assembly, NOV p/n 31873 (for item 5)
13. Release Shaft Retainer Spanner, use large slotted screw driver (for item 46) 14. 15/16 open end wrench or open
end adjustable wrench (for item 4) 15. O-ring pick
In addition to these tools, a supply of new NOV spare parts should be available and on hand in order to speed the repair
process.
Replacement Seal Kit for P/N 34005
Item Qty Part No

7 1 32501-2
9 1 31914
10 1 31909
11 1 702640-03-20
12 7 02640-24-31
13 1 32519
14 1 702640-23-01
43 1 702640-21-01
53 2 702640-23-71
Spirol Pins
The minimum number of Spirol Pins required for complete replacement of all pins in the valve is shown on the bill of
materials and in the chart below:
Item Qty Part No Basic Size

19 5 20712-02 1/8 x 5/8
24 1 20712-13 5/16 x 1-3/8
40 2 20712-04 1/4 x 1-1/2
44 2 20712-03 1/8 x 7/8
NOTE
Refer to the Drawings and Parts List at the end of this manual for NOV part numbers and usage.
The bushings shown in the chart below are not specifically ballooned on the assembly drawing but they are called out
on the bill of material under the main item in the sub-assembly where they are used.
17
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Bushings
Item Qty Part No Basic Size I.D. x O.D. x

Length
3a 1 13229-10 3/8 x 1/2 x 23/32
15a 1 13229-08 1/2 x 5/8 x 1/2
21a 1 13229-13 3/8 x 1/2 x 5/8
22a 2 13229-13 3/8 x 1/2 x 5/8
29a 1 13229-12 3/4 x 7/8 x 1-1/8
Unitized connector assemblies 8-1

Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Drawing 8-2
Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Parts List 8-3
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Drawing 8-4
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List 8-5
Unitized connector assemblies

Item Description Part
No.
1 Flange 1002 Female 31892
Connector
2 Detachable Nut 31881
3 Nitrite Seal Ring 31884
4 Male Half (Butt Weld Prep 31880
Piece)
Figure 8-1-1. 1002 - Hammer Union, Part No. 31893 (Flange 1002 Female)
No.
1 Flange 1002 Male Connector 31891
3 Nitrile Seal Ring 31884
4 Female Half (Butt Weld Prep 31871
Piece)
5 Retainer Segments (3 ea. 31926
included)
6 Retainer Ring 31927

No.
1 Flange 1002 Female Connector 31930
3 Nitrite Seal Ring 31884
4 Male Half (Butt Weld Prep 31931
Piece)
18
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com

No.
1 Flange 1002 Male Connector 31929
3 Nitrile Seal Ring 31884
4 Female Half (Butt Weld Prep Piece) 31932
5 Retainer Segments (3 ea. included) 31926
6 Retainer Ring 31927
Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Drawing
19
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Titan Class C W/3 XXH Butt-weld Connections Parts List
ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY SPARES
1 34001 BODY, MACHINE 3" 1

TITAN C
32524 SEAT, INSERT,TITAN
2
3 33003-01 PISTON BODY, SUB- 1 *
ASSY., TITAN
3a 13229-10 BUSHING, F/ PISTON 1
4 32500- CAP, FOR PISTON 1

02/M2
5 31948/M2 SUB, M2 / TITAN 1
CLASS
31900 STEM BUSHING 1
6
7 32501-2 SEAL, PISTON, 1 *
LOWER
8 32512 SEAL, RETAINER 2
9 31914 SEAL, UPPER PISTON 1 *

(SHOULDER)
10 31909 SEAL,STEM BUSHING, 1 *
INNER(VITON)
11 702640- O-RING, PISTON 1 *
03-20 CAP,FACE SEAL
12 702640- O-RING, SUB TO 1 *
24-31 BODY
13 3251 SEAL, FACE 1 *
(F/INSERT)
14 702640- O-RING, STEM 1 *
23-01 BUSHING OUTER
15 34020 BONNET, SUB- 1
ASSY,TITAN C
15a 13229-08 BUSHING, BONNET 1
16 30377 HANDLE, RESET, 1

MACHINED
17 32025-2 NAMEPLATE,F/ 1
BONNET (SMALL)
23545 PIN, LOWER LINK 2
18
19 20712-02 PIN, SPIROL 5
20 20786 LINK, LOWER 2
21 31977 UPPER LINK SUB- 1

ASSY.
20
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
13229-13 BUSHING F/ UPPER 2

21a LINK
38161 CRANK, SUB-ASSY. 1
22
13229-13 BUSHING, F/ CRANK 2
22a
23 30391 SPRING, RESET 1
CRANK
24 20712-13 PIN, SPIROL 1
25 20791 SPRING, LINKAGE 2
26 31975 TOP CRANK PIN 1
27 30380 KEEPER, SPRING 1
30387 ROD, SPRING GUIDE 1

28
38159 COVER, SUB-ASSY. 1
29
13229 BUSHING, F/ COVER 1
29a
30373 RESET CRANK 1
30
30388 ROLLER, RESET 1
31 CRANK
5953-34 NUT, AJUSTING, 1
32 SELF-LOCKING
30379 INDICATOR, SET 1
33 PRESSURE
30385 RETAINER, UPPER 1
34 SPRING
20798 STUD, ADJUSTING 1
35
SEE CHART CAL. 1
36 PLATE
SEE CHART SPRING, 2
37 LOAD
30389 SCREW, LOAD 1
38
30382 RETAINER, LOWER 1
39 SPRING
20712-04 PIN, SPIROL 2
40
30381 PIN, CRANK PIVOT 1
41
5929-02 FITTING, ALEMITE, 1
42 1/4 MALE NPT
702640- O-RING, RESET 1
43 21-01 HANDLE
20712-03 PIN, SPIROL 2
44
21
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
30397 SHAFT, RELEASE 1

45
32052 RETAINER, 1
46 THREADED RELEASE
47 30396 BUTTON, RELEASE 1
48 31868 SPRING, RELEASE 1

BUTTON
49 111656 SCREW U-DRIVE 16
50 204044- SCREW, SH CAP, 4

10-14
51 111676 CAPSCREW, FERRY 8
HEAD 1
52 111680 LOCK WASHER 1 8
53 702640- O-RING, FLANGE 2

23-71
54 063150- SCREW, SH CAP, 5/8 4
10-15
55 32025-1 NAMEPLATE, F/RRV 1
COVER (LARGE)
56 32025-3 NAMEPLATE,TITAN 1
CLASS
57 31852 FLANGE, WELD NECK 2
F/3"-C
22
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Drawing
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List

1 34001 BODY, MACHINE 3" TITAN C 1
2 32524 SEAT, INSERT, TITAN 1 *
3 33003-01 PISTON BODY, SUB-ASSY., TITAN 1 *
3a 13229-10 BUSHING, F/ PISTON 1
4 32500-02/M2 CAP, FOR PISTON 1
5 31948/M2 SUB, M2 / TITAN CLASS 1
6 31900 S TEM BUSHING 1
7 32501-2 SEAL, PISTON, LOWER 1 *
8 32512 SEAL, RETAINER 2
9 31914 SEAL, UPPER PISTON (SHOULDER) *
10 31909 SEAL, STEM BUSHING, INNER (VITON) 1 *
11 702640-03-20 O-RING, PISTON CAP, FACE SEAL 1 *
12 702640-24-31 O-RING, SUB TO BODY 1 *
13 32519 SEAL, FACE (F/INSERT) 1 *
15 34020 BONNET, SUB-ASSY, TITAN C 1
15a 13229-08 BUSHING, BONNET 1
16 30377 HANDLE, RESET, MACHINED 1
17 32025-2 NAMEPLATE,F/ BONNET (SMALL) 1
18 23545 PIN, LOWER LINK 2
19 20712-02 PIN, SPIROL 5
20 20786 LINK, LOWER 2
21 31977 UPPER LINK SUB-ASSY. 1
21a 13229-10 BUSHING F/ UPPER LINK 1
22 38161 CRANK, SUB-ASSY. 1
22a 13229-13 BUSHING, F/ CRANK 2
23 30391 SPRING, RESET CRANK 1
24 20712-13 PIN, SPIROL 1
25 20791 SPRING, LINKAGE 2
26 31975 TOP CRANK PIN 1
27 30380 KEEPER, SPRING 1
28 30387 ROD, SPRING GUIDE 1
29 38159 COVER, SUB-ASSY. 1
29a 13229-12 BUSHING, F/ COVER 1
30 30373 RESET CRANK 1
31 30388 ROLLER, RESET CRANK 1
32 5953-34 NUT, AJUSTING, SELF-LOCKING 1
33 30379 INDICATOR, SET PRESSURE 1
34 30385 RETAINER, UPPER SPRING 1
35 20798 STUD, ADJUSTING 1
36 SEE CHART CAL. PLATE 1
37 SEE CHART SPRING, LOAD 2
1
MANUAL: M-34000
www.nov.com
Class Type CW/3-1502 Connection Parts List (Continue)
38 30389 SCREW, LOAD 1

39 30382 RETAINER, LOWER SPRING 1
40 20712-04 PIN, SPIROL 2
41 30381 PIN, CRANK PIVOT 1
42 5929-02 FITTING, ALEMITE, 1/4 MALE NPT 1
43 702640-21-01 O-RING, RESET HANDLE 1 *
44 0712-03 PIN, SPIROL 2
45 30397 SHAFT, RELEASE 2
46 32052 RETAINER, THREADED RELEASE SFT. 2
47 30396 BUTTON, RELEASE 2
48 31868 SPRING, RELEASE BUTTON 2
49 111656 SCREW U-DRIVE 16
50 204044-10-14 SCREW, SH CAP, 4
51 111676 CAPSCREW, FERRY HEAD 1 8
52 111680 LOCK WASHER 1 8
53 702640-23-71 O-RING, FLANGE 2
54 063150-10-15 SCREW, SH CAP, 5/8 4
55 32025-1 NAMEPLATE, F/RRV COVER (LARGE) 1
56 32025-3 NAMEPLATE,TITAN CLASS 1
57 31930 1502 FEMALE FLG CONNECTOR 1
58 31929 1502 MALE FLG CONNECTOR 1
59 31884 SEAL RING, F/1002 & 1502 UNIONS 2
60 31925 NUT, DETACHABLE 3 1502 2
61 31931 SUB, 3 1502/1002 MALE X 3 XXH BW 2
62 31932 SUB, 3 1502 FEMALE X 3 XXH BW 2
63 31926 SEGMENTS (3-PC) SET 2
64 31927 RETAINER RING 10/1502 2
National Oilwell Varco Brands
Advanced Wirecloth Mission Downhole Solutions

Aktro Molde
Alberta Instrument Mono
Albins Enterprises Monoflo
AmClyde National
Baylor National Oilwell
Best Flow Products
BLM
Norson
Oil Tools Solutions Drilling Solutions
Bowen Oilwell
Brandt Omega Pumps
Cabot Pacific Inspection
Cardwell PCE
Chimo Equipment Peck-O-Matic
Continental Emsco PEP Engineering and Project Management
Cooper Procon As
Crestex Quality Tubing Solutions
Custom Die & Insert Rebound Rig
DELCO Retsco
Corporate Dreco RMI (Rig Manufacturing International)
Headquarters DSS (Drilling Support Services) Roberds Johnson
Eastern Oil Tools ROSS HILL
7909 Parkwood Circle Elmar Rucker Lifting and Handling Solutions
Drive EMD (Electro Motive Division) Russell Subservice
Houston, Texas 77036 Fibercast Sauerman
United States Fidmash Shaffer
Phone: +1 713 375 3700 Flanagan Ironworks Shearer
Phone: +1 1 888 262 8645 Franks Skytop Brewster
Gardner Denver (Hoisting) Smith Fiberglass Production Solutions
Gator Hawk Specialty
Gregory SSR
Griffith Stlprodukter
HALCO Star Fiberglass
Harrisburg Tech Power
Hepburn TEM (Tulsa Equipment Manufacturing)
HITEC Texas Oil Tools Supply Chain Solutions
Houston Scientific TS&M
Hydra Rig Tuboscope
Ideco Turner Oilfield Service
IPS (Integrated Power Systems) UNIFLEX
IRI International Unit (Cranes)
Koomey Universal Tubular and Corrosion Control
Kremco USF (Utility Steel Fabricators)
LOIS ALLIS Varco Solutions
Lucker Vector
M&W Versatech
M/D Totco Western Oilfield Engineering
Mathey Wheatley Gaso
MATTCO Wildcat Services
McElroy Marine Machinery Wilson Well Service and Completion Solutions
Miller Oilfield Woolley
www.nov.com

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump User Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

National Oilwell Varco References:

01 8/11/2014 For Information T. Schutt J. Olson B. Schumer

Revision Change Description

Vol. Chapter/ Title Remarks

1 1 General Information Section Not Applicable

1 2 Installation, Operation & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

1 3 Technical Documents & Drawings

1 3.1 General / Mechanical Drawings

1 3.2 System / Process Diagrams Section Not Applicable

1 3.3 Electrical / Instrument Section Not Applicable

1 3.4 Performance Data

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Vol. Chapter/ Title

1 2 Installation, Operation & Maintenance

1 2.2 Spare Parts List

Vol. Chapter/ Title Document Number Rev.

Technical Specification Pre-Shipment And Storage PS-4030 02

Commissioning Procedure, FB / FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump EDN-1688 02

Operation Manual Triplex Mud Pump For Models: FD- EPL-1911 01

Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pump MP.WARNING 02

Product Information Bulletin Triplex Mud Pumps Power 01-05-01-MP 06

Procedure The Use of and Application of Safety Wire for ASP00019 A

Pre-Shipment And Storage Preservation

RIG/PLANT REFERENCE REFERENCE DESCRIPTION

Client Document Number

02 12.09.2012 For Information RLP BTS GDH

Revision Change Description

Sub-tier: National Oilwell PS-3081

2 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION PRIOR TO PAINT

Mud Pump Models Quantity of Inhibitor

3 MANUFACTURING PLANT PRESERVATION AFTER PAINT

Tape or band down loose hinged guards and inspection covers.

4 STORAGE AT MANUFACTURING PLANT OR FINAL DESTINATION

5 STORAGE PREPARATIONS FOR MAIN DRIVE MOTORS.

6 PRESERVATION PROCEDURE WHEN STORAGE EXCEEDS SIX (6) MONTHS OF

Remove plastic sheeting.

Replenish rust inhibitor to quantities previously listed.

Rotate pinion shaft five (5) revolutions using supplied tool.

Replace plastic sheeting.

7 START-UP AFTER STORAGE

8 CONTACT DETAILS FOR NOTED CORROSION PREVENTATIVE MATERIALS

Product Name Company Contact Number

MONTH DAY YEAR

ADDITIONAL SERVICING INFORMATION IS

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP GDH 02

B. Schumer 12 Apr 2012 Bryce Brock 13 Apr 2012

COMPANY NAME: National Oilwell Varco

ADDRESS: 11000 Corporate Centre Drive

TELEPHONE: (281) 854-0400

TELEFAX: (281) 854-0505

DOCUMENT NUMBER: EDN-1688

DOCUMENT TITLE: Commissioning Procedure, FB/FD-1600 Triplex Mud Pump

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP GDH 02

B. Schumer 12 Apr 2012 Bryce Brock 13 Apr 2012

Part I. Pre-Commissioning Procedures

Part II. Commissioning Procedures

TRIPLEX MUD PUMP GDH 02

B. Schumer 12 Apr 2012 Bryce Brock 13 Apr 2012

INITIAL STARTUP PROCEDURES

PART I. PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES:

1. Power End of Pump:

0-500 PSI (0.34-34.5 bar)40 min. @ 40 SPM _ _

500-700 PSI (34.5-48.2 bar)40 min. @ 50 SPM _ _

1000 PSI (68.9 bar)..40 min. @ 60 SPM _ _

1500 PSI (103.4 bar)60 min. @ 80 SPM _ _

2000 PSI (138 bar)...60 min. @ 100 SPM _ _

2500 PSI (172.4 bar)60 min. @ 100 SPM _ _

RATED LINER PRESSURE*...180 min. @ 100 SPM _ _

PRESSURE.. ____ _ _ _ ___

TEMPERATURE. ____ _ _ _ ___

MOTOR AMPS ____ _ _ _ ___

REGULATING VALVE ADJUST ____ _ _ _ ___

INLET TEMPERATURE. ____ _ _ _ ___

OUTLET TEMPERATURE. ____ _ _ _ ___

COOLING AIR TEMP ____ _ _ _ ___

BEARING TEMP ____ _ _ _ ___

BLOWER AIRFLOW. ____ _ _ _ ___

MOTOR AMPS ____ _ _ _ ___

o VOLTS. ____ _ _ _ ___

LOAD SHARE (YES/NO).. ____ _ _ _ ___

COOLING AIR TEMP ____ _ _ _ ___

BEARING TEMP ____ _ _ _ ___

BLOWER AIRFLOW. ____ _ _ _ ___

MOTOR AMPS ____ _ _ _ ___

o VOLTS. ____ _ _ _ ___